SC21 5158 7_System34_Operators_Guide_Jan82 7 System34 Operators Guide Jan82

SC21-5158-7_System34_Operators_Guide_Jan82 SC21-5158-7_System34_Operators_Guide_Jan82

User Manual: SC21-5158-7_System34_Operators_Guide_Jan82

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 462

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

---- - - ---- ------ - - ----"

IBM System/34
Operator's Guide

SC21 -5158-7
File No. S34-40

-- - - ----------- - - -----•

IBM System/34
Operator's Guide

5C21- 51 58-7
File No. 534-40

Eighth Edition (January 1982)
This is a major revision of, and obsoletes, SC21-5158-6. See Chapters 2, 3, and 4 for
additions to the CHANGE and STATUS commands. Additional changes or additions to
the text and illustrations are indicated by a vertical line to the left of the change or addition.
This edition applies to release 8, modification 0 of IBM System/34 and the System
Support Program PiOduct (5726-SS1), Utilities Program Product i5726-UTl i, RPG i i
Program Product (5726-RG1), FORTRAN IV Program Product (5726-F01), Basic
Assembler and Macro Processor Program Product (5726-AS1), COBOL Program Product
(5726-CB1), BASIC Program Product (5726-BA1), Ideographic Generator/Sort Program
Product (5726-IG1; Far East countries only), and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions or technical newsletters.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be reported
in Technical Newsletters or in new editions of this publication.
This publication contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations.
To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals,
companies, brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the
names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental.
Use this publication only for the purposes stated in the Preface. It is possible that this
material might contain references to, or information about, IBM products {machines and
programs}, programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references
or information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM
products, programming, or services in your country. {For example, ideographic support is
available only in Far East countries.}
Publications are not stocked at the address below. Requests for copies of IBM publications
and for technical information about the system should be made to your IBM representative
or to the branch office serving your locality.
This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Use the
Reader's Comment Form at the back of this publication to make comments about this
publication: If the form has been removed, address your comments to IBM Corporation,
Publications, Department 256, Rochester, Minnesota 55901. I BM may use and distribute
any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring
any obligation whatever. You may, of cou rse, conti nue to use the information you supply.
©Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980, 1981, 1982

Preface

This manual provides the information you need to operate
the IBM System/34 and the System Support Program
Product (5726-SS1). In addition, this manual provides the
information you need to run the Utilities Progr~m Product
(5726-UT1), RPG II Program Product (5726-RG1),
FORTRAN IV Program Product (5726-F01), Basic
Assembler and Macro Processor Program Product
(5726-AS1), COBOL Program Product (5726-CB1),
BASIC Program Product (5726-BA 1), and the Ideographic
Generator /Sort Program Product (5726-IG 1; Far East
countries only).

•

IBM System/34 Command and OCL Statements Reference Summary, GX21-7690

•

IBM System/34 Planning Guide, GC21-5154

•

IBM System/34 Data Communications Reference
Manual, SC21-7703

•

IBM System/34 Data File Utility Reference Manual,
SC21-7656

•

IBM System/34 Source Entry Utility Reference Manual,
SC21-7657

This manual explains the following:
•

How to operate a display station

•

IBM System/34 Sort Reference Manual, SC21-7658

•

How to operate a subconsole display station

•

IBM System/34 Work Station Utility Reference Manual,
SC21-7663

•

How to operate the system console

•

IBM System/34 RPG /I Reference Manual, SC21-7667

•

How to operate the Utilities Program Product

•

How to operate the RPG II, FORTRAN IV, Basic
Assembler and Macro Processor, COBOL, and BASIC
Program Products

IBM System/34 Basic Assembler and Macro Processor
Reference Manual, SC21-7705

•

IBM 5251 Display Station Models 1 and 11/5252 Dual
Display Station Operator's Guide, GA21-9248

•

IBM 5251 Models 2 and 12 Display Station Operator's
Guide, GA21-9323

•

IBM 5256 Printer Operator's Guide, GA21-9260

•

IBM 5211 Printer Models 1 and 2 Component Description
and Operator's Guide, GA24-3658

•

IBM System/34 Screen Design Aid Programmer's Guide
and Reference Manual, SC21-7716

•

IBM System/34 FORTRAN IV Reference Manual,
SC21-7706

•
•

Data communications operation
Problem determination information

The ideographic version of the SSP, the Ideographic
Generator/Sort Program Product, and all ideographic
devices are available in Far East countries only.
Note: This manual follows the convention that he means
he or she.

Related Publications
•

IBM System/34 Displayed Messages Guide, SC21-5159

•

IBM 3262 Printer Models A 1 and B1 Component
Description and Operator's Guide, GA33-1530

•

IBM System/34 System Support Reference Manual,
SC21-5155

•

IBM System/34 Interactive Communications Feature
Reference Manual, SC21-7751

•

IBM System/34 System Measurement Facility Reference
Manual, SC21-7828

• IBM System/34 Installation and Modification Reference
Manual: Program Products and Physical Setup,
SC21-7689

iii

•

IBM System/34 COBOL Reference Manual, SC21-7741

•

IBM System/34 Concepts and Design Guide, SC21-7742

•

IBM System/34 BASIC Reference Manual, SC21-7835

•

IBM System/34 3270 Device Emulation User's Guide,
SC21-7868

•

IBM System/34 Bibliography, GH30-0231

•

IBM System/34 Master tndex, SC21-7739

•

IBM 5250 Information Display System (Ideographic
Language Implementation) Introduction, Model 1
(Japan), GA09-1621; Model 2 (Taiwan), GA09-1625

•

IBM System/34 Character Generator Utility User's
Guide and Reference Manual, SC21-7845

•

IBM System/34 Ideographic Sort Reference Manual,
SC21-7850

•

IBM 5255 Display Station Operator's Guide, Model 1,
GA09-1623

•

IBM 5255 Display Station Operator's Guide, Model 2,
GA09-1626

•

!8M 5225 Printer Mode!s 1,2,3, and 4 Operator's
Guide, GA34-0054

•

IBM 5225 Printer Models 11 and 12 Operator's Guide,
GA34-0089

•

IBM 5224 Printer Models 1 and 2 Operator's Guide,
GA34-0092

•

IBM 5224 Printer Model 12 Operator's Guide,
GA34-0095

IBM publications are available that describe the IBMsupplied ideographic characters and list their corresponding
IBM codes. Contact your country representative for
further information.

Contents

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
Display Station Operation
Subconsole Operation . . .
System Console Operation
SSP Utility Programs
System/34 Utilities
Program Products ..
Data Communications.
Problem Determination
Character Generator Utility and Ideographic Sort

.1·1
. 1-1
. 1-1
.1·1
. 1-2
.1-2
. 1-2
.1-2
. 1-2
.1-2

How to Display the Status of One or All Jobs on the
Input Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Cancel Jobs on the Input Job Queue . . . .
How to Assign Priority to Jobs to be Placed on the
I nput Job Queue . . . . . . .
How to Interrupt a Job !Inquiry)
How to Display the Time . . . . .
How to Sign Off a local or Remote Display Station
How to Drop a Switched Communications Line . . .

.2-76

.2·77
.2·77
.2-78
.2-81
2-81

2-82

3·1
3-3
How to Specify Subconsole Mode . . . . . .
34
Subconsole Operator Control Commands ..
.3·5
How to Display the Status of the System Devices
.3-10
How to Display the Status of the Remote System Devices
.3-14
How to Display the Status of the SSP-ICF Subsystems
How to Display the Status of the SSP-ICF Subsystem
Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 3·16
How to Display the Status of the Input Job Queue . . . . . . . . 3·18
How to Cancel Jobs on the Input Job Queue.
. . . . . . 3-20
How to Display Spool File Entries .
. 3·21
How to Start a Spool Writer .
. 3·23
How to Stop a Spool Writer
.3-24
How to Restart a Spool Writer
. 3-2~
How to Display the Spool Writer Status
. 3-26
How to Cancel Spool File Entries
. 3-29
How to Hold Spool File Entries . . . . .
. 3-30
How to Release Spool File Entries. . . .
.3·31
How to Change the Number of Printed Copies of
.3-33
Spool File Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.3·34
How to Change the Defer Status of a Spool File Entry .
.3-36
How to Change the Forms Number of Spool File Entries
.3-38
How to Change the Printer ID . . . . . . . . . .
How to Change the Order of Spool File Entries ..
.3-40
How to Change the Priority of a Spool Writer . . .
.3·41
How to Change the Resident/Swappable Attribute
.3·42
of a Spool Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Change the Number of Separator Pages
.3-43
Printed by a Spool Writer
. 3~,44
How to Reply to a Message

CHAPTER 3. SUBCONSOLE OPERATION
CHAPTER 2. DISPLAY STATION OPERATION

.. 2·1

Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Control Commands . . . . . . . . . .
Display Station Operator Control Commands
How to Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use the HELP Procedure . . . . . . .
How to Display the Status of Your Work Session
How to Display the Status of Your Communications
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Display the Status of the SSP-ICF Subsystems
How to Display the Status of the SSP-ICF Subsystem
Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Display the Status of the System Devices
How to Specify the Session Date . . . . . . .
How to Specify the Number of Lines Per Page
How to Change the System List Device . . . .
How to Modify Work Session Items Via OCl
OCl (Operation Control language)
How to Run Jobs
Command Statements . . . . .
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of How to Run Jobs
How to Assign Priority to Jobs .
How to Specify Printer Information for a Job
How to Specify the Region Size for a Job
How to Set Display Station Indicators
Messages . . . . . . . . . .
~eyboard Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Send a Message . . . . . . . . .
How to Display Messages Sent from Other Display
Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Display Dually Routed Messages . . . . . .
How to Suppress Informational Messages . . . . . .
Command Function Keys and Function Control Keys
DUP Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Display Spool File Entries
How to Display the Spool Writer Status
How to Cancel a Spool File Entry .
How to Hold a Spool File Entry . . . . .
How to Release a Spool File Entry
How to Change the Defer Status of a Spool File Entry
How to Change the Number of Printed Copies of a
Spool Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Change the Forms Number of a Spool Entry
Input Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Put a Job on the Input Job Queue . . . . . .

.2·3
. 2-4
.2-5
.2-6
.2-13
.2-17
.2-23
.2-28
.2-31
.2-34
.2-43
.2-44
.2-45
.2·46
.2-46
.2-47
. 2-47
.2-48
.2-49
.2-50
. 2-51
.2-52
.2-52
.2-52
.2-57
.2-58
.2-58
.2-59
.2-60
.2-61
.2-62
.2-62
. 2-63
.2-65
.2-67
.2-68
.2-69
. 2-70
. 2-71
.2·72
.2·74
.2·74

How to Send a Message ..
How to Display the Time .
How to Sign Off a Subconsole

CHAPTER 4. SYSTEM CONSOLE OPERATION
System Console Operator Control Commands
Operator Panel ..
CE Panel
Diskette Handling
How to Insert and Remove Diskettes and Magazines
How to Insert a Diskette in the Diskette 1 or
Diskette 2D Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Remove a Diskette from the Diskette 1 or
Diskette 2D Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Insert Diskettes in Slots 1, 2, or 3 of the
Diskette Magazine Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Remove Diskettes from Slots 1,2, or 3
of the Diskette Magazine Unit

.3·45
.3-46
.3-46
.4·1
.4-2
.4-4
.4-6

.4-8
.4-8
.4-9
.4-10
.4-10
. 4·11

How to Insert Diskettes into the Magazine . . . . .
.4-11
How to Remove Diskettes from the Magazine ., .
. 4-11
How to Insert a Magazine in the Diskette Magazine
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-12
How to Remove a Magazine from the Diskette
Maqazine Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
How to Clear a Magazine Diskette Jam . . . . .
. .4-13
How to Clear a Diskette I/O Slot Jam . . . .
.4-14
Initial Program Load from the System Console
.4-15
IPL From Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-16
IPL From Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-31
Using the RELOAD Command to Perform an IPL
From Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-33
System 0 isplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-35
How to Use the System Console as a Display Station
.4-36
Alternative System Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-37
How to Display the Status of the System Devices . .
.4-38
How to Display the Status of the Remote System Devices
.4-43
How to Display the Tasks in the System . . . . . . . .
.4-47
How to Display the Status of the SSP-ICF Subsystems
.4-49
How to Display the Status of the SSP-ICF Subsystem
Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-51
How to Display the Status of Messages at Subconsole
Display Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-53
How to Take Local or Remote Devices Online and
Offline (VARY Command) " . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-55
How to Exchange Device IDs (ASSIGN Command)
.4-56
Messages . . . . . . . . . .
· .4-57
Keyboard Errors . . . . . .
· .4-62
How to Send a Message ..
.4-62
How to Reply to a Message
.4-63
How to Suppress Informational Messages
.4-64
.4-65
How to Display the Time . . .
. 4-65
How to Shut Down System/34 . . . . . . . .
How to Restart System/34 . . . . . . . . . .
· .4-65
Setting the Print Belt Image After Changing the Print Belt
· .4-66
Job Control From the System Console
.4-66
How to Display Job Status .
.4-67
How to Stop Job Initiation . . . . .
.4-70
How to Stop Job Execution . . . .
.4-70
How to Stop SSP-ICF Subsystem Sessions
.4-71
How to Start SSP-ICF Subsystem Sessions
.4-71
How to Restart Job Initiation ..
.4-72
How to Restart Job Execution . . . . . . .
.4-72
How to Cancel an Executing Job
.4-73
How to Change the Priority of an Executing Job
.4-74
Print SpOOling-Control From the System Console
.4-75
Control of Print Spooling . . . . .
.4-76
How to Display Spool File Entries
.4-76
How to Start a Spool Writer .
.4-79
How to Stop a Spool Writer
· .4-80
How to Restart a Spool Writer
..
· .4-81
How to Display the Spool Writer Status
· .4-82
.4-85
How to Cancel Spool File Entries .
How to Hold Spool File Entries . . . . .
.4-86
How to Release Spool File Entries . . . .
.4-87
How to Change the Number of Printed Copies of
.4-89
Spool File Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Change the Defer Status of a Spool File Entry
.4-90
How to Change the Forms Number of Spool File
Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-92
How to Change the Printer 10 . . . . . . . . . .
.4-94
How to Change the Order of Spool File Entries
.4-96
How to Change the Priority of a Spool Writer .
· .4-97
How to Change the Resident/Swappable Attribute
of a Spool Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
· .4-98

How to Change the Number of Separator Pages
Printed by a Spool Writer . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Spooling Examples . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Job Queue---Control From the System Console
How to Display the Input Job Queue
How to Start the Input Job Queue
How to Stop the Input Job Queue ..
How to Cancel Jobs on the Input Job Queue
How to Change the Order of Jobs on the
I nput Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . .

· .4-99
.4-100
· 4-113
· 4-114
· 4-115
· 4-115
· 4-116
· 4-116

CHAPTER 5. HOW TO OPERATE WSU
WSU Command Statement
WSU Prompt Display
How to Sign On . . . . ..
Enter Mode . . . . . . . . .
How to Key Data on a Display
Review Mode . . . . . . . . . .
How to Review Records
Review/Delete Mode
How to Delete a Record
I nsert Mode . . . . . . . . . .
How to Insert a Record .
How to Select a Different Work Session .
How to End a Work Session
How to Restart a WSU Program
WSU Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use the Status Line
WSU Aid Display . . . . . . . .
WSU Command Keys and Template
WSU Command Function Keys and Function Control Keys .

.5-1
.5-1
.5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-14

CHAPTER 6. HOW TO OPERATE DFU
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
Ideograph ic D F U . . . . . . . _ . . . . .
Command Function Keys, Function Control Keys,
and DFU Template . . . . . .
Command Parameters . . . . .
Enter Mode and Update Mode
Enter Mode . . . . . . . . .
Update Mode . . . . . . . .
Enter/Update Display Format
Displaying Batch Accumulators
Entering a New Record . . .
Updating an Existing Record . .
Deleting an Existing Record ..
Inserting a Record Between Existing Records
Retrieving the Previous Record Processed
Retrieving Records by Scrolling ..
Terminating an Enter/Update Job .
Inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
Inquiry Display Format .. _ .. .
Selecting Records to be Displayed
Printing Records from Display
Terminating an Inquiry Job
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.6-1
.6-1
.6-2

.6-10
.6-10
.6-12
.6-14
.6-19
.6-20
.6-21
.6-22
.6-23
.6-24
.6-24
.6-25
.6-27
.6-29
.6-30
.6-30
.6-31
.6-31

CHAPTER 7. HOW TO OPERATE SEU
How to Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
Command Function Keys and Template
SEU Displays.
Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

· .7-1
· .7-1
· .7-5
.7-23
.7-23

CHAPTER 8. HOW TO OPERATE SORT
Running the Sort Program . . . . . . . . .

• .8-1
· .8-1

.6-2

.6-8

CHAPTER 9. HOW TO OPERATE SCREEN DESIGN
AID (SDA) • • . • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
How to Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDA Command Function Keys and Template
Help Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTER 10. HOW TO PROCESS RPG II
PROGRAMS •••••••••••••.
Compiling RPG II Source Programs .
RPG Command Statement .
RPGX Command Statement
RPGR Command Statement
AUTO Command Statement
Executing an RPG II Object Program
Data Entry for a CONSO LE File . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Function Keys for a CONSOLE File
Function Control Keys for a CONSOLE File
Steps in Entering Data
Data Entry for a KEYBORD File
KEY Operation
SET Operation . . . . . . . . .
SET /KEY Operation
Data Entry for a WORKSTN File
Command Function Keys for a WORKSTN File
Function Control Keys for a WORKSTN File ..
RPG II Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.9-1

.9-2
.9-4

.9-6

• •••• 10··1
· 10·1
.10·2
· 10-4
.10··5
.10-7

.10·9
.10·9
10·10
10-11
10-12
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-16
10-16
10-16

CHAPTER 11. HOW TO OPERATE BASIC ASSEMBLER AND
MACRO PROCESSOR PROGRAM PRODUCT • • • . . . • . 11-1
Basic Assembler and Macro Processor Command Statements . . 11-1
. 11-3
Basic Assembler and Macro Processor Messages
CHAPTER 12. HOW TO OPERATE FORTRAN IV
FORTP Command Statement
FORTC Command Statement .
FORTG Command Statement .
FORTGO Command Statement
FORTCG Command Statement
FORTPRNT Command Statement
FORTMOVE Command Statement
FORTRAN Data Switch Procedure
FORTRAN Messages . . . . . . . .

.12-1
.12-2

CHAPTER 15. HOW TO OPERATE THE DATA
COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (BSC, SDLC)
Console Display Lights and Switch
Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSC .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interactive Communications (SSP-ICF)
Remote Work Stations . . . . . . . . .
MRJE/SRJE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equalization for the IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem
4800 bps I ntegrated Modem Manual Test Procedures .
Primary SDLC Error Retry Counts
(SETRETRY Procedure)
General Information
Operation . . . . . .
SDLC Station Test .. .
General Information
Operation . . . . . .
Notes On Operation
Data Communications Problem Determination
CHAPTER 16. PROBLEM DETERMINATION
Locating the Problem . . . .
Determining the Problem ..
Thermal Check Light On
Power Check Light On .
No System Power . . . .
Processor Check Light On
Console Check Light On
Cannot IPL . . . . . . . . .
No Visible System Action
I ncorrect Output for the Job
3262/5211 Printer Indicator Lights On
5256 Printer Indicator Lights On
5224/5225 Printer Error Recovery Procedures.

15-1
15-1
15-3
15-3
15-5
15-6
15-7
15-8
15-11
15-15
15-15
15-15
15-16
15-16
15-16
15-23
15-24
16-1

16-1
16-3
16-4
16-4
16-4

16-5
16-8
16-8

16-9
16-10
16-11
16-13
. 16-14

.12-2
.12-4
· 12-4
.12-6
.12-7
. 12-8

.12-9
12-12

CHAPTER 13. HOW TO OPERATE COBOL
COBOLP Command Statement
COBOL Command Statement ..
COBOLCG Command Statement
COBOLG Command Statement .
COBSYSIN Command Statement
COBMOVE Command Statement
COBO L Messages . . . . . . . . .

••••••. 13-1
.13-2
.13-2

CHAPTER 14. HOW TO OPERATE BASIC
Program Execution Restriction
BASIC Procedure Command . . .
BASIC MRT Procedure Command
BASICR Procedure Command
BASICP Procedure Command
BASICS Procedure Command

14-1
14-1
14-1
.14-4
14-5
14-7
14-8

.134

APPENDIX A. UTILITIES FOR IDEOGRAPHIC
CHARACTER GENERATION AND SORT
How to Operate the Character Generator Utility
Command Function Keys .. .
Function Control Keys . . . . . . . . .
How to Operate Ideographic Sort . . . . .
Running the Ideographic Sort Program
Running the Sort Active Table Build Function

A-1
A-1
A-2
A-4
A-6
A-6
A-7

GLOSSARY

G-1

INDEX

X-1

...

· 13-5

.13-6
· 13-7
.13-8

vii

Nonideographic

Note: Ideographic devices shown in this publication are design models.
viii

Chapter 1. Introduction

As an operator, you can use the IBM System/34 to perform a wide variety of data
processing functions. You may be a display station operator, a subconsole operator, or a system console operator. Each operator has different capabilities and
functions. Some of these relate directly to the type of display station you will
operate. Others relate to System/34 utilities or program products. In addition,
you may have data communications equipment. And, at times, you may need to
do problem determination for your work station. This manual is divided into
chapters that present operating information for each of these areas.

Display Station Operation
Chapter 2 describes functions you can perform as a display station operator. These
functions include signing on, using the HELP procedure, and displaying the status
of the following: your work session, your communications support, the system
devices, the spool file, and the job queue. This chapter also tells you how to run
jobs, send and reply to messages, place jobs on the input job queue, interrupt an
executing program, and sign off. Control commands for these functions are
described, and the screens that appear on your display screen when you enter these
control commands are shown and explained. All operators should read this chapter.

Subconsole Operation
Chapter 3 describes the functions you can perform as a subconsole operator in
subconsole mode. These functions include specifying subconsole mode and displaying the status of the system devices, of your communications support, and of your
spool file entries. This chapter also tells you how to start, stop, restart, and cancel
your spool file entries, and how to change the number of printed copies or the
forms number, or the printer 10 for your spool file entries. Finally, the chapter
describes sending or replying to a message, displaying the time, and signing off
a subconsole. Subconsole control commands are described, and displays that
appear when you enter these control commands are shown and explained.

System Console Operation
Chapter 4 explains how the system console operator operates the system by performing tasks such as inserting diskettes, operating the system unit operator panel,
using the CE panel, and operating the system printer. The system operator is also
given information for controlling jobs, the input job queue, print spooling, and for
starting and ending system operation. Control commands that the system console
operator uses to perform these and other functions are described in this chapter.
The displays that appear on the system console screen are shown and explained.

Introduction

1-1

SSP Utility Programs
In past editions of the Operator's Guide, the SSP utility programs were listed
according to utility name, function, and procedure name; they were not described
in detail. In 'this release, the listing of the SSP utilities by function was moved
from the Operator's Guide to the Command and OeL Statements Reference
Summary. This list is also in the Introduction to the SSP Reference Manual. The
procedures used to operate the utilities are described in detail in the SSP Reference
Manual.

System/34 Utilities
Chapters 5 through 9 describe utilities that you can use in your data processing.
Instructions for operating the work station utility (WSU), data file utility (DFU),
source entry utility (SEU), screen design aid (SDA), and SORT are described in the
appropriate chapters.

Program Products
Chapters 10 through 14 describe System/34 program products. These chapters
explain command statements you can use to operate RPG II, Basic Assembler and
Macro Processor, FORTRAN IV, COBOL, and BASIC.

Data Communications
Actions required to initiate communications are described in Chapter 15.

Problem Determination
Steps you can take for problem determination for the system unit, display stations,
or printers are described in Chapter 16.

Character Generator Utility and Ideographic Sort
Appendix A contains a brief summary of the information you need to operate both
the character generator utility, including the use of ideographic command keys,
and the ideographic sort program.

1-2

Chapter 2. Display Station Operation

If your display station is a subconsole, you should also read Chapter 3, Subconsole

Operation.
If your display station is the system console, you should also read Chapter 4,

System Console Operation.
As a display station operator, your responsibilities may vary depending on how the
system is used. If display stations are used for interactive job processing, your
responsibilities include starting jobs, monitoring them as they execute, and responding to situations that may require your action. If display stations are used for entering data, your responsibilities include entering data and updating that data for a
particular application.
Display stations from which you can start jobs and enter data are called command
display stations. Display stations from which you can only enter data are called
data display stations. Your display station's capabilities (command and data or data
only) are determined during system configuration.

Display Station Operation

2-1

This chapter describes the functions you might perform as a display station
operator:
•

How to determine operating modes

•

How to sign on

•

How to use the HELP procedure

•

How to display the status of your work session

•

How to display the status of your communications support

•

How to display the status of the system devices

•

How to set your work session environment (a work session begins when you sign
on and ends when you sign off)

•

How to ru n jobs

•

How to send messages and reply to messages

•

How to display the status of your spool file entries

•

How to use the input job queue

•

How to interrupt an executing program

•

How to sign off

Note: If your system has the ideographic version of the SSP, and if your display
station is ideographic capable, many of the input fields on your display screen are
open fields. In an open field, both alphanumeric and ideographic characters can be
entered. Refer to the 5255 Display Station Operator's Guide for information on
how to use open fields.

2-2

OPERATING MODES
Display stations hav!~ five modes of operation: system console mode, subconsole
mode, command mode, standby mode, and data mode.

System console mode is used by the system operator to perform system console
functions. Refer to Chapter 4 for a complete description of system console
operation.

Sub console mode is used by subconsole operators to control printers assigned to
their display stations. Refer to Chapter 3 for a complete description of subconsole
mode operation.
A display station can operate in command mode, standby mode, and data mode.
Command display stations can operate in any of the modes; data display stations
can operate only in standby mode or data mode. You can initiate jobs only from
a display station in command mode. The operations described in this chapter, as
well as the operations described in Chapters 5 through 15, are done in command
or data mode.
A display station in standby mode is waiting to be acquired and used by a program
running on the system. When an operator signs on to a data display station, the
display station is automatically in standby mode. A command display station is
automatically in command mode after you sign on; it can be placed in standby
mode by using the MODE command.
A display station is in data mode when it is acquired by a program, whether the display station requested the program or the display station was acquired while in
standby mode. You cannot initiate jobs from a display station in data mode, but
you can use the display station for data entry and for interactive job processing.
During interactive processing, the display station communicates with the program.
The program can prompt you for specific information and you can respond by
entering that information.

Display Station Operation

2~3

OPERATOR CONTROL COMMANDS

Various commands can be used by display station operators, subconsole operators,
and system console operators. In some cases, a command can be entered by all of
these operators. Other commands are restricted to specifically configured display
stations, such as the system console or a command display station. The following
chart shows the operator control commands and the modes from which they can
be entered:

Command Name

Display Station
Operator
(Command or
Data Mode)

Subconsole
Operator
(Subconsole
Mode}

ASSIGN
CANCEL

CHANGE

CONSOLE

HOLD

IDELETE

JOBQ

MODE

MSG

OFF

PRTY

RELEASE

X
X

RESTART

START

STATUS

STOP
TIME
VARY

2-4

System Console
Operator
(Console Mode)

DISPLAY STATION OPERATOR CONTROL COMMANDS
The following control commands are discussed in this chapter. All can be entered
at a display station in command mode. Only MODE, MSG, and OFF can be entered
from data mode.
CANCEL JOBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
(C)

PRTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

(J)

RELEASE PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69
CANCEL PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
(C)

(L)

(P)

STATUS COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
CHANGE COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71

(D)

(C)

(G)

ST ATUS JO BO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76
CHANGE DEFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

(D)

(J)

(G)

ST ATUS PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
CHANGE FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72

(D)

(P)

(G)

STATUS REMOTES . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
CONSOLE ....... For a description of
CONSO LE, see Chapter 4.

(D)

(R)

STATUS SESSION . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
HOLD PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68
(H)

(D)

(S)

(P)

STATUS SUBSESS . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
IDELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60

(D)

JOBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74
(J)

STATUS SUBSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
(D)
(I)

MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

STATUS WORKSTN . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
(D)

(N)

(W)

MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
STATUSWRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
MSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

(D)

OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81

TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81

The commands and the command formats found in this chapter are fully explained
in the System Support Reference Manual and are listed in the Command and DCL
Statements Reference Summary.

Display Station Operation

2-5

HOW TO SI GN ON
Before you begin a work session, you must sign on, which prepares your display
station for running jobs, entering data, or acquisition by an application program. To
sign on:
Step 1. While holding down the Shift key, press the Sys Req key. Release both
keys, then press the Enter/Rec Adv key. If you try to sign on during IPL,
the IPL display appears (Figure 2-1).

IPL

IPL IS IN PROGRESS, PLEASE WAIT.

Figure 2-1. IPL Display

Wait until the Sign On display appears before continuing to step 2.
Step 2.

If the following Sign On display (Figure 2-2) appears, your display station
is a command display station. Respond to prompts
through
do
If the Sign On display shown in Figure 2-4 appears, your display
station is a data display station. Go to step 3.

2-6

0 ;

This line will appear only if badge security is active on your system.

",
W2T
________~ ;tion
work

SIGN 0:"':

ENTER BADGE • •
USER 1D . . . . • . . .
PASS!·:mm
MENU (OPTIONAL) .
LIDRARY . .
IGC SESSION (Y,N) •

I -e

This line will
appear only
if password
security is

active on
your system.

i G

OThiS line will
appear only if
the ideograph ic
version of the
SSP has been
configured, and
if your display
station is ideographic capable.
Figure 2-2. Command Display Station Sign On Display

o
•

If ENTER BADGE is not on the Sign On display, badge security is not active
at your display station. Go toO. If ENTER BADGE is on the display, insert
your badge in the magnetic stripe reader.
Enter your user ID. You must respond to this prompt. If password security
is active, your user ID is the ID previously assigned for you by your security
officer. This ID must conform to the following rules:

•

Eight characters or less

•

Cannot contain imbedded blanks or commas

•

First character must be A through Z,

•

Should not be the same as any work station ID (in this example, W2)

#, $, or @

If the word PASSWORD is not on the Sign On display, password security is
not active. Go toE). If the. word PASSWORD is on the display, enter your
four-character password which you obtain from your security officer. This
password does not appear when you enter it.
Enter the name of a menu that you want to use following sign on. Skip this
entry if you do not want to use a menu following sign on or if you want to
use the default menu assigned you by your security officer. If you are not
restricted to a menu, you can override a default menu by entering another
menu name, or by entering 000000.

Display Station Operation

2-7

Note: If you are restricted to using the menu previously assigned you by
your security officer, and the system cannot find that menu in either the sign
on or the system library, you will be unable to sign on. See your security
officer if this should happen. If you are not restricted to a menu, you can
override a default menu by entering another menu name, or by entering

000000.
•

This line contains the active user library for the work session. If no library
name appears, or if you want a different user library, you can enter the name
of the desired user library. leave this entry blank if you wish to use the
default library assigned by your security officer. If you leave this entry blank
or if you enter all zeros and a user library is not specified among the Del
statements or procedure commands you execute, the active library will be
the system library. If you enter the name of a secured user library and
resource security is active, you must be authorized to execute programs
from th is user library.

•

This prompt appears only if the system configuration includes the ideographic version of the SSP and if your display station is ideographic capable.
If you specify Y (yes), you can enter ideographic characters, and system
messages and screen formats are displayed using ideographic characters. If
you specify N (no), the system will display only alphanumeric characters on
system displays, but you can still enter and display ideographic characters on
user defined formats.
Figure 2-3 is an example of a completed Sign On display at a command display
station.

SIGN ON
ENTER BADGE • •

USER IO . . • . .

• • • MJR

PASSl>~ORD

MENU (OPTIONAL) •

This line will
appear only if
badge security
is active at
your display
station.

LIBRARY ••

IGC SeSSION (Y,N) .

This line will
appear only
if password
security is
active on
your system.
This line will
appear only if
your system
has ideographic
support, and
if your display
station is ideographic capable.

Figure 2·3. Completed Sign On Display at a Command___Display Station

CD
2-8

Press the Enter/Rec Adv key to go to step 4.

Step 3.

If the following display appears (Figure 2-4), your display station is a
through
which follow.
data display station. Do

4;)

W21

SIGN ON

Work
Station I D

ENTER BADGE •
USER 10 • • •
PASSWORD . • .

:~~- 0

IGC SESSION (YIN)

•Y

I•

This line will
appear only if

~adg~ security

active at
your display
station.
IS

if password
security is
active on
your system .
•

Figure 2-4. Data Display Station Sign On Display

This line will
appear on Iy if
your system
has ideographic
support, and if
your display
station is ideographic capable.

If ENTER BADGE is not on the Sign On display, badge security is not
active at your display station. Go to
If ENTER BADGE is on the
display, insert your badge in the magnetic stripe reader.
Enter your user 10. If password security is active, your user 10 is the ID
previously assigned for you by your security officer. This 10 must conform
to the following rules:

•

Eight characters or less

•

Cannot contain imbedded blanks or commas

•

First character must be A through Z,

•

Should not be the same as any work station 10 (in this example, W2)

#, $, or

If the word PASSWORD is not on the Sign On display, password security is
not active. If your display station is ideographic capable, go to • . If your
display station is not ideographic capable, go to
If the word
PASSWORD is on the display, enter your four-character password which
you obtain from your security officer. This password does not appear when
you enter it.

Display Station Operation

2-9

This prompt appears only if the system configuration includes the ideographic
version of the SSP and if your display station is ideographic capable. If you
specify Y (yes), you can enter ideographic characters, and system messages
and screen formats are displayed using ideographic characters. If you specify
N (no), the system will display only alphanumeric characters on system
displays, but you can still enter and display ideographic characters on user
defined formats.
Press the Enter /Rec Adv key.
Step 4. The work session has begun. If you have signed on to a command display
statron, the Command di-spJ-ay appears (either with or without a menu).
See Figures 2-5 and 2-6. If you have signed on to a data display station,
the Standby display appears (Figure 2-7).

,.
.... ,.

COMMAND

1 ~~

MENU:
l.
2.
3.
4.

CUSTOMER BILLING KEYING
LUM8ER IN STOCK
LUMBER ON ORDER
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
PAYROLL
INVENTORY CHECKLIST
NEW ACCOUNTS

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. BUILDER CONTRACTS

11. PRINT LUMBER IN STOCK
12. PROCESS STATEMENTS

MENUOI
13. DISPLAY MENU2
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
2l.
22.
23.
24. SIGN OFF

ENTER NUMBER, COMMAND, OR eCL.
<-

Figure 2-5. Command Display with Menu

A Command display with a menu signals that your display station is in command
mode and allows you to enter a number from the menu to specify a command or an
OCl statement. You can also enter commands or OCl from this display. If
you are restricted to this menu, you can only enter a number from the menu,
the OFF command, or the MSG command. Refer to How to Run Jobs,
later in this chapter, for an explanation of menus.
If your display st~~ion has a 960·character display screen, the first two lines
of the display and items 1 through 6 and 13 through 18 will be displayed
first. To display the second half of the menu, press the Enter/Rec Adv key.

2-10

READY

If the display station has a 960-character display screen and a free-format
menu is selected, lines 1 through 8 of the display and the ENTE R NUMBE R,
COMMAND, or OCl line will be displayed first. If the Enter/Rec Adv key
is pressed without any data entered, lines 1,2, and 9 through 14 will be
displayed, along with the line for operator action. Lines 15 through 20 of
the menu are not displayed.
Note: If a menu is built with ideographic characters for a 5255 Display
Station, it cannot be displayed at a device other than a 5255 Display Station.

,~-----------------------------------------------------------~.~----~.'~.
COMMAND
1012

ENTER COMMAND OR DCl STATEMENT
<- READY

Figure 2-6. Command Display without Menu

The Command display signals that the display station is in command mode and
allows you to enter control commands, procedure commands, or OCL. Refer to
How to Run JQbs, later in this chapter, for an explanation of the Command-Clisplay.

-atsp-Iay Station Operation

2-11

---~--~

STANDBY

I
I

II
i

<- REt..!)y

----------------------------------------------------------------.------~~~
Figure 2-7. Standby Display

The Standby display signals that your data display station is in standby mode, which
allows it to be acquired by a user program.
At a command display station, you can switch between command mode and
standby mode.
To switch from command mode to standby mode, enter MODE and the Standby
display appears.
From the Standby display, you can:
•

Have your display station acquired by an application program

•

Send messages to other operators by using the MSG control command

•

Receive messages through the MSG control command

•

Sign off by using the OFF control command

To switch from standby mode to command mode, enter MODE.

2-12

HOW TO USE THE HELP PROCEDURE

$HELP is an SSP utility designed to aid System/34 operators in executing many
System/34 functions. Many of the procedures now on the System/34 require as
many as 10 parameters that are order dependent; that is, they must be entered in
the order shown in the command format. The HELP procedure prompts you for
these parameters. In addition, the HELP procedure provides descriptive text for
SSP commands, OCL statements, and procedure control expressions.
To invoke the HE LP procedure, either press the Help key when your display
station is in command mode, or key in the word HELP at your display station.
The following menu will appear:

,.
SYSTEM/34 HELP CATEGORIES
1. SSP Procedure Commands
2. Control Commands
3. Operat;on Control Language - OCL
4. Procedure Control Expressions
5. Utilities - DFU,SDA,SEU,SORT,WSU
6. Languages & Corepllers - ASH,BASIC,C080L,FORTRAN,OLINK,RPG
7. Data Communications Procedures
8. Service Aid Procedures

ENTER NUt-1BER OF CATEGORY--->

CHD KEY 1 - FUNCTIONS
CMD KEY 7 - CANCEL

Press command key 1 for a description of the options available to you. Press command key 7 to cancel the HELP procedure and return to the Command display.

Display Station Operation

2-13

The following display appears if you select option 1 (SSP Procedure Commands):

SYSTEM/34 SSP PROCEDURES
ALTERBSC - Alter SSC Parameters

CONDENSE - Free Library Space

ALTERSDL - Alter SDLC Parameters

COPYIl

- Copy Diskette

BACKUP

COPYPRT

- Copy From Spool File

CREATE

- Generate Message Member

- Backup System

L'i

brary

BLDFILE

Create Disk File

BlOLI8R

.. Create User Li brar y

CRESTART - Restart Checkpoint Task

BlDMENU

- Create

DATE

- Change Session Date

BUILD

- Correct Disk Data

DELETE

- Delete File Or Library

CATALOG

- Display VTOC

DISABLE

- Disable Subsystem

DISPLAY

- Display Data File

~tenu

COMPRESS - Free Disk Space
ENTER PROCEDURE NAME TO BE EXECUTED --->

Roll To Continue

You may select a procedure from this screen or press the Roll t (roll up) key to
display the next screen of SSP procedures.
For procedures, a description of each parameter and an input field are displayed.
Default values and optional parameters are also displayed. For example, the
following display appears if you enter BLDMENU:

BLD~1ENU

PROCEDURE

OPTIONAL-CO)

Creates the library members required to display a menu.
Menu Name
Name Of The Display Text Source Member •••••.•.••..•••••••••••••

(0)

Library That Contains The Source Message Member •••••••••••.•••• #LIBRARY
Library To Contain The Format Load Member •••••••••••••••••••••• #LIBRARY

If The New Member Will Replace An Existing Load Member,
Enter REPLACE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••••••

(0)

If The Load Member Is To Remain In The Output Library,
Enter KEEP •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••••••••

CO)

If Creating A Free-Format Menu, Enter FREEFORM ••••••.••••••••.•
If Text Should Be Displayed As IGC, Enter IGC ••••••••••••••••••

2-14

/
(0)

/Thisline
appears only
if you have
the ideographic
version of
the SSP.

Once all required parameters have been entered, you can execute the procedure
by pressing the Enter fRec Adv key or command key 4. Command key 4 will put
the procedure on the input job queue.
The following display appears if you select option 2 (Control Commands) from the
first Help display:

OPERATOR CONTROL COMMANDS (nonexecutable)
ASSIGN

- Change Workstation IO's

MSG

- Send/Receive Message

CANCEL

- Cancel Job(s)

OFF

- Terminate Session

CHANGE

- Change Job Information

F?-TY

- Assign Priority To Job

CONSOLE

- Become System Console

RELEASE

- Release Job For Printing

HOLD

- Prevent Job Printing

- Respond To Message

IDELETE

- Control Message Display

RESTART

- Restart Printing

JOSQ

- Place Job On Input JOBQ

SETDU:1P

- Address Compare Stop/Dump

- Display Menu

START

- Start System Activities

MODE

- Change Operating Mode

STATUS

- Display Status Information

Roll To Continue

ENTER COMMAND NAME --->

....

If you enter the name of a control command, a description of the command that
specifies all parameters, default values, and abbreviations is displayed. For
example, the following display appears if you enter JOBQ:

Dlso1~y St~tion

Only

JOBQ conMAND

JCBQ (jobq prty) (library name),procname,parml,parm2 ..•
(J)

*
*
*

Places a job on the input job queue.
'joSq prty' defines the position on the job queue where the job is to be
pl~ced; it can have a value of 1-5, 5 being the highest.
If library name is not specified, #LIBRARY is assumed.

Display Station Operation

2-15

These screens contain only descriptive information. The operator control
commands cannot be executed using the HELP procedure.

If you select option 3 (Operation Control language - OCl), a list of OCl
statements is displayed. From this list you can select the statement for which
reference information is wanted. OCl statements cannot be executed from the
Help display.
Selecting option 4 (Procedure Control Expressions) will display a list of procedure
control expressions. From this list you can select the procedure control expression
for which reference information is wanted. Procedure control expressions cannot
be executed from the Help display.
If you select option 5 (Utilities - 0 FU, SDA, SEU , SORT, WSU), a list of the
System/34 Utilities Program Products is displayed. From this list you can select
the utilities program product for which help is wanted. Refer to related chapters
for further information on the utilities and Help functions.
If you select option 6 (languages & Compilers - ASM, BASIC, COBOL,
FORTRAN, OLlNK, RPG), a list of System/34 languages and compilers is displayed.
From this list you can select the language or compiler for which reference information is wanted.
Selecting option 7 (Data Communications Procedures) will display a list of
the data communications procedures. This list includes DCFORMS, DCPRINT,
DEFINEID, DEFINEPN, EM3270, ES3270, MRJE, SRJE, STARTM, and STOPM.
From this list you can select the data communications procedure for which help is
wanted.
If you select option 8 (Service Aid Procedures), a list of service aids is displayed.
This list includes APAR, APPlYPTF, DFA, DUMP, ERAP, PATCH, SEC, SMF, and
TRACE. From this list you can select the service aid for which help is wanted.

2-16

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF YOUR WORK SESSION
The Session Status displays inform you about the status of your current work
session.
To display the status of your work session enter:

1
J

STATUS ~ESSI o~
(D)
OS)

After you enter the command, the first Session Status display appears:

~ION

STATUS

~~ SESSION

DATE· . • • • • • • 04/26/80

_____
~

~ESSION DATE FORMAT..

PROGRAM DATE • • • • • • • 04126180
PROGRMt DATE FORMAT •.
t1M/DD/YY
SYSTEM DATE • . • - • • • • 04126180
SYSTEM DATE FORMAT • • • • • MM/DD/YY

:-t:
~
t::Ja
A

INTERRUPTED JOB W3111914
INITIAL PROCEDU~E • • • • •
LATEST PROCEDU~E •.
•
LATEST PROGRAM • • . • • •
JOB REGION/JOB TYPE • . • •
~ LATEST PROGRAM SIZE .•
~~ LATEST STEP REGION SIZE • •

~ENTER

t-1M/OD/YY

SlmCH~!

SESSION REGION • • • • 14K
SESSION PRINTER • • • • P1

NO WAIT CONDITIONS DETECTED
CATALOG
CATALOG
$LABEL
14K/SRT
14K
14K

F-FORWARD. I-INPUT. R-RESTART. U-UPDATE. OR

E-E~~

••••••• F

SESSION DATE: the date that is being used by the session.
SESSION DATE FORMAT: YYMMDD, MMDDYY, or DDMMYY where
YY means year, DD means day, and MM means month .

•
•o
CD

o
o

PROGRAM DATE: the date being used by the program if one is running.
PROGRAM DATE FORMAT:

YYMMDD, MMDDYY, or DDMMYY .

SYSTEM DATE: the date assigned at I Pl sign-on time.
SYSTEM DATE FORMAT:

YYMMDD, MMDDYY, or DDMMYY.

SWITCH: the current switch setting as set by the SWITCH OCl statement or
a program you executed. To see the current switch setting while a program is
executing, see How to Interrupt a Job (Inquiry) in Chapter 2.
SESSION REGION: the region size for your session.
SESSION PRINTER: the ID of the printer that is associated with your display
station for this session.

Display Station Operation

2-17

Fields.throughGwili be blank if you did not interrupt a job (inquiry) .

•

INTERRUPTED JOB: The first 8 characters of this field will be a job
name if the session status is displayed under inquiry (while interrupting a
job). This job name is the name of the job that was interrupted by
inquiry. Following this job name is an explanation of the job status at the
time of inquiry. The following is a list of possible status indications:
• JOB IS IN TERMINATION

}

• JOB JS IN tN! TIA TLON

Fields
through Gare not filled if either
of these appears.

• JOB IS BEING CANCELED
•

NO WAIT CONDITIONS DETECTED

• STOPPED BY SYSTEM OPERATOR
• STOPPED BY I/O ERROR
• WAITING FOR TASK WORK AREA
•

WAITING FOR PRINTER

• WAITING FOR COMMUNICATION LINE (only if data communications is on
system)
• WAITING FOR DISKETTE
• WAITING FOR DISK SPACE
•

INITIATOR WAITING FOR RESOURCES

• WAITING ON MULTIPLE REQUESTING PROGRAM; MAXIMUM USERS
REACHED

•
•
2-18

•

WAITING FOR FILE EXTENSION

•

MESSAGE PENDING TO SYSTEM OPERATOR

•

WAITING FOR CHECKPNT COMPLETION

INITIAL PROCEDURE: the outermost procedure name that was entered at the
keyboard .
LATEST PROCEDURE: the name of the procedure that was active at the time of
the inquiry.
LATEST PROGRAM: the name of the program that was active at the time of the
inquiry.

•

JOB REGION: the size of the job region. JOB TYPE can be:
• SRT -single requestor terminal

•
CD

•

MRT -multiple requestor terminal

•

N EP-never-ending program

lATEST PROGRAM SIZE: the size of the program that was active.
lATEST STEP REGION SIZE: the region size for this step.
This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing the
Enter/Rec Adv key causes one of the following actions:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last page and
more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to the first
page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed again. If you
enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system will respond
as if F were pressed.
When entered along with a command or OCl on the input fields below
the prompt, causes the command or OCl to be processed. You can
end the current STATUS session by entering a procedure command, an
OCl statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control command, or another
ST A TUS command.

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

Enter F and press the Enter/Rec Adv key to see the next Session Status display.

D lsplay Station Qperation

2-19

"
7

SESSION STATUS

~----....

~12

SESSION

w--r--I
~

LIBRARY • • • •
_____ SY~LIST DEVICE
~ Forms • . • • • ••

•

~ IMAGE

LU:ES PER PAGE

e~~ SESSION It1AGE SIZE.

_. -----PRINTER0001

CONFIGURATION

051

PRINTER-

oael

051

048
CHARACTERS • • 123456 789':./STUV}lXYZ + • "JK UUlOPCR-$*ABCOEFGHI +. '

: y X L A T E TABLE NAME •••••••••• TRANS~l

ENTER F-FQRWARD.

I-INP~.

R-RESTART. U-UPDATE. OR

E-E~

•••••••••••••

~-----------""""

•
G

e
CD

The session values are the values that are current for this session. The configuration values are the values that are found in the work station configuration
record.
LIBRARY: the session user library name.
SYSLIST 0 EVICE: the output device used for the system list. Possible
values include a printer 10, SYSTEM PRINTER, CRT, or OFF.
FORMS: the four-character default forms name.

LINES PER PAGE: the number of lines that will be printed per page.

SESSION IMAGE SIZE: the length of the following print image.

•o

IMAGE CHARACTERS: the characters in this session's print image .
XLATE TABLE NAME: the name of the source member containing the
translate table.

Enter F and press the Enter/Rec Adv key to see the last Session Status display,
or enter I, R, U, or E to take one of the other actions as described on the first
Session Status page.

2-20

SESSION STATUS

~ ~--"""""'SYSTEM

RELEASE LEVEL • . • •
MODIFICATION LEVEL.
~
I
MAIN STORAGE SIZE . • . • • .
•
I
NUCLEUS SIZE . . . . . .
USER AREA SIZE • . . • • .
I
ASSIGN/FREE AREA SIZE .•
•
WORK STATION BUFFER SIZE • . • • • .
•
DUAl SPINDLE DISK
. • .
A;:a:aAVAILABLE DISK SIZE . . .
~
INPUT JOB QUEUE . . .
I
PRINT SPOOLING . . .
SYSTEM PRINTER.
. .....
~~SYSTEM

o
o

~
~

•o
•

COMPLETE
08
00
128K
50K
78K
8.00K
2.00K
H

63.9 MEGABYTES
Y
Y

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END . • • . . . • • F

SYSTEM RELEASE LEVEL: the level of the SSP that is currently on the
system.
SYSTEM MODIFICATION LEVEL: the level of modification that has been
put on the current SSP release .

•
•
E)

MAIN STORAGE SIZE: the number of bytes of main storage expressed in
units of K bytes (K = 1024),
NUCLEUS SIZE: the amount of main storage used by the nucleus.
USER AREA SIZE: the amount of main storage available for user programs.

Note: Nonswappable programs decrease the size of the user area so that when
nonswappable programs are active, user area plus nucleus does not equal main
storage size.
ASSIGN/FREE AREA SIZE: the number of bytes in the assign free area
(expressed in units of K bytes), which is set at configuration time or changed
by IPL overrides.
WORK STATION BUFFER SIZE: the number of bytes in the work station
buffer (expressed in units of K bytes) which is set at configuration time or
changed by IPL overrides.

Display Station Operation

2-21

DUAL SPINDLE DISK: indicated by a Y at the end of this line. If the system
does not have the dual spindle disk, an N appears.

••
o
•

AVAILABLE DISK SIZE: the total disk size for the system.
INPUT JOB QUEUE: function is indicated by a Y at the end of this line. If
the input job queue function is not active, an N appears at the end of this line.
PRINT SPOOLING: indicated by a Y at the end of this line. If print spooling
is not active, this line will have an N.
SYSTEM PRINTER: the system printer 10.

COMPLETE signifies that this is the last display in the session status series.

2-22

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF YOUR COMMUNICATIONS SUPPORT
The communications support can be displayed by entering:
STATUS
(D)

COMM
(C)

After you enter the command, the first Communications Support display appears~

BSCA LINE

0---+==:::::1 RATE. . . . . . ..

e I-

MODEM .......
-TONE ........
I
BLANK .•...•.
_
-CLOCK .......
I _____ LINE ........
~~~RETRY ......•

G--

W3]

CONFIGURATION

FULL
NON-IBM
N
NONE
MODEM
HORt1AL
000

:i:~i;~:.:~~:::: ~WITCHED

SWITCH TyPE .......•.... USER
~
TRIBUTARY ADDRESS......
~
WAIT TIME ............... ooo~ W
LOCAL ID···············~I
REMOTE 10 .•..•.••.•••••
MULTIPLE FILES ....•.... N
~
RECORD SEPARATOR.......
~
AUTOCALL ..•...........• 2
~
SEP CHAR ............•.. Y
W

e
o

G
4Ut

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END.............

•

RATE: if F U L L, the full rated speed of the modem is used; if HALF, half
the rated speed of the modem is used.

TON E: Y specifies that a non-US special tone is required for manual answer
and automatic answer. N specifies that a non-US special tone is not required.

MODEM: whether the modem used with your data communications adapter
is an IBM modem or a non-IBM modem.

BLANK: means blank compression is used. An entry of NONE means blank
compression is not used. Other possible entries are TRUNCATION and
COMPRESSION.
CLOCK: MODEM specifies that the clocking is provided by the modem or
by another external source; INTERNAL specifies that the clocking is provided by the internal clock feature in the system.

•

LINE: NORMAL specifies that you are using the normal line for your modem.
STANDBY indicates switched network backup .
RETRY: the number of times BSC error recovery procedures are attempted.

Display Station Operation

2-23

LINE TYPE: USER says that the line type specified in the user program has
not been overridden and is being used. If the specified line type has been
overridden, the possible entries are LEASED, TRIBUTARY, and SWITCHED.

•

EON: displayed when AUTOCALL is configured to indicate that
end-of-number characters are automatically removed from the phone number
before being presented to the AUTOCALL unit .
SWITCH TYPE: USER says that the switch type specified in the user program
has not been overridden and is being used. If the specified switch type has
been overridden, the possible entries are AUTO ANSWER, MANUAL ANSWEr
AUTOCALL, or MANUAL CALL.
TRIBUTARY ADDRESS: the address of this station on the multipoint line.
An entry of 00 means the address has not been overridden.

WAIT TIME: how long a user program may wait before the BSC line is
disabled.
LOCAL 10: the local identification. An entry of all zeros means the local
lOis not specified.

•

REMOTE 10: the remote identification. An entry of all zeros means the
remote 10 is not specified.

MULTIPLE FILES: whether or not IBM 3740 Data Entry System multiple
files are supported by data communications.
RECORD SEPARATOR: the means used to separate records. An entry of 00
means record separator has not been overridden.
AUTOCALL: the line number for which the AUTOCALL line is installed and
used in conjunction with this line. BSCA line configuration will not be
present for the AUTOCALL line.
An entry of X.21 LINE is displayed when the X.21 line is configured.

G
•

2-24

SEP CHAR: displayed when AUTOCALL is configured to indicate that
separator characters are to be removed from the phone number before being
presented to the AUTOCALL unit. The system provides a 3-second spacing
before sending the next digit .
LINE NUMBER: the line number of this BSCA configuration. Line numbers
can be 1,2,3, or 4.
This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R, U,
or E, the system will page forward as if F were pressed.

If you have a 960-character display screen, the following displays will appear when
you enter the STATUS COMM command. Notice that there are two displays for
each communication line:

BSCA LINE 2 CONFIGURATION
RATE •••••••••••••
MODEM ••••••••••••
TONE •••••••••••••
BLANK •••.••••.•••

HALF
NON-IBM
N
NONE

SWITCH TYPE •••••.•••••• USER
TRIBUTARY ADDRESS ••••••
WAIT TIME .••....••••.•• 000
LOCAL 10 •••••••••••••••

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••••••••••••••••

After you press the Enter/Rec Adv key, the second

Bse screen appears.

,
BSCA LINE 2 CONFIGURATION
CLOCK .••••.••.•.• MODEM
.LINE •••••••••••.• NORMAL
RETRy ..•••...••.• 000
LINE TYPE •.•.•.•• SWITCHED
EON ..•.•..•••.••• N

REMOTE 1D •..•••..••....
MULTIPLE FILES •..•••••• N
RECORD SEPARATOR ••.•.••
AUTOCALL ••...•...•.•••• 1
SEP CHAR ••.••.•..•••..• N

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ••.•••••••.•..•

Display Station Operation

2-25

~------------------------------~l
e~r
I CONFIGURATION
W3
•~
~
SDLC LINE
e-....J~RATE •••••••• FULL
SWITCH TYPE •••••••••••• ~±.
A ___ ~MODEM ••••••• NON-IBM
STATION ADDRESS •••••••• : : : : : - - - - - - - - - -LA
•
~--r---=TONE •••••••• N
EXCHANGE 10............
I W
_
CLOCK ....... MODEM
LINE ................... NORMAL
•
A
I
LINE TYPE ••• SWITCHED
RECEIVE BUFFERS •••••••• 000
I
E'0ENp.C.H.A.R••••••••• Yy
TRANSMIT BUFFERS ••••••• 000
AUTOCALL. .............. 2 I •
_:J.-----S
~

-0

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END.............

e
e
CD

RATE: if FULL, the full rated speed of the modem is used; if HALF, half the
rated speed of the modem is used.
MODEM: whether the modem used with your data communications adapter
is an IBM modem or a non-IBM modem.
TONE: Y specifies that a non-US special tone is required for manual answer
and automatic answer. N specifies that a non-US special tone is not required.
CLOCK: MODEM specifies that the clocking is provided by the modem or
by another external source; INTERNAL specifies that the clocking is provided by the internal clock feature in the system.

•

LINE TYPE: the possible entries are SWITCHED, LEASED, and MULTIPOINT.

EON: drsplayed when AUTOCALL is configured to incflccate that
end-of-number characters are automatically removed from the phone number
before being presented to the AUTOCALL unit.

e
o

SEP CHAR: displayed when AUTOCALL is configured to indicate that
separator characters are removed from the phone number before being
presented to the AUTOCALL unit. The system provides a 3-second spacing
before sending the next digit.
SWITCH TYPE: the possible entries are AUTO ANSWER, MANUAL ANSWER,
AUTOCALL, MANUAL CALL, and blank.

~ STATION ADDRESS: the address of this station on the SDLC line.

a
2-26

EXCHANGE 10: five hex digits to become the last five hex digits of the
exchange 10 returned by SDLC.

LINE: NORMAL specifies that you are using the normal line for your modem.
STANDBY indicates switched network backup.
RECEIVE BUFFERS: specifies the number (in decimal) of receive buffers to be
assigned for this SOLC line.
TRANSMIT BUFFERS: specifies the number (in decimal) of transmit buffers
to be assigned for this SOLC line.
AUTOCALL: the line number for which the AUTOCALL line is installed
and used in conjunction with this line. SOLC line configuration will not be
present for the AUTOCALL line.
An entry of X.21 LINE is displayed when the X.21 line is configured.

LINE NUMBER: the line number of this SOLC configuration. Line numbers
are 1,2,3, or 4.

If you have a 960-character display screen, the second part of the Communications
Support display will appear on two screens.

r
SOLe LINE 2 CONFIGURATION
CLOCK •..••.••.••. MOD HI
LINE TYPE .••••••• SWI1CHED
EON •......•.•..•. N
SEP .•.••.•••.•... N

Cot1PLETE
LINE •....••..•••••••••. NORMAL
RECEIVE BUFFERS ••.••.•. 000
TRANSMIT BUFFERS •.••••. 000

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••••••••••••.•••

After you press the Enter fRec Adv key, the second SO LC screen appears.

,
SDLC LINE 2 CONFIGURATION
CLOCK •.•.•...•••. MODEM
LINE TYPE •..•.••. SWITCHED
EOH ••...•...•..•• N
SEP CHAR •.....••. N

COMPLETE
LINE ...• _..••....•...•.
RECEIVE BUFFERS ..•...••
TRAHSHIT BUFFERS ..•....
AUTOCALL ...•.•.....•...

NORMAL
000
000

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •.••.•••...•..•••

Display Station Operation

2-27

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE SSP-ICF SUBSYSTEMS

Command Format

Parameters

STATUS

SUBSYS

(D)

(I)

SUBSYS: Displays status information about the enabled
SSP-ICF subsystems.

Example

You enter:
STATUS

SUBSYS

The following display appears:

eGeee 0

-----J---I---J.-..--I---hr---I--I---I-------...
COf1PLETE

WI
05664 BYTES

TYPE
INTRA
BSCELP2

Y
Y

INTRA
BSCEL

LINE

o
1

TASK SIZES IN BYTES
SUB
D MGT
LINK
02048
08192

06144

IQUEUE SPACE
IALLoe AVAIL

06144

05952

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••••••••••.

•o
e
2-28

CONFIG NAME: shows a list of subsystem configuration names currently
enabled or being enabled.
This field describes the allocated common queue space for the SSP-ICF subsystems. This field may be blank if no subsystem is fully enabled.

•
•

SWAPPABLE: indicates whether or not the subsystem task is swappable. A
value of Y indicates that it is swappable. If a data management task is required
for the subsystem task, the data management task swap status is the same as
the subsystem task swap status.
TYPE: describes the type of subsystem.
SNUF - SNA upline facility
CCP - CCP
CICS - CICS/VS
IMS -IMS/VS
BSCEL - BSC equivalence link
INTRA - Intra System/34
SNA PEER - SNA peer
3270BSC -BSC 3270
3270SD LC - SNA 3270
FINANCE - Finance

e
o
CD

o
o

COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
LINE: describes the communications line allocated to the subsystem configuration currently enabled or being enabled.
TASK SIZES IN BYTES: SUB indicates the size of the subsystem task. D
MGT indicates the size of the subsystem's data management task if one is
required. LINK indicates the size of the subsystem's communication link
task if one is required. If the link task is SDLC, the value displayed is the
sum of the link task size plus line buffers.
This field shows the amount of common queue space currently available.
This is the sum of all the free areas. This field may be blank if no subsystem
is fully enabled.
QUEUE SPACE: The fields under this heading indicate the status of the
subsystem task's queue space. ALLOC indicates the amount of subsystem
queue space allocated to the subsystem task. AVAI L indicates the actual
amount of subsystem queue space currently available. It is the sum of all the
free areas in the subsystem task's queue space.

Display Station Operation

2-29

•

This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing the Enter fRec Adv key causes the followi ng action:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last page and
more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to the first
page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed again. If
you enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system will
respond as if F were pressed.
When entered along with a command or OCl on the input fields
b-e1ow the prompt, calJse-s -tlTe command or OCt tone processed. You
can end the current STATUS session by entering a procedure command,
an OCl statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control command, or
another STATUS command.

2-30

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE SSP·ICF SUBSYSTEM SESSIONS

Command Format

STATUS

SUBSESS

(D)

(N)

Parameters

SUBSESS: Displays status information about the SSP-ICF
subsystem sessions.

Example

You enter:
STATUS

SUBSESS

The following display appears:

CONFIG
NAME

LOCATION
NAME

INTRA

BSCELP2

TYPE

INV
STAT

A
A
E
E
A

PHYS/SYM
07
08
11
12
09

7I
8I
11
12
IJ

N
E
I
N

OPERATION STATUS
MRTMAX OM OC ST
N
N
N

Y
N

20
20
20
20
20

20
20
01
00
20

0
0

A*
0
0

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-ENO ••••••••••••

•e
•

JOB
NAME
WI024536
WI024536
11030153
12000000
WI024536

CONFIG NAME: contains a list of subsystem configuration names currently
enabled or being enabled.
This field is a list of location names. The location name will appear in any
messages logged by the subsystem or SSP for this subsystem configuration.
For SNA peer, this is the remote location name.

Display Station Operation

2-31

•

••
o

This field is a list of the subsystem session IDs. PHYS indicates this is the
system defined 10. SYM indicates the symbolic session 10 used by the program owning the session. The SYM 10 is used by a program for outgoing
communication with an SSP-ICF session.
COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
TYPE: indicates the session type. A indicates this session is an acquired
session. E indicates this session is an evoked session. * indicates a noncommunicating peer station.
INV STAT (invite status):
E: program has requested data from the session.
I:

the SSP has marked the session complete to satisfy an accept input
issued by the program owning the session.

N: program does not want data from the session.
0: program has requested data from the session and the data is now
available.

OPERATION STATUS: these four fields indicate the status of the session.
MRTMAX: if this session is attached to an MRT, and the session is waiting
because the maximum number of requestors has been reached,
this field will have a Y displayed. Otherwise, an N will appear.
The following three fields are primarily for diagnostic purposes. They indicate the state of the SSP-ICF sessions when the STATUS SUBSESS command
was entered.
OM: this is the current operation command modifier.
OC: this is the current operation command code.
ST:

2-32

this is a two-character field. The first character is either an A (operation active), 0 (operation complete), or I (operation in an initial
status). The second character is either blank or an asterisk (*). If
this character is an asterisk, the program is currently waiting for this
session to complete.

o
o

JOBNAME: displays the name assigned to the process to which the session
is attached.
This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing
the Enter/Rec Adv key causes the following action:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last page and
more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to the first
page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed again. If
you enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system will
respond as if F were pressed.
When entered along with a command or OCl on the input fields
below the prompt, causes the command or OCl to be processed. You
can end the current STATUS session by entering a procedure command, an OCl statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control command,
or another STATUS command.

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

Display Station Operation

2-33

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE SYSTEM DEVICES

The Workstation Status display shows the status of the diskette drive and display
stations and printers that are locally attached and the status of display stations
and printers that are remotely attached and not offline.
To display the status of the diskette drive and all locally attached and remotely
attached and not offline display stations and printers, enter:
STATUS WORKSTN [, ws-id]
-{-{)i

(W)

WORKSTN: Displays status information about: local and
non-offline remote display stations and printers, the diskette
drive, or a selected display station or work station printer.

Parameters

ws-id: The ID of the display station or printer for which
status information is displayed. If you do not specify an ID,
status information for all display stations and printers is
displayed.
Example

You enter:
ST ATUS

WO R KSTN

The following two-part display appears if you do not enter ws-id:

o
WI
WS-ID
II
PI
WI
W2

CONS
WI

STATUS
ON-LINE
ON-LINE
ACTIVE
ON-LINE
ON-LINE

USER

--------

----------------------

cve

TYPE
DISKETTE
SYS PRINTER
SYS CONSOLE
ALT CONSOLE
ALT CONSOLE

SUB

SIZE

1920
1920
1920

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER

2-34

F-FOR~JARD,

I-INPUT) R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END.............

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or Roll-l- (roll down) key, the next part of the
STATUS WORKSTN display appears.

r
t

~(,RKSTATION

~\S-ID

G
This field
appears only
if you have
the ideographic
version of
the SSP.

COMPLETE

STATUS

HSG

C U

CURR

POSS LN

Pl
Wl
~12

N
N

ROLL
•

KEYS

F02 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

ENTER F-FORWJ\RD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UFDATE, OR E-END •••• _". ""."" ••

Display Station Operation

2-35

WS-IO: a list of the diskette drive, display stations, and printers that are
locally attached or are remotely attached and are active, online, or pending.
11 is the 10 of the diskette, and the other IDs are defined at system configuration time.

CONS: shows the ws-id of the controlling console for each printer.

•

STATUS: the current status of each device. Possible entries are:
ON-LINE - The device is online but is not presently being used.
OF F-L1NE - The device has been taken offline by the system operator.
ACTIVE - The device is currently being used.
PEND ING - The remote device is in the process of being varied onl ine
or offline.

COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.

•

USER: the user 10 that was entered at sign-on time for each active display
station. Fields for nonactive display stations, printers, and the diskette show
hyphens (----) for the user 10.

•

TYPE: describes each device listed on this display.

o ISKETTE indicates the diskette drive.
SYS PRINTER indicates the system printer.
PR INTER indicates a printer other than the system printer.
DATA indicates that this device is a data display station.
COMMAND indicates that this is a command display station.
SYS CONSOLE indicates that this is the system console.
SUBCONSOLE indicates that this is a subconsole display station.
AL T CONSOLE indicates that this is an alternative system console.

CD
•

SUB: shows whether a subconsole or an alternative console is currently active
as a subconsole (receiving messages for a printer).
SIZE: if the device is a display station, shows the size of the display screen.
960-character display
1920-character display

o
8

2-36

CU R R IN: if the device is online and attached via a communications line,
shows the line number (line 1,2,3, or 4).

o
G

POSS IN: if the device is attached via a communications line, shows the
numbers of all possible lines on which an offline device can communicate
(lines 1,2,3, or 4). If the device is pending, shows the line number it will
communicate on when it-i-s-online (line 1, 2, 3, or 4).
IGC: appears only if you have the ideographic version of the SSP.
D

Appears if only the display station is ideographic capable.

Appears if both the display and the keyboard are ideographic
capable, or if the device is an ideographic capable printer.

Appears for nonideographic devices.
Appears for the diskette drive.

This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing
the Enter fRec Adv key causes one of the following actions:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last page and
more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to the first
page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed again. If
you enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system will
respond as if F were pressed.
When entered along with a command or DCl on the input fields
below the prompt, causes the command or DCl to be processed.
You can end the current STATUS session by entering a procedure
command, an DCl statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control
command, or another STATUS command.

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

Display Station Operation

2·37

If you enter the STATUS WORKSTN [,ws-id] command and include a work
station 10, the following two-part display appears. In this example, work station
W3 requested the status of work station W1.

WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID

CONS

COMPLETE

STATUS
ACTIVE

USER
KSA

TYPE
SYS CONSOLE

SUS

SIZE
1920

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARO, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••••••••••.•

~~------------------------------------------------------------------------~~
After you press the Rollt (roll up) or RolI~ (roll down) key, the next part of the
display appears.

WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID
WI
W2
W3

COMPLETE
MSG

C U

CURR LN

POSS LN

N
N
N

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END.............

2-38

To display the status of all remote display stations and printers, enter:
STATUS
(0)

REMOTES [, WS-id]
(R)

The following two-part display appears if you do not enter ws-id:

o
W3-ID

cmn

01
02
p~

TYPe
N:TIVE
OFF -LIIn:

Ot~··l.lW:

PHi~)H1G

04
05
06

PUlDUlG

PENOJt.'5

OFF-LINE
03

PGmnlG

I<.SA

-------._------... _----- _..,-------------

--------

-------.-

~UBCOttSOlE

sun
y

III

SIZ.E
lq~O

1920

CmtMM!O
PF!!IHER

$UBCOH501.F.

Ino

Cot1l'1AtlO

1920

Cutl~1AHO

09'·:';0

CQt1:-lMHl

0160

PRItHER

POLL KEYS FOP. ADOITIOHAL

INFORt1~TlOH

ENTER F-FCRJ..IAPO, I-INPUT, R-RESTAHT, U-UPDATE, OR E-END.............

Display Station Operation

2-39

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or RolI+ (roll down) key, the next part of the
STATUS REMOTES display appears.

•

• •I

WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID
01
02

P2
03
04
05
06

MSG
Y

N
N
N

CU
CUI
CUI
CUI
CU2
CU2
CU2
CU2
CU2

7r
W1

COMPLETEj

CURR LN
I

POSS LN
I
I

JGC

N
N
N
N
N

2
2

N
N

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER f-FORWARO, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-ENO ..•.••...••.•

...

.JI

WS-ID: lists the remote display stations and printers defined for the system.

CONS: shows the ws-id of the controlling console for each printer.

STATUS: displays the current status of each device. Possible entries are:
ON-LIN E - The device is online but is not presently being used.
OFF-LINE - The device has been taken offline by the system operator.
ACTIVE - The device is currently being used.
PENDING - The remote device is being varied on or off.

e
G

COMPLETE: appears only on the last page of a status function.
USER: lists the user 10 that was entered at sign-on time for each active
remote display station. Fields for nonactive display stations and printers show
hyphens (----) for the user 10.
TYPE: describes each device on this display.
PR INTER indicates a printer other than the system printer.
DATA indicates that this device is a data display station.
COMMAND indicates that this is a command display station.
SUBCONSOLE indicates that this is a subconsole display station.

2-40

Thisfield
appears only
if you have
the ideographic
version of
the SSP.

SUB: shows whether a subconsole is currently active as a subconsole (receiving messages for a printer).
SIZE: if the device is a display station, shows the size of the display screen.
960-character display
1920-character display

o
e
o
o
•

MSG: indicates that messages sent via the MSG command to all display
stations failed to get to a display station. Y indicates that the system operator
sent a message to all the display stations but this display station did not
receive the message because its message queue was full. This field is valid for
display stations only; for printers, this field contains a hyphen (-).
C U: shows the control unit ID of remote devices (different from address).
CURR IN: if the device is online and attached via a communications line,
shows the line number (line 1,2,3, or 4).
POSS IN: if the device is attached via a communications line, shows the
numbers of all possible lines on which an offline device can communicate
(Ii,ne 1,2,3, or 4). If the device is pending, shows the line number it will
communicate on when it is online (line 1,2,3, or 4).
IGC: appears only if you have the ideographic version of the SSP.
Y

Appears if the device is an ideographic-capable printer.

Appears for nonideographic devices.

This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing
the Enter/Rec Adv key causes one of the following actions:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last page and
more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to the first
page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed again. If
you enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system will
respond as if F were pressed.
When entered along with a command or OCl on the input fields
below the prompt, causes the command or OCl to be processed.
You can end the current STATUS session by entering a procedure
command, an OCl statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control
command, or another STATUS command.

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

Display Station Operation

2-41

If you enter the STATUS REMOTES [,ws-id] command and include a remote
work station 10, the following two-part display appears. In this example, work
station W3 requested the status of work station 01.

,
WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID

CONS

COMPLETE

STATUS
ACTIVE

USER
KSA

TYPE
COMMAND

SUB

SIZE
1920

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARD. I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, ORE-END •••••••••••••

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or RolI,j, (roll down) key, the next part of the
display appears.

WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID
01

COMPLETE
MSG
N

CU
CUI

CURR IN

POSS IN

ROll KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT. R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END.............

2-42

HOW TO SPECIFY THE SESSION DATE
The session date is the date used by programs run during your work session. Specify
this date by entering the DATE procedure command before you run the first program:

DATE

{

mmddYYJ
ddmmyy
yymmdd

For example, enter DATE 011479 to specify the session date as January 14, 1979.
If you do not specify a session date, the system date (the date assigned by the
system operator at IPL sign-on) is used. You can use the STATUS SESSION command to determine the current system date. The session date must be in the current
session format.
The session date and session date format can both be set via the SET command.

Display Station Operation

243

HOW TO SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF LINES PER PAGE
To specify the number of lines printed per page by the printer assigned to your
display station, enter the LINES procedure command:

LINES

Parameters

[~mber]

, [Cpi

valu~

, [!pi value]

number: The number of lines per page, which can vary
from 1 to 112, with 66 as the default value.
cpi value: The number of characters per inch. The value
can be either 10 or 15, with 10 as the default value. This
parameter is valid for the 5225 Printer (models 1 through
4) and for the 5224 Printer (models 1 and 2).
Ipi value: The number of lines per inch. The P;le density
can be 4, 6, or 8 lines per inch. This parameter is valid
for the 5224/5225 Printer.

Your changes remain in effect until the next LINES command or until you end
your work session.
The number of lines per page can also be set via the SET procedure command. This
change remains in effect until the next time you use a SET procedure, or until the
next IPL.
Note that the actual printed output depends on:
•

The number of lines per page

•

The setting of the number of characters per inch (5225 Printer models 1
through 4 and 5224 Printer models 1 and 2)

•

The setting of the number of lines per inch on the printer (5224/5225 Printer)

•

The correct alignment of the forms to the first line

If you specify the number of lines as one, printed output that contains vertical
spacing of more than one space may not print correctly.

2-44

HOW TO CHANGE THE SYSTEM LIST DEVICE

The system list device is that printer assigned to print output from most system
utility programs or system procedures, or that display station assigned to show this
output. You can change the current system list device via the SYSLIST procedure
command. To determine the current system list device, use the STATUS SESSION
command. The SYSLIST DEVICE for the session is shown on the second Session
Status display.
The changes you can make and the command for each change are:
•

List output on the printer that was assigned to your display station during system
configuration (SYSLIST PR INTE R)

•

List output on another printer (SYSLIST ws-id)

• Show output on the display screen (SYSLIST CRT)
•

Do not list any output from SSP utility programs or SSP procedures
(SYSLIST OFF)

•

Process extended character (ideographic) codes (SYSLIST PR INTE R, EXTN)

Your change remains in effect until you change the system list device with another
SYSLIST command or you end your work session.
The SSP utility programs (for example, $MAINT and $SFGR), except the data
commun\cations utility programs and service aids, use the system list function.
RPG II, SEU, WSU, and DFU (during the execution phase), data communications
programs, service aids, and all user programs, except possibly assembler programs,
use the printer data management function. Assembler programs can use either
the system list function or the printer data management function.

Display Station Operation

2-45

HOW TO MODIFY WORK SESSION ITEMS VIA OCL
OCL (Operation Control Language)
OCl is a special language composed of statements that describe data processing jobs
to the SSP.
The SSP requires certain information, or instructions, before it can perform a job.
For example, the SSP needs the names of any files it must process, the type of output, the date printed on the output, and any additional required information. The
-prQgLammer writes the eCl that describes this information.
You can change your work session environment via OCL. The changes remain in
effect until you end the work session (when items return to the values they had
before you signed on) or until you change them again during the work session. The
following lists the DCl statements that you can use to modify work session items,
describes the functions of each, and explains where you should enter each statement.
OC L Statement

Function

Placement

II FORMS

Specifies the number of lines
printed per page, the number
of characters per inch, and the
forms number to be used during a work session.

Anywhere among the
OCl statements.

Note: Characters per inch is
valid for the 5225 Printer
(models 1 through 4) and for
the 5224 Printer (models 1
and 2).

II LIBRARY

Specifies the active user
library for a work session.
The system searches the
active user library, and then
the system library, for load
programs, procedures to be
executed, active menus,
message members, and
screen formats.

Anywhere among the
OCl statements except
between a lOAD statement and a RUN statement.

Note: If resource security
is active and the library is
secure, you must be authorized access to the library.

II lOCAL

Modifies a specified
portion of the local data
area that is available for
your display station.

Anywhere among the
OCl statements.

II MEMBER

Specifies the active message
members for a work session.

Anywhere among the
OCl statements.

Refer to the System Support Reference Manual for complete detail about each of
these OC l statements.
2-46

HOW TO RUN JOBS
You can run jobs by:
•

Entering a number from a menu

•

Entering a procedure command

•

Entering the JOBQ control command

•

Entering OCl (operation control language)

All jobs must be requested from a display station in command mode.
The system assigns a unique job name to each job that you request. The name has
the format wwhhmmss, where:
ww
hh
mm
ss

is the 2-character ID of your display station.
is the hour (based on the 24-hour clock) you request the job.
is the minute you request the job.
is the second you request the job.

For example, job name W1143000 was requested at 2:30 p.m. by display station Wl.

Command Statements
Command statements are of two types: procedure commands and control commands.
A procedure command tells the SSP to execute a procedure. A procedure is a group
of DCl statements that are stored in a library on disk and describe a specific job. The
procedure can contain all of the information nece.ssary to run the job or the procedure can request additional information from you. Entering one procedure command
is equivalent to entering all of the DCl statements in the procedure. See Example of
How to Run Jobs later in this chapter.
The system support program includes a number of procedure commands that control most of the system operation. Programmers can also create procedures for user
programs, assign a n(lmf! to the procedure, and that name becomes a procedure
command.
Control commands are simple, often one-word statements. Through these commands, you control job execution, communicate with other display stations, and
display status information. An example of the control command to activate the
menu function and display the specified menu is:

MENU menuname (,library]
The System Support Reference Manual descri bes the control commands and procedure commands that you can enter.

Display Station Operation

2-47

Menus
A menu is a list of numbers and job descriptions that appears on the display screen.
The menu feature of System/34 provides an easy way to run a job. You can
present a display (a menu) of sequentially numbered job descriptions by entering
a menu name during sign on, by default at sign on (if menu security is active), or
by entering the MENU command. (See the System Support Reference Manual for
a description of the MENU command.) Each number on a menu can represent
commands or OCl that execute a particular job (for example, payroll). The menu
allows you to select a job by entering a number rather than by entering all of the
display station commands, procedures, or OCl statements necessary for the job.
A sample menu is shown in Figure 2-8.

(

COi'lMAND

J
815.

Display Lines
1 through

MENU:

1. CUSTOMER BILLING KEYING
2. LUMBER IN STOCK
43 ,. LU~:BER ON ORDER
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE

ACCOU;~TS

PAYABLE

6, PAYROLL
7 INVENTORY CHECKLIST

8' NEW ACCOU~TS

Display Lines
9 through 14

l~:

BUILDER cmnRACTS
{ 11. PRINT LU~;3E~ IN STOCK
12. PROCESS

STATE~ENTS

ME~~UOl

MENU2

13, DISPLAY

14.

15.' WEEKLY PAYROLL CALCULATICNS
16, WEEKLY PAYROLL CHECKS
17. WEEKLY

PAYROLL

sUt:~1/'..

18.
19.
20.

21.
22.
23.
24. SIGN OFF

ENTER NUMBER, COMMAND, OR OCL.
<- READY

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _• _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _w~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~_ _ _ _ _ _ __'~

Figure 2-8. Sample Menu

If your security officer has restricted you to this menu, you can select a number
from the menu, enter the OFF command, or enter the MSG command.
If you are not restricted to this menu, you can enter a zero (0) to terminate this
menu without selecting any of the options.
On a 960-character display screen, the first two lines of the display and menu items
1 through 6 and 13 through 18 will be displayed first. To display the second half of
the menu, press the Enter/Rec Adv key.
If the display station has a 960-character display screen and a free-format menu is
selected, lines 1 through 8 of the display and the ENTER NUMBER, COMMAND,
or OCl line will be displayed first. If the Enter/Rec Adv key is pressed without
data entered, lines 1 and 2, and 9 through 14 will be displayed, along with the
line for operator action. Lines 15 through 20 of the menu are not displayed.
Note: If a menu is built with ideographic characters for a 5255 Display Station, it
cannot be displayed at a device other than a 5255 Display Station.
248

Example of How to Run Jobs

The following example illustrates the differences between OCl, command statements,
and menus. You do not have to understand all of the OCl or command statements;
the purpose of the example is to compare how much information you must enter in
each case.
To run your payroll, three different programs could do the necessary work. The
first program (PAYCAlC) takes the information, such as hours worked and rate of
paYL from an existing file (WEEKHRS) and calculates the weekly pay for each
employee. PAYCAlC saves the results, including gross pay, itemized deductions,
and other related information, in a file (PAYFllE) for later use.
The second program (CHEKWRIT) uses the information from PAYFllE to print
the payroll checks and to update each employee's payroll record in another file
(EMPLOYEE).
The third program (PAYSUMM) summarizes the results from PAYFI lE and uses
this summary to update a third file (TOTlFI lE) for your entire payroll record.

•

To run payroll using OCl, you enter the following:
First program

II
II
II
II
II

LOAD
DATE
FILE
FILE
RUN

PAYCALC
061779
NAME-PAYFILE,RECORDS-100,RETAIN-T,DISP-NEW
NAME-WEEKHRS,RETAIN-P,DISP-OLD

Second program

II
II
II
II
II

LOAD CHEKWRIT
FORMS LINES-IO,FORMSNO-CHECKS
FILE NAME-PAYFILE,RETAIN-T,DISP-OLD
FILE NAME-EMPLOYEE,RETAIN-P,DISP-OLD
RUN

Th i rd program

II
II
II
II

LOAD PAYSUNM
FILE N~1E-PAYFILE,RETAIN-S,DISP-OLD
FILE NAME-TOTLFILE,RETAIN-P,DISP-OLD
RUN

To run payroll using procedure commands, enter the following:
First procedure

PAYCALC WEEKLY,061779,WEEKHRS
Second procedure

CHEKWRIT WEEKLY
Third procedure

PAYSUMM WEEKLY

Display Station Operation

2-49

To run payroll using the sample menu shown in Figure 2-8, select the correct number:

•

15 (to do weekly payroll calculations)

• 16 (to do weekly payroll checks)
• 17 (to do weekly payroll summary)
How to Assign Priority to Jobs
The ?RTY controf command assigns executlon priority to the next job that you run.
If you enter the JOBO command immediately after PRTY, then PRTY will only
affect the job's priority after it is taken off the job queue. The PRTY command no
longer affects the position of a job on the job queue. You must use the jobq prty
parameter of the JOBO command to assign a job a position on the job queue.
The format of this command is:

PRTY

Parameters

HIGH
ON
MEDIUM
'OFF
NORMAL
lOW

HIGH: The highest level priority you can set for your job's
execution. System resources are assigned to a high priority
job before they are assigned to any other job.
ON: The default. ON is equivalent to HIGH.
MEDIUM: The second level of priority for a job's execution.
NORMAL: The third level of priority for a job's execution.
NORMAL overrides any other priority specified within
the job.
DEF: The equivalent of NORMAL, but does not override
any other priority specified in the job.
LOW: The lowest level of priority you can set for your
job's execution. System resources are assigned to any
higher priority jobs before they are assigned to a job with
low priority.

You should reserve HIGH or ON for jobs that must have the highest available
priority.
For a job with high priority requirements, key in PRTY ,HIGH or PRTY ,oN
or just PRTY. Press the Enter key and then enter the Oel statements, procedure,
or menu number for the job you want to execute.
To assign a job a specified position on the input job queue, use the JOBO command. See the sections on JOBO later in this chapter.

2-50

How to Specify Printer Information for a Job

You can use the PRINTER OCl statement to specify the following:
•

Number of lines per page

• Characters per inch for the 5225 Printer (models 1 through 4) and for the 5224
Printer (models 1 and 2)
•

Lines per inch for 5224/5225 Printer

•

Forms number

• Whether or not printer output should be spooled
•

Number of copies of spooled output to be printed

• Whether or not printing of spooled output can begin before the job step
completes
•

The priority of the spooled printed output

•

The printer to be used for the printed output

• The file name used by the program to refer to the printer
• Whether or not the printer should be capable of printing ideographic data (ideographic version of SSP only)
• Whether EXTN character processing should be done
You can use the STATUS PRT control command to display the current values of
these items, except characters per inch. The PR INTER statement must be between
the lOAD statement and associated RUN statement for the program. Refer to the
System Support Reference Manual for details about the PR INTER OCl statement.

Display Station Operation

2-51

How to Specify the Region Size for a Job
You can use the REGION OCl statement to specify the region size available for a
job or a job step. Refer to the System Support Reference Manual for details about
the REGION OCl statement. You can use the STATUS control command to display
the region size. You can use the SET command to specify the default region size for
a work station.

How to Set Display Station Indicators
You can use the SWITCH OCl statement to set one or more of the external indicators for the display station on or off. SWITCH can be anywhere among OCl statements. Refer to the System Support Reference Manual for details about the
SWITCH Del statement. You can use the STATUS session control command to
display these indicators.

MESSAGES
Messages can appear at your display station to indicate errors diagnosed by the
system or by programs that you have submitted, device errors, and, in some cases,
information or instructions to you.
Messages can appear anywhere on the display, but most appear on the bottom line
or bottom two lines of the display.
While you operate the display station, you may hear a buzzer or see the Message
Waiting indicator to indicate that there is a message waiting for you. The following
types of indications and messages can occur at your display station:
•

Buzzer, no Message Waiting indicator:
A system log message at the bottom of the display. The message may have
options (0, 1, 2, 3) that must be responded to.

•

No buzzer, no Message Waiting indicator:
Control command errors that require correction, or
- Informational messages from a procedure that require no action

•

Buzzer and Message Waiting indicator: message sent by an MSG command from
another display station or a message routed to both the system console and the
display station.

•

Flashing four-digit number in lower-left corner of screen, 'no buzzer, no Message
Waiting indicator: keyboard error which must be corrected. Either press the
Error Reset key and correct the error, or press the Help key for additional
information.

Note: If the buzzer sounds and no apparent message has been sent, it may be
because the job that sent the me5sage completed processing and the message was
deleted. This happens if the configuration option to keep informational messages
at end of job was not taken.

2-52

,
INPUT-OUTPUT

COMPRESS
COMPRESS PROCEDURE EXECUTING

~-~SYS-1228 OPTIONS ( 123)

a..

DEDICATED PROGRAM CAtlNOT BE LOADED NOW •..

~~I

_ _ _ _

~_J

Figure 2-9. Sample Message that Can Appear at a Display Station

Message Identifier, which consists of three or four characters followed by four
numbers. Each message that has an identifier other than USE R is documented
in the Displayed Messages Guide. You can use the character code to find the
appropriate chapter in the guide. The codes are:
SYS-System Support Program
KBD-Keyboard
RPG-RPG \I
SORT-Sort Program
DFU-Data File Utility
SEU-Source Entry Utility
WSU-Work Station Utility
ASM-Assembler
SDA-Screen Design Aid
FORT-FORTRAN
CBl-COBOl
BAS-BASIC
EMU-3270 Device Emulation
ESU-3270 Device Emulation
CGU-Character Generator Utility
SRTX-Ideographic sort
The messages are listed in sequence within each chapter according to the fourdigit number. (This number is called a message identification code.)
Display Station Operation

2-53

•

Options list the valid responses for the message. Each message contains only
the options that apply to that message. Possible options are:
Option 0: when you select this option, generally the error is ignored and
the job continues. Always refer to the Recovery part of each message
description in the Displayed Messages Guide for specific details before

selecting this option.
Option 1: when you select this option, generally you can retry the operation causing the error and continue the job. Always refer to the Recovery
part of each message description in the Displayed Messages Guide before
selecting this option.
Option 2: when you select this option, generally you can end the job step.

If option 2 ends the job step, any new data created up to this point is
preserved, and the job can continue with the next job step.
Option 3: select this option to cancel the job. Any new data created or

work done by a previous job step is preserved; however, any new data
created or work done by the current job step is lost.

•
•
E)

2-54

Message text.
Three periods at the end of message text indicate that there is additional information that you can display for the message. Press the Enter/Rec Adv key to
cause the additional information to appear. See Figure 2-10 for a sample
Additional Information display.
Key your response here.

~------------------------------------------------------------------.--.-----~,
ADDITIONAL

INFO~HATION

SYS-1228 OPTIONS ( 123)
DEDICATED PROGRAM CANNOT BE LOADED NOW •••
THERE IS ANOTHER Cm1t1AHD DISPLAY STATION SIGNED ON AT THIS TIME.
SELECT OPTION 1 TO RETRY; THE OTHER DISPLAY STATION HIGHT BE SIGNED OFF.
SELECT OPTION 2 TO END JOB STEP OR 3 TO CANCEL THE JC3.

READY

~--------~----~--)
Figure 2-10. Sample Additional Information Display

The Additional Information display (Figure 2-10) gives you more information about
a displayed message. Enter your response (1,2, or 3) at the cursor and press the
Enter fRec Adv key.

Display Station Operation

2-55

Figure 2-11 is a guide to help you respond to messages that appear at a display
station. This guide assumes that a one-line or two-line message is on the display.

Displayed Message

" > - - -....

Yes
" > - - -...

You can find a
complete descri ption of the
message and recovery actions
in the Displayed

The message should indicate your
recovery action. It is not documented in the Displayed Messages Guide.

You can display additional information by pressing the Enter/Rec Adv
key. Figure 2-10 shows an example
of the displayed additional information. You can specify an option on
the Additional Information display
to recover from the error.

Messages Guide.

Reply to the
message by keying a valid option
(the cursor indicates where you
must key the option) and press the
Enter /Rec Adv key.

Figure 2-11. Guide to Responding to Messages at a Display Station

2-56

Keyboard Errors

Keyboard errors are indicated by a flashing four-digit number in the lower-left corner of the display; the Message Waiting indicator does not come on and the buzzer
does not sound. If you know the cause of the error, press the Error Reset key and
reenter the required data. If you do not know the cause of the error, press the Help
key. A message appears on the bottom line of the display (see Figure 2-12). If you
need an explanation of the message, refer to the KBD section of the Displayed
Messages Guide for an explanation and then take the recommended recovery action.

COMMAND

ENTER COMMAND OR OCL STATEMENT.
KBO-OOOS CURSOR IN PROTECTED AREA OF DISPLAY

<- READY

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,_ _ _..-."J

Figure 2·12. Sample Keyboard Message, after the Help Key Has Been Pressed

Display Station Operation

2-57

How to Send a Message
The MSG control command allows you to send a message to the system console, to
a selected display station, or to a display station operator.

Command Format

Pal ailletel s

MSG

~~WS-id J

' d ' message text.
user-I

VIIS-id: The two-character fO of thef work station to receive
the message. You can use the STATUS WORKSTN control
command to determine the work station 10.

user-id: The 10 of the operator who is to receive the message. Each operator enters a user lOon the sign-on display
to start the work session. You can use the STATUS
WORKSTN control command to determine the user 10.

Note: If you omit the user-id and ws-id, the message is sent
to the system console.

message text: As many as 60 characters of text are allowed.
If you need to send a message that is longer than 60 characters, you will have to send more than one message.
Example

You, a display station operator, are ready to submit a job
that requires diskette BFI LE. To inform the system operator that this diskette is required, enter:
MSG

,NEXT JOB REQUI RES DISKETTE BFI LE

Note: If you specify Y (yes) for IGC session at sign-on, and if you are sending a
message to an ideographic-capable display station, the message text might contain
ideographic characters.
If you are sending a message with ideographic characters, you must key in MSG,
the work station 10, and the comma in alphanumeric mode. You can then enter
ideograpl'li-c cl'laracters. Refer to the 5255 Display Station Operator's Guide for
further information.

How to Display Messages Sent from Other Display Stations
Messages sent to your display station from other operators by the MSG command are
not always displayed immediately but might be held for you to display as soon as
convenient. Each time a message comes to your display station from the MSG command, the display station buzzer sounds and the Message Waiting indicator turns on.
A maximum of 15 MSG command messages can be held at one time. If 15 messages
have been received but not yet displayed, additional messages sent by the MSG command are not accepted, and the sender receives a message that the message failed to
get to your display station.
You can use the MSG control command to display any messages that are waiting
for you. To enter the MSG control command, your display ~tation must be in command mode, standby mode, or inquiry mode. Enter MSG with no parameters.
Figure 2-13 shows an example of the display that appears.
2-58

Press the Enter/Rec Adv key to exit from the MSG display.
If you do not use the MSG command to display the waiting messages, they are not
displayed until the job that is executing ends.
Messages sent to a display station that is not signed on are automatically displayed
after sign-on.
When you sign off, any messages that were waiting to be displayed at your display
station are lost.

MESSAGE

*
*
*

W1,SJT
W1,SJT
W3,MFM

SYSTEM BACKUP SCHEDULED FOR 11:30 TODAY.
MAINTENANCE TO PAYROLL-DO NOT RUN.
WAREHOUSE AWAITING ORDER 1105362.

----------------------------------.----------.....-------------------------Figure 2-13. Sample Display of Messages Sent from Other Display Stations

How to Display Dually Routed Messages
Messages routed to both your display station and the system console by SYSLOG
are displayed via the MSG command. Messages can also be dually routed from
subconsoles to your display station. The display station buzzer sounds and the
Message Waiting indicator turns on. To display the message, your display station
must be in command mode, standby mode, or inquiry mode. Enter MSG with no
parameters. Figure 2-14 shows an example of the display that appears.
Press the Enter/Rec Adv key to exit from the MSG display.
If you do not use the MSG command to display the waiting messages, they are not
displayed until the job that is executing ends.

Display Station Opelation

2-59

• e
MESSAGE

SYS-9999 THIS MESSAGE WAS SENT TO SYSTEM CONSOLE
SYSlOG TEST r-1ES5AGE
SYS-2813 THIS MESSAGE WAS SENT TO SYSTEf'l CONSOLE
DISKETTE DRIVE IS NOT READY--INTERVENTION REqUIRED
SYS-6351 THIS MESSAGE WAS SENT TO SUBCONSOLE W4

~t~~T

JOBl

t~2010321

JOB2 W3010433
JOBl 1.1:5010532

~~-------------------------------------------------------------------------~
Figure 2-14. Sample Display of Messages Rerouted from the System Console

•

MIC: number of the rerouted message.
Text of the rerouted message .
JOB 1 or JOB2: indicates whether the rerouted message is for the job on the
main program level (JOB1) or for the job run under inquiry (JOB2).
Job name assigned by the system.

Note: If the system console has specified Y (yes) for IGC session, and if your display station is not ideographic capable, rerouted messages will contain periods in
place of ideographic characters.

How to Suppress Informational Messages
The I DE LETE control command specifies whether informational messages should
be displayed. An informational message is one that does not require an operator
response. If IDELETE is active (ON), informational messages will not be displayed
unless the Input/Output display is active. IDELETE is useful when you do not
want to see informational messages.

Command Format

Parameters
2-60

ON: I nformational messages are not displayed.
OFF: Informational messages are displayed.

COMMAND FUNCTION KEYS AND FUNCTION CONTROL KEYS
Command function keys are the row of numeric keys at the top of the keyboard.
They function as command keys when you press the CMD key ( 8 ) followed by

through ( ~ ) or the uppercase values of these keys (
either lowercase
through
Function control keys are the Print, Rollt (roll up), Rollt
(roll down), Clear, Help, and Home keys.

U).

Your programmer can decide which command function keys and function control
keys to enable for your system's uses. Your programmer must then tell you which
function control keys are enabled and which command key calls each selected function. For example, your programmer may decide to have command key 7 enabled

to end a job. To end a job, you would press the CMD key and the
key. To
perform a different function, assigned to command key 14, press the CMD key,

press and hold the shift key
and press the
key. Refer to the table that
follows for the command key numbers and their corresponding numeric keys.
If you press one of these keys when it is not enabled, an error message appears and
no data transfer occurs. To continue, press the Error Reset key and the correct key.
Uppercase Value

Lowercase Value

0
c:J

GJ
GJ

Command Key 13

Command Key 3

Command Key 15

Command Key 4

Command Key 16

Command Key 5

Command Key 17

c:J
c:J

Command Key 6

Command Key 18

Command Key 7

Command Key 19

Command Key 8

Command Key 20

'Command Key 9

Command Key 21

Command Key 10

Command Key 22

Command Key 11

0
GJ

Com mand Key 23

Command Key 1
Command Key 2

Command Key 12

Command Key 14

Command Key 24

0
CJ
CJ
0
U

Note: On ideographic keyboards, the command keys are different. See Appendix
A for illustrations of the Kanji and Taiwan ideographic keyboards and the ideographic function control keys.

Display Station Operation

2-61

DUP KEY
The SSP has enabled the Dup key on the input fields of the Input-Output display.
When you press the Dup key in a field programmed to allow duplication, an asterisk
with an overscore (*") is placed in the cursor position and all the following positions
of that field. This special symbol represents a request to the program to duplicate
the information from the same field in the previous record. If you press the Dup
key in a field not programmed to accept duplication, an error is displayed.
If you specified Y (yes) for IGC session, the Dup key will not function.

PRINT SPOOLING.
Print spooling is a part of the System/34 SSP that stores print data on disk for later
printing. With print spooling, job output for a printer is intercepted and stored on
disk in a spool file. Upon operator request, the stored output prints while another
job executes. The other job may also have printed output that is spooled. Processing with print spooling allows additional programs to execute without waiting for
a printer.
As a display station operator, you can:
•

Display your entries on the spool file

•

Display the status of the spool writer(s)

•

Cancel your entries on the spool file

•

Hold your entries on the spool file

•

Release your entries on the spool file

•

Change defer status or forms number for your spool file entries

•

Change the number of printed copies of your spool file entries

In addition, user access to the spool file allows you to display data that is being
stored on the spool file without having to print it out. You can cancel the entry
or can release the entry to print by specifying parameters on the COPYPRT pro·cedure .. lLyouspecify CAN.CELL.ttl~program will cancel the spool file entry
before it is displayed on the screen. You can also leave the status of the entries
unchanged. See the System Support Reference Manual for additional information
on the COPYPRT procedure.

2-62

How to Display Spool File Entries
The Spooled Print Status display shows your entries that are in the spool file.
Command Format

STATUS PRT [,ws-id]
(0)

Parameter

(P)

PRT: Displays your spool file entries. Refer to Figure 2-15
for an explanation of the display that appears.
ws-id: Displays only your spool file entries that are destined
for the printer with the specified work station 10. If you do
not enter a work station 10, all your spool file entries are
displayed.

Example

STATUS PRT or

e.
oe
•
-i ---1
o

0 0

SPOOLEr. PRINT STATUS
~BEHELD**
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
PROC
JOBNAME USER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

SPOOOO
SPOOOI
SPOO02
SPOO06
SPOO07

PROC2
PROC2
PROC2
PROC2
PROC2

141140104
141140104
141140104
141140104
141140104

JEH
JEN
JEN
JEN
JEH

141140436

JEN

9 SPOO11

FORM COpy
PLIHEI
PLINE2
PLIHE3
PLINE7
PLINE8

PI A2
P2 2H
PI 1
PI C1
P2 1
PI 1
P2 1
PI 1
PRINTKEY PI 1

0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001

3
1 *****3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
25
1
35
2
0099
1
0002
1

2
5

ENTER F-FOR14ARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR- E-END •••••••••• '-0 ~ f

Figure 2·15. Spooled Print Status Display

•

POS: the relative position of the entry in the spool file. In Figure 2-15,
notice that lines 6, 7, and 8 are partially blank because the entries in these
positions belong to a different display station operator.

10: the name assigned by the system to this print file. This is the spool-id
used with the spool commands. Only spool-ids for your jobs are displayed.

Display Station Operation

2-63

PROC: the outermost procedure name associated with this entry. If this
entry is blank, the job was run through OCl (II lOAD), or belongs to a
different display station operator.
BLOCKS AVAilABLE: the number of blocks available in the spool file or
the extents that can still be allocated on disk out of the total number that
can be allocated if space is available. The spool file is full when the first
number is zero.

41
•

o
•

o
o

JOBNAME: the job name assigned by the system (work station 10 and time).
HELD: indicates that the entire spool file is being held. No jobs can be printed
until the spool file is released by the RELEASE PRT command. Jobs can still
be written to the spool file.
USER: the user 10 associated with this entry. Only entries with your user
10 will be completely displayed.
COMPLETE: appears only. on the last screen of the Spooled Print Status
display.
PRINTER: the printer file name associated with this job.
10: the 10 of the printer that output is to be routed to.
PRTY: the priority assigned to this job from the printer statement. An A
indicates that the spool writer is currently printing this entry. A C
indicates that the spool file entry is being copied by the user access to
spool (COPYPRT) procedure. An H indicates that the spool file entry
is held.
FORM: the form number assigned to this job.

•

COPY: the number of copies remaining to be printed; default is 1 unless
changed on a PRINTER statement or by the CHANGE command. If the
job is being printed, this value includes the copy being printed.

•

TOTAL: the total number of pages of output generated. If the number
is preceded by one or more asterisks, the print entry is still being created and
the number indicates which page is being created. If the page count is zero
and there are no asterisks displayed with the zero, the system failed before
the spool file entry was completed.
WRT: the page number that is being printed. If a spool file entry is being
printed by the spool writer, this column indicates the page number that is
being printed. If the spool writer is stopped while printing a spool file entry,
this column indicates the page number that was being printed by the spool
writer when it was stopped.

2-64

This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if F were entered.

How to Display the Spool Writer Status
The Spool Writer Status display shows the status of the spool writer for each
printer.
Command Format

STATUS WRT [,ws-id]
(D)

WRT: Displays the status of the spool writer for
each printer. Refer to Figure 2-16 for an explanation
of the display that appears.

Parameter

ws-id: The printer 10 for which the spool writer status
information is to be displayed. If you do not specify
a printer 10, the spool writer status information for all
printers is displayed.
Example

STATUS WRT or

•

WRT

••
PI
P2

P3
P4

WI
WI
Xl
WI

MSG

ACTIVE

STARTED
STOPPED
STARTED
STARTED

H
H
N

•• • •
G

RES
N

Y
H

PRTY
N
N
H
N

7--!-H

SEP
PAGES

FORMS

SPOOL
10

0
1
1

0001
0001
0001

0001

PROC
NAt-IE

SPOOO3 CATALOG

-------

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END .•••••••••••• F

Figure 2-16. Spool Writer Status Display

Display Station Operation

2-65

"
G

•

PRT ID: the ID of the printer.
CTRL CNSL: the ID of the display station that controls the printer. If the
printer is currently controlled by a subconsole, the ID of the subconsole is
displayed; if the printer is not currently controlled by a subconsole, the
system console ID is displayed .
MSG: Y specifies that a spool writer message is pending. N specifies that
no spool writer messages are pending.
ACTIVE: indicates one of the following for the status of the spool writer:
• STARTED: indicates that the spool writer is started.
• STARTED forms number: indicates that the spool writer is started and
will print only the entries that require the forms number that was
specified with the START PRT command.
•

RESTARTED: indicates that the suqconsole operator or the system
operator has entered the RESTART command and that the spool
writer has been restarted.

• STOPPED: indicates that the spool writer is stopped.
• STOP PAGE: indicates that the spool writer will be stopped when it
finishes printing the current page because the STOP PRT command
was entered with the PAGE parameter"
• STOP JOB: indicates that the spool writer will be stopped when it
finishes printing the current job because the STOP PRT command
was entered with the JOB parameter.
• STOP SYSTEM: indicates that the spool writer is started but that
the system operator has entered a STOP SYSTEM command; therefore,
the spool writer cannot perform any printing until the system operator
enters a START SYSTEM command.
• QUEUE HELD: indicates that the spool writer is started but that the
system operator has entered the HOLD PRT command; therefore,
the spool queue is held and the spool writer cannot perform any
printing until the system operator -enters a RELEASE PRT command.
ORES: Y specifies that the spool writer is resident. N specifies that the
spool writer is swappable.

o
•

o
2-66

PRTY: indicates the priority assigned to this spool writer: H indicates
a high priority and N indicates a normal priority.
SEP PAGES: indicates the number of separator pages that are printed
preceding each spool file entry.
FORMS: indicates the forms number that the spool writer is currently
using for printing.

o
•

SPOO LID: is the 6-character system-assigned name of the entry on the
spool file that the spool writer is currently printing.
PROC NAME: is the name of the procedure that created the spool file
entry that the spool file writer is currently printing.

Notes:
1. The spool-id and the procedure name are both blank if the spool writer is not
currently printing a spool file entry.
2. The spool-id and the procedure name are both displayed if the spool writer
is currently printing a spool file entry that you created.
3. - (dashes) are displayed instead of the spool-id and the procedure name if
the spool writer is currently printing a spool file entry that you did not
create.

How to Cancel a Spool File Entry
Command Format

CANCEL PRT ,spool-id
(C)

Parameters

(P)

PRT: Cancels the specified entry (spool-id) from the spool
file.

spool-id: The 6-character spool file ID, beginning with the
characters SP. You can use the STATUS PRT control command
to determine the spool file ID of the entry to be canceled.
Note: As a display station operator, you can cancel only
entries you have placed on the spool file.
Example

To cancel an entry with a spool file ID of SP0036, enter:
CANCE L PRT,SP0036 or
C P,SP0036

Display Station Operation

2-67

How to Hold a Spool File Entry
Command Format

HOLD PRT ,spool-id
(H)

Parameters

(P)

PRT: Holds the specified entry (spool-id) on the spool file
so that the entry is not printed.
spool-id: The 6-character spool file 10, beginning with the
characters SP, of the entry to hold. You can use the STATUS
PRT control command to determine the spool file 10 of
the entry to be held.
Notes:
1. As a display station operator, you can hold only entries
you have placed on the spool file.
2. If you specify a HOLD command for an entry while it is
printing, the spool writer no longer prints that entry but
begins printing the next entry on the spool file. The
held entry will not be printed until a RELEASE control
command is entered for the held entry.

Example

To hold entry SP0036 on the spool file, enter:
HOLD PRT,SP0036 or
H P,SP0036

2-68

How to Release a Spool File Entry

Command Format

RELEASE PRT ,spool-id
(L)

Parameters

(P)

PRT: Indicates that a specified entry with the specified 10

on the spool file should be released. The RELEASE
command releases the spool file entry that is held and
makes it available for printing. You can use the STATUS
PRT control command to determine the spool file 10
of the entry to be released.
Notes:

1. As a display station operator, you can release only entries
you have placed on the spool file.
2. When a spool file entry is released, the spool writer
normally begins printing the entry if the spool writer
is not already printing another spool file entry.
However, printing may not begin for one of the
following reasons:
• The spool writer has been stopped by the subconsole or system operator.
• The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The spool file has been held by the system operator.
Use the STATUS PRT command to determine if the
spool fi Ie has been held.
• The spool file entry is not available for printing
because the entry is still being created, is being copied
by the COPYPRT procedure, or requires different
forms than the spool writer is using (if the spool
writer was started with a forms number specified).
• There are insufficient system resources to allow
the spool writer to begin printing.
• The printer is offline, is not powered on, or requires
some other kind of operator intervention, such as
correcting a paper jam. The spool writer attempts to
start printing and issues a message when any of these
conditions are detected.
Example

To release entry SP0036 on the spool file, enter:
RELEASE PRT,SP0036 or
L P,SP0036

Display Station Operation

2-69

How to Change the Defer Status of a Spool File Entry
Command Format

CHANGE DEFER,
(G)

Parameters

[~~SJ ,spool-id
-

NO: Indicates that the spool file entry can be printed
while it is being created. NO is the default.
spoo/-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the

entry on the spool file, which begins with SP. You can use
the STATUS PRT control command to determine the
spool file 10 of the entry for which the defer status is to
be changed.
Notes:

1. As a display station operator, you can change the defer
status for only those entries you have placed on the
spool file.
2. When the defer status of a spool file entry that is still
being created is changed to NO, the spool writer
normally begins printing the entry if the spool writer
is not already printing another spool file entry. However, printing may not begin for one of the following
reasons:
• The spool writer has been stopped by the subconsole or system operator.
• The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The entire spool file has been held by the system
operator.
• The spool file entry is not available for printing
because the entry is held, is being copied by the
COPYPRT procedure, or requires different forms
than the spool writer is using (if the spool writer
was started with a forms number specified).
• There are insufficient system resources available
to allow the spool writer to begin printing.
• The printer is being used by another program, is
offline, is not powered on, or requires some other
operator intervention, such as correcting a paper
jam. In any of these cases, the spool writer attempts
to begin printing and issues a message when the
condition is detected.
2-70

3. If you change the defer status to YES for an entry that
is being both created and printed, the spool writer will
no longer print that entry, but begins printing the next
entry in the spool file. The entry for which the defer
status was changed can be printed after it has been
created, or if the defer status is changed back to NO.
Example

To print entry SP0023 while it is being created, enter:
CHANGE DEFER,NO,SP0023 or
G DEFER"SP0023

How to Change the Number of Printed Copies of a Spool Entry

Command Format

CHAN G E COP I ES~nn ~spool-id
(G)

Parameters

COPIES: Changes the number of copies of printed output
for an entry on the spool file. You can use the STATUS PRT
control command to determine the number of copies
remaining to be printed in the spool file.

nn: The number of copies to print for the entry. This
parameter can be from 1 through 99.

spool-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the
entry on the spool file, which begins with SP. You can
use the STATUS PRT control command to determine
the spool file ID of the entry for which the number of
copies is to be changed.
Note: As a display station operator, you can change the
number of copies only for the entries you have placed on
the spool file.
Example

To change entry SP0011 on the spool file to print five copies
of output, enter:
CHANGE COPIES,5,SP0011 or
G COPIES,5,SP0011

Display Station Operation

2-71

How to Change the Forms Number of a Spool Entry

Command Format

CHANGE FORMS,xxxx,spool-id
(G)

Parameters

FORMS: Changes the forms
entry on the spool file.

~umber

to be used for an

xxxx: The forms number of the forms to be used for the
entry. You can specify from 1 to 4 characters.
spool-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the
entry on the spool file. You can use the STATUS PRT
control command to determine the spool file 10 of the
entry on the spool file and to determine the forms
number for the entry.
Notes:
1. As a display station operator, you can change the forms
number only for entries you have placed on the spool
file.
2. An error message is issued if you attempt to change the
forms number for an entry that is being printed by the
spool writer.
3. If the spool writer was started with a specified forms
number so that only the spool file entries that required
the specified forms are printed, and if the CHANGE
command is used to change the forms number required
by a spool file entry to the forms number that the spool
writer is printing, then the spool writer normally begins
printing the spool file entry if the spool writer is not
already printing another spool file entry. You can use
the STATUS WRT command to determine if the spool
writer was started with a specified forms number. However, printing may not begin for one of the following
reasons:

• The spool writer has been stopped by the subconsole or system operator .
•. The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The entire spool file has been held by the system
operator.
• The spool file entry is not available for printing
because it is held, is still being created, or is being
copied by the COPYPRT procedure.
• There are insufficient system resources available
to allow the spool writer to begin printing.

2-72

• The printer is being used by another program, is
offline, is not powered on, or requires some other
operator intervention, such as correcting a paper
jam. In any of these cases, the spool writer
attempts to begin printing and issues a message
when the condition is detected.
Example

To change the forms number of entry SP0011 to PT1, enter
CHANGE FORMS,PT1,SP0011 or
G FORMS,PT1,SPOO11

Display Station Operation

2-73

INPUT JOB QUEUE
The input job queue is an area on disk that contains a list of jobs waiting to be
executed on System/34. You can place jobs on the input job queue, cancel jobs
you have placed on the queue, and assign priority to jobs before you place them on
the queue. By placing a job on the input job queue, you can continue with other
activities instead of waiting for the job to execute.

How to Put a Job on the Input Job Queue

Command Format

Parameters

jobq prty: Specifies where a job will be placed on the input
job queue. You may enter values 1, 2,3,4, or 5. The
default is 3. The highest level you can choose is 5. All job
queue priority 5 jobs are placed ahead of job queue priority
4, 3, 2, and 1 jobs on the input job queue.
Note: The execution priority of a job is determined by
the PRTY command.
library name: Specifies the active user library for this job.
The system searches the active user library and then the system library for the procedures and load programs to \be
executed in this job, and for any active message members or
active formats used in this job.
Note: If resource security is active and the library is
secured, you must be authorized access to the library.
This error is not detected until the job is executing.
procname: The name of the procedure that defines the
job to be placed on the input job queue.
parm1 ,parm2 , ... : Parameters required by the
procedure.

2-74

Examples

To place the PAYROLL job (which is in the system library)
on the input job queue, enter:
JOBO ,PAYROLL or
J ,PAYROLL
To give the PAYROLL job a high position on the input
job queue, enter:
JOBO 4" PAYROLL or
J 4"PAYROLL

When you put a job on the input job queue via the JOBQ control command, the
name that the system has assigned to the job is displayed.
Press the Enter/Rec Adv key once to submit the job to the input job queue.
Pressing the Enter/Rec Adv key several times will cause multiple copies of your
job to be submitted to the input job queue.
0--q

COMMAND

ENTER COMMAND OR eCl STATEMENT.
JOB W2130007 WAS SUCCESSFULLY ADDED TO THE JOBQ
J06Q ,lISTlIBR,##CPTEST,lOAD

<- READY

After you press the Enter/Rec Adv key,
the cursor returns to this position.

Display Station Operation

2-75

How to Display the Status of One or All Jobs on the I nput Job Queue
To display status information about one or all jobs that are on the input job queue
and are from your display station with your user 10, enter:
STATUS JOBQ [,jobname]
(D)

(J)

If [,jobname] is omitted, the display shows the status of all jobs on the input
job queue that were entered from your display station with your user 10.
The following display appears:

• e
•

JOB

QUEUE STATUS JOPPED j-----t:::*COMPLETE**

0--- POS

JOBS IN QUEUE:
JOB
PROCEDURE

1 WI081521
2 WI081805
3 WI091214

4It

PAYROLL
ACCTREC
ACCTPAY

3 OF

JQ PRTY
5
3
3

EXEC PRTY

USER

LIBRARY

H
N
M

HML
HML
Ht1L

PAYLIB
LEDGER
LEDGER

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ..•.•••••.•••

•

pas:

•

JOB: the assigned name of this job.

e
CD
•

o
2-76

G ••

the relative position of the job in the queue.

JOBS IN QUEUE: the number of jobs currently in the queue out of the
maximum that can be in the queue.
STOPPED: appears if processing of jobs on the input job queue has not
started.
PROCEDURE: the procedure name of this job.
JO PRTY: the position of a job on the input job queue. Jobs with a job
queue priority of 5 are the first to be taken from the queue for execution.

COMPLETE: appears if the entries shown on the screen are the last entries
for this display station.
EXEC PRTY: indicates a job's execution priority. Jobs with high priority
are run with the least number of interruptions.
H: High execution priority
M: Medium execution priority
N: Normal execution priority
L: Low execution priority

USE R: the user I D of the su bmitter.

•

LIBRARY: the optional user library that the procedure is to come from.

This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if F were pressed.

How to Cancel Jobs on the I nput Job Queue
The CANCEL control command cancels a job on the input job queue that you previously entered via the JOBO control command. The CANCE L command must come
from the same display station and the same user-id that were used to place the job on
the input job queue.

Command Format

CANCEL JOBO,jobname
(C)

Rarameters

(J)

JOBQ: Cancels a job on the input job queue.
jobname: The a-character, system-assigned name of the
job that you want to cancel. To cancel job Wl00llll on
the input job queue, enter:
CANCEL JOBO,Wl001111 or
C J,W1001111
To see what your job name is, use the STATUS JOBQ
command.

How to Assign Priority to Jobs to be Placed on the Input Job Queue
The jobq prty parameter of the JOBO command assigns a job a specified position on
the input job queue. See How to Put a Job on the Input Job Queue earl ier in this
chapter.
To assign execution priority to a job, use the PRTY command discussed earlier
in this chapter.

Display Station Operation

2-77

HOW TO INTERRUPT A JOB (INQUIRY)
The inquiry function of System/34 allows you to interrupt an executing job so that
you can run another job (inquiry job), cancel a job, or enter commands. For
example, you might interrupt a job to retrieve and display information from a data
file. When your inquiry completes, you can resume the interrupted job's execution
from the point of interruption. If no job is active when you inquire, the system
ignores your request. If your display station is in standby mode when it is acquired
by a program, you cannot use the inquiry function. Inquiry cannot be done from a
data display station.
Press the Attn key to interrupt a job. There may be a short delay before the Inquiry
display appears because the system does not allow the Attn key at this time. In most
cases, however, the Inquiry display will appear in a few moments.
If the program you interrupted is an SRT (single requestor terminal) program or
non-interactive program, the system suspends that job's execution and displays:

INQUIRY OPTIONS

INiERRUPTED JOB W1090606

O. RESUME INTERRUPTED JOB.
1. REQUEST COMMAND DISPLAY

2. CANCEL JOB AND CLOSE FILES.

NEW DATA IS PRESERVED.

3. CANCEL JOB AND DO NOT CLOSE FILES.

NEW DATA IS LOST.

4. SET INQUIRY CONDITION FOR PROGRAM.
S. DISPLAY SESSION STATUS

ENTER NUMBER TO SELECT OPTION OR ENTER MSG CONTROL COMi1AND.

The options you can select are:
0:
1:

Resume the interrupted job.
Request Command display. When you select this oPtion, the Command
display appears. From the Command display, you can run any number
of jobs before you return to the interrupted job.
You can interrupt a job running under inquiry (a job you have run via
oPtion 1 on the inquiry display), but you cannot run another job at that
time. You can also execute control commands.
When a program is interrupted and option 1 is chosen, the switch
settings, the active message members, the menu members, and the user
library that were active prior to the start of the interrupted program will
be active during the inquiry.

2-78

For example, if a procedure containing the statement
// LIBRARY NAME-JOBLIB
is interrupted, the active library for the inquiry would be the library
that was active before the procedure started (not JOBLlB).

Note: Some programs will not allow you to select option 1. If the
program you are working on does not allow this option, the line
showing option 1 will not appear on the screen.
2:
3:
4:
5:
MSG:

End the interrupted job and save new data that has been created.
End the interrupted job and do not save the new data that has been
created.
Set an indicator in the system that can be used by the interrupted job.
Select this option only upon programmer request.
Display session status.
Display messages sent to your work station, or send a message to
another work station.

Note: When you select a 2 or 3 option cancel, the content of your data files may
be unpredictable.
An asterisk (*) appearing next to an option means that the option will be delayed.
This means that the program will be resumed until the option can be serviced. An
asterisk can appear next to options 1, 2, and 3. If you select one of these options
and an asterisk appears, there may be a short delay before the Command display
appears.
To return to the interrupted job, select the 0 option or select the 1
option and press Cmd key 1 from the command display.

Display Station Operation

2~79

If the program that you interrupted is an MRT (multiple requestor terminal) program, the system stops processing information from your display station (but
continues processing information from the other display stations attached to the
M RT program). Your inquiry request will be accepted only if the program has
invited input from the display station. Normally, the Input Inhibited light is off
when input has been invited from the display station. The following display
appears:

It\QUIRY OPTIONS

INTERRUPTED J03 W1090459

O. RESUME INTERRUPTED JOB_
1. REQUEST COMMAND DISPLAY.
2. RELEASE DISPLAY STATION AND CONTINUE

~ITH

NEXT JOB STEP.

3. RELEASE DISPLAY STATION AND CANCEL REMAINING JOB STEPS.
5. D!SPLAY SESSION STATUS.

ENTER NUMBER TO SELECT OPTION OR ENTER MSG CONTROL COMMAND.

The options you can select are:
0:
1:

2:
3:
5:
MSG:

Return to the interrupted job.
Request Command display. When you select this option, the Command
display appears. F rom the Command display, you can run any number
of inquiry jobs before you return to the interrupted job.
You can interrupt a job running under inquiry, but you cannot run
another job at that time. You can also execute control commands.
Release your display station from the program and continue by
processing the next step in the job.
Release your display station from the program and cancel the remaining
steps in the job.
Display session status.
Send a message via the MSG command.

To return to the interrupted job, select the 0 option or press the Cmd key and the
1 key.

2-80

HOW TO DISPLAY THE TIME

The TIME control command displays the time of day and the system date.
Command Format

TIME

Example

TIME-14:56:23

DATE 07/19/80

HOW TO SIGN OFF A LOCAL OR REMOTE DISPLAY STATION

Enter the OF F, control command to sign off a local display station or a remote
display station on a leased line. Your work session will end and the Sign On display
will appear.
Command Format

OFF [DROP]
HOLD

When using the OFF DROP command to sign off the last remote display station
on a switched line, you should not power off the control unit and the display
station until the following sequence has occurred:
1.

The system clears the display screen.

The system turns off the line synchronization light on the display station and
the control unit.

Enter OFF HOLD to sign off a remote display station on a switched line and hold
the communications line connection. Your work session ends, but the Sign On
display will appear. When the Sign On display reappears, you have successfully
signed off.

Display Station Operation

2-81

HOW TO DROP A SWITCHED COMMUNICATIONS LINE
If no printer is active, enter OFF orQFF DROP to sign off a remote display
station on a switched line. The communications line will be dropped when all
remote display stations on the line have signed off using the OFF DROP command
and no printer on the line is active. When you enter OFF DROP at a remote display
station on a switched-linerthe Sign On display will not appear.
If you are trying to drop a switched communications line and a printer is active, you
must make the printer inactive and then drop the line. To make the printer
inactive, perform one of the following steps from the system console, or have the
system console operator do one of the following:
•

Wait for the printer to complete all jobs.

•

If print spooling is active, stop the spool writer for that printer by using the
STOP PRT command.

•

If print spooling is not active, cancel the program that is using this printer by
entering the CANCE L command.

After the printer is inactive, drop the communications line by doing one of the
following:
•

Using the VARY command to vary the printer off line.

•

Signing on one of the remote display stations on that communications line and
then using the OFF DROP command to sign it off.

See Chapter 4 of this manual or see the System Support Reference Manual for
more information on the STOP PRT, CANCEL and VARY commands.

2-82

Chapter 3. Subconsole Operation

Subconsole support is part of the optional SSP. Installation of this support is done
during CNFIGSSP. For further information about installing subconsole support,
refer to the Installation and Modification Reference Manual.
Subconsole display stations can be remote or local. Any command display
station can be designated as a subconsole display station. During system configuration, subconsoles and printers assigned to them can be specified.
Subconsole mode is used by operators to control printers assigned to their subconsole display station. If security is active, you must be designated as a subconsole
operator, system operator, or security officer before you can operate in subconsole
mode.
To receive messages intended for a subconsole display station and to control a
printer, a subconsole operator must be signed on to a display station that is in
subconsole mode.

Subconsole Operation

3-1

This chapter describes the functions you can perform as a subconsole operator:

3-2

•

How to specify subconsole mode

•

How to display the status of the system devices

•

How to display the status of your communications support

•

How to display the status of the input job queue

•

How to display the status of your spool file entries

•

How to start, stop, and restart spool writers

•

How to display the status of spool writers

•

How to cancel spool file entries

•

How to hold and release your spool file entries

•

How to change the number of printed copies for spool file entries

•

How to change the defer status of spool file entries

•

How to change the forms number for spool file entries

•

How to change the printer 10 for spool file entries

•

How to change the order of spool file entries

•

How to change the priority of spool writers

•

How to change the resident/swappable attribute of spool writers

•

How to change the number of separator pages printed by spool writers

•

How to reply to a message

•

How to send a message

•

How to display the time

•

How to sign off a subconsole

HOW TO SPECIFY SUBCONSOLE MODE

To switch to subconsole mode from command mode, hold the Shift key and press
the Sys Req key. Then press the Enter fRec Adv key. The following display will
appear to indicate that you are in subconsole mode:

SUS CONSOLE

SYSTEM

If this subconsole display does not appear, one of the following applies:
•

Security is active and you are not designated as a subconsole operator or higher.

•

Your display station is not configured as a subconsole display station.

•

Your display station is configured as a subconsole display station, but no printers
are assigned to it.

•

Your display station is configured as a subconsole display station, but the system
operator has used an ASSIGN NOSUB control command which restricts your
display station from operating in subconsole mode.

•

Your subconsole display station is configured as an alternative system console,
and was made the system console via the CONSOLE command. After another
display station becomes the system console, your subconsole returns to alternative status. The system operator must assign the subconsole attribute for your
subconsole display station to reactivate the subconsole function.

A message is displayed indicating one of the above. After viewing the message,
press the Reset key.

Subconsole Operation

3-3

You may get a blank screen instead of a subconsole display. This will happen if
you use a STATUS command in subconsole mode and do not end the status display by entering E (end), but sign off with the status display still active. The screen
_wi U~e _~L~ k the n.~~!tJ_~~_y~~.~i gr:'_.!?~.~ ~~ _g() _~o_.su_~~~~~!? I.e Il'l.c:>.de. l"~_e_sy ~~I!l. __
will have deleted all answered messages and will have to rebuild the screen display.
Once you are in subconsole mode, you may reply to all messages relating to the
printers that your subconsole display station controls. Refer to Messages in
Chapter 4 for a discussion on handling messages at the subconsole display station.

SUBCONSOLE OPERATOR-CONTROL COMMANDS
The following control commands are discussed in this chapter. All can be entered
from subconsole mode.
CANCE L JOBO ..............3-20

REPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
(R)

CANCEL PRT ...............3-29
(C)

(P)

RESTART PRT ..............3-25
(T)

(P)

CHANGE COPIES .............3-33
(G)

START PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
(S)

(P)

CHANGE DEFER .............3-34
(G)

STATUS JOBO ...............3-18
(0)

(J)

CHANGE FORMS .............3-36
(G)

STATUS PRT ................3-21
(0)

(P)

CHANGE PRT ............... 3-40
(G)

(P)

STATUS REMOTES ...........3-10
(D)

(R)

CHANGE PRTY .............. 3-41
(G)

STATUS SUBSESS ............3-16
(0)

(N)

CHANG E RES ............... 3-42
(G)

STATUS SUBSYS .............3-14
(0)

(I)

CHANGE SEP ............... 3-43
(G)

STATUS WO R KSTN . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
(0)

(W)

CHANGE 10 ................ 3-38
(G)

STATUS WRT ...............3-26
(0)
(WRT)

HOLD PRT ................. 3-30
(H)

(P)

STOP P RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

(P)

MSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
RELEASE PRT ...............3-31
(L)

3-4

(P)

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE SYSTEM DEVICES

Command Format

STATUS WORKSTN [,wS-id]
(D)

(W)

WORKSTN: Displays status information about the
local and non-offline remote display stations and
printers, and the diskette drive, or displays status
information about a selected display station or
work station printer.

Parameters

ws-id: The ID of the display station or printer for which
status information is displayed. If you do not specify an
ID, status information for all display stations and
printers is displayed.
Example

You enter
STATUS WORKSTN or

The following two-part display appears if you do not enter ws-id:

WO ~KSTATION ,TATUS
WS-ID
II
PI
Wl
W2
W3
W4

CONS
W1

C01'1PLETE

STATUS
ON-LINE
ON-LINE
ACTIVE
ON-LINE
ON-LINE
ACTIVE

SUS
USER

---------

--------CVC

--------------BML

TYPE
DISKETTE
SYS PRINTER
SYS CONSOLE
ALT CmmOLE
ALT Cor~SOLE
SUB Cm~SOLE

SUB

SIZE
1920

N
N

1920
1920

1920

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ••••••••••••

Subconsole Operation

3-5

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or RolI-l- (roll down) key, the next part of the
STATUS WORKSTN display appears .

•

MSG

PI
WI
W2
W3
W4

•

~I\s~

WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID

N
N

-------------

CURR LN

""'
W3

CONSOLE

POSS LU
_ _ .,:10_

----------------

IGC

This field
appears only
if you have
the ideographic
version of
the SSP.

N
N
N
N

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •.•••••.....

.....

WS-ID: lists the diskette drive, all local display stations, all local printers, and
the remote devices that are active, online, or pending. 11 is the I D for the diskette, and the other IDs are defined at system configuration time.

CONS: shows the ws-id of the controlling console configured for each printer.

•

STATUS: lists the current status of each of the devices. Possible entries are:
ON-LINE - The device is online but is not presently being used.
OFF-LINE - The device has been varied offline by the system operator.
ACTIVE - The device is currently being used.
PENDING - The remote device is being varied on or off.

e
G

3-6

COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
USER: lists the user ID that was entered at sign-on time for each active display station. Fields for inactive display stations, printers, and the diskette
show hypens (----) for the user ID.

TYPE: describes each device listed on this display.
DISKETTE: The diskette drive
SYS PR INTE R: The system printer
PRINTER: A printer other than the system printer
DATA: A data only display station
COMMAND: A command display station
SYS CONSO LE: A system console
ALT CONSO LE: An alternative system console
SUBCONSOLE: A subconsole display station

SUB: shows whether a subconsole or an alternative system console is
currently active as a subconsole (receiving messages for a printer).
SIZE: shows the size of the display station display screen.
960-character display screen
1920-character display screen

•
••

SUBCONSOLE: indicates that the STATUS WORKSTN command was issued
from subconsole mode and subconsole commands except REPLY are valid
with the I option.
MSG: indicates that broadcast messages failed to get to this display station.
Y indicates. that the system operator sent a broadcast message to all display
stations but this display station di'd not receive the message because its
message queue was full. This field is'valid for display stations only; for
printers and the diskette drive, this field contains a hyphen (-).
C U indicates the control unit ID of the remote device.
CURR LN: if the device is online and attached via a communications line,
shows the line number (line 1,2,3, or 4).

POSS LN: if the device is'attached via a communications line, shows the
numbers of all possible lines on which an offline device can communicate
(line 1, 2, 3, or 4). If the device is pending, shows the line number it will
communicate on when it is online (line 1,2,3, or 4).

•

IGC: appears only if you have the ideographic version of the SSP.
D

Appears if only the display station is ideographic capable.

Appears if both the display and the keyboard are ideographic
capable, or if the device is an ideographic-capable printer.

Appears for nonideographic devices.
Appears for the diskette drive.

Subconsole Operation

3-7

This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing
the Enter fRec Adv key causes the following action:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last page and
more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to the first
page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed again. If
you enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system will
respond as if F were pressed.
When entered along with a command or OCl on the input fields
below the prompt, causes the command or OCl to be processed.
You can end the current STATUS session by entering a procedure
command, an OCl statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control
command, or another STATUS command.

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

If you enter the STATUS WORKSTN [,wS-idJ command and include a work
station 10, the following display appears. In this example, work station W3
requested the status of work station Wl (0 W, Wl).

,.
~ORKSTATION

oWS-IO
Wl

STATUS
CONS

cm1PLETE
STATUS
ACTIVE

sua CONSOLE
USER
KSA

TYPE
SYS CONSOLE

SUB

SIZE
1920

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ••••••••••••

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or Rollt (roll down) key, the next part of the
display appears.

3-8

~8RKSTATION

LJS-IO

W2
~3

STATUS

COI'!PLETE

MSG
N

SUS Cm.JSOLE

CURR LN

POSS IN

N
N

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-END .••..•••••.•

Note: The status of all work stations is displayed after you press the Roll key
instead of only the specified work station.

Subconsole Operation

3-9

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE REMOTE SYSTEM DEVICES
Command Format

STATUS REMOTES [,ws-id]
(D) (R)

Parameters

REMOTES: Displays status information about the remote
display stations and printers, or displays status information
about a selected remote display station or work station
printer.
ws-id: The 10 of the remote display station or printer
for which status information is displayed. If you do not
specify an 10, status information for all remote display
stations and printers is displayed.

Example

You enter
STATUS REMOTES or

o R
The following display appears:

. - -. .--t----t---t--t----~--,

SUB cm~SOL{

CmlPlETE

WS-IO
01
02
P2
03

CONS

ST.~TUS

ACTIVE
OFF-LINE

ON-ln~E

PENDHiG
pcNOn~G

Dff

PENi)n~G

OFF-LI!-:E

PENDD-i3

USER

TYPE

KSA

SunCOI--!SOlE

--------

co:--;n;\~'m

-------------------------------------------

SUS

SIZE

1920
1920

P~INTER
~'.U3Cc:_;30

cmi:iA;·m
cO~atA.NO

COti::M;D

1920
1920
0960
C9c.,O

p,UlnER

ROLL KEYS FeR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARO, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO.............

~-----------------------------------~)
After you press the Rollt (roll up) or Rollt (roll down) key, the next part of the
STATUS REMOTES display appears.

3-10

•
WORKSTATIOH STATUS t
WS-IO
01

MSG
Y

P2
N

03
04
05
06
P3

N
N

COMPLETEt~~SUB
CU
CUI
CUI
CUI
CU2
CU2
CU2
CU2
CU2

CURR LN
I

0
COHSOLE

POSS LN
I
I
I
2

IGC----+-- This field
N
appears only
N
N
if you have
N
the ideo-

2
2
2

N
N
N

graphic
version of

the SSP.

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

~~ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO.............

e
e

WS-ID: lists the remote display stations and printers defined for the system.
CONS: shows the controlling console configured for each printer.
STATUS: lists the current status of each of the devices. Possible entries are:
ON-LINE - The device is online but is not presently being used.
OFF-LINE - The device has been varied offline by the system operator.
ACTIVE - The device is currently being used.
PENDING - The remote device is being varied on or off.

CD
G.

COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
USE R: lists the user ID that was entered at sign-on time for each active
remote display station. Inactive remote display stations and printers show
hyphens (----) for the user ID.
TYPE: describes each device listed on this display.
PRINTER: A printer other than the system printer
DATA: A data only display station
COMMAND: A command display station
SUBCONSOLE: A subconsole display station

SUB: shows whether a subconsole or an alternative system console is
currently active as a subconsole (receiving messages from a printer).

Subconsole Operation

3-11

SIZE: shows the size of the display station display screen.
960-character display
1920-character display

o
e

SUBCONSOlE: indicates that the STATUS REMOTES command was
issued from subconsole mode, and subconsole commands are valid with the
I option.
MSG: indicates whether broadcast messages failed to get to this display
station. Y indicates that the system operator sent a broadcast message to all
Display stations but thi~ displa~ station did not receive the message because
its message queue was fuii. This field IS valid for dispfay-statTons onty;for
printers and the diskette drive, this field contains a hyphen (-).
C U: indicates the control unit ID of the remote device.

•

CURR IN: if the device is online and attached via a communications line,
shows the line number (line 1,2,3, or 4).

•

POSS IN: if the device is attached via a communications line, shows the
numbers of all possible lines on which an offline device can communicate
(line 1,2,3, or 4). If the device is pending, shows the line number it will
communicate on when it is online (line 1,2,3, or 4).

•

IGC: appears only if you have the ideographic version of the SSP.

Appears if the device is an ideographic-capable printer.

Appears for non ideographic devices.

This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing
the Enter/Rec Adv key causes the following action:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last page and
more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to the first
page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed again. If
you enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system will
respond as if F were pressed.
When entered-atongwith a command orOCl on the input fields
below the prompt, causes the command or OCl to be processed.
You can end the current STATUS session by entering a procedure
command, an OCl statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control
command, or another STATUS command.

3-12

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

If you enter the STATUS REMOTES ~ws-id]·command and include a remote work
station ID, the following display appears. In this example. work station W3 has
requested the status of work station D 1.

~ORKSTATION

~JS-ID

STATUS
CONS

SUB CONSOLE:

COMPLETE
STATUS
ACTIVE

TYPE
COtiM,\ND

USER
KSA

SUB

SIZE
1920

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER

F-FOR~ARO,

I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO ..•••••..••.

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or RolI~ (roll down) key, the next part of the
display appears.

WORKSTATImJ STATUS
W3-IO
D1

MSG
N

cm1PlETE

SUB CONSOLE

CU
CUl

CURR LN

POSS lN

ROll KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFOR!1ATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-ENO ••••..•..•••

Subconsole Operation

3-13

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE SSP-ICF SUBSYSTEMS

Command Format

STATUS SUBSYS
(D)

(I)

SUBSYS: Displays status information about the enabled

Parameters

SSP-ICF subsystems.
Example:

You enter:
STATUS SUBSYS or
o I
The following display appears:

•

Cml?LETE
COi1~1CN

CONFIG

~ ~

3-14

SUE CONSOLE

TES

UEUE SPA E 06144 8

SWAPPABLE

NAt';!:

YIN

TYPE

INTRA
BSCcLP2

Y
Y

INTRA
BSCEL

Ln~E

ACTUAL COMMON QUEUE SPACE 05664 BYTES
TASK SIZES IN BYTES I I QUEUE SPACE
SUB
0 MGT
LINK I I ALLee AVAIL

02048

0·3192

06144

ENTER F-FORUARO. I-INPUT. R-RESTART. U-UPDATE. OR E-END •..••••••••••

05952

e
o

CONFIG NAME contains a list of subsystem configuration names currently
enabled or being enabled.
This field contains the allocated common queue space for the SSP-ICF subsystems. This field may be blank if no subsystem is fully enabled.

•

SWAPPABLE indicates whether or not the subsystem task is swappable. A
value of Y indicates that it is swappable. If a data management task is
required for the subsystem task, the data management task swap status is the
same as the subsystem task swap status.

•

TYPE describes the type of subsystem.
SNUF - SNA upline facility
CCP - CCP
CICS - CICS/VS
IMS -IMS/VS
BSCEL - BSC equivalence link
INTRA - Intra System/34
SNA PEER - SNA peer
3270BSC - BSC 3270
3270S0 LC - SNA 3270
FINANCE - Finance

•

COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
LINE describes the communications line allocated to the subsystem configuration currently enabled or being enabled.
TASK SIZES IN BYTES: SUB indicates the size of the subsystem task.
o MGT indicates the size of the data management task for the subsystem if
one is required. LINK indicates the size of the communication link task for
the subsystem if one is required. If the link task is SOLC, the value displayed is the sum of the link task size plus line buffer size.
This field contains the amount of common queue space currently available.
This is the sum of all the free areas. This field may be blank if no subsystem
is fully enabled.

o
•

•

QUEUE SPACE indicates the status of the subsystem task's queue space.
ALLOC indicates the amount of subsystem queue space allocated to the subsystem task. AVAI L indicates the actual amount of subsystem queue space
currently available and is the'sum of all the free areas in the queue space for
the subsystem task.
SUBCONSOLE indicates that the STATUS SUBSYS command was issued
from subconsole mode, and subconsole commands are valid with the I option.
This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if F were pressed.

Subconsole Operation

3-15

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE SSP-ICF SUBSYSTEM SESSIONS

Command Format

STATUS SUBSESS
(D)

(N)

Parameters

SUBSESS: Displays status information about the SSP-ICF
subsystem sessions.

Example

You enter:
STATUS SUBSESS or

The following display appears:

SP-ICF SE>SION STATUS

CONFIG
NAME

LOCATION
NAME

INTRA

BSCELP2

"'--~-ENTER

BSCELP2

•I

COMPLE E

TYPE

INV
STAT

A
A
E
E
A

N
N
E
I
N

PHYS/SYM
07
08
11
12
09

71
81
11
12
IJ

SUB CONSOL :

OPERATION STATUS
MRTMAX OM OC ST
N
N
N
Y
N

0
0

20
20
20

01
00
20

0
0

JOB
NAME
W1024536
WI024536
11030153
12000000
WI024536

F-FORWARO, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO.............

3-16

•
o

COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
This field describes the session type. A indicates this session is an acquired
session. E indicates this session is an evoked session. * indicates a noncommunicating peer station.
INVSTAT:
E

Program has requested data from the session.
SSP has marked the session complete to satisfy an accept input
issued by the program owning the session.

Program does not want data from the session.

Program has requested data from the session and the data is now
available.

The following four fields indicate the operation status of the session:
MRTMAX

If this session is attached to an MRT and the session is waiting because the maximum number of requestors has been
reached, this field will have a Y displayed. Otherwise, an N
will appear.

The following three fields are primarily for diagnostic purposes. They
indicate the state of the SSP-ICF sessions when the STATUS SUBSESS
command was entered.

This is the current operation command modifier.

This is the current operation command code.

This is a 2-character field. The first character is either an A (operation active), 0 (operation complete), or I (operation in an initial
status). The second character is either blank or an asterisk (*). If
this character is an asterisk, the program is currently waiting for this
session to complete.

SUBCONSOLE indicates mat the STATUS SUBSESS command was issued
from subconsole mode, and subconsole commands are valid with the I option.

•

JOBNAME contains the job name assigned to the process to which the
session is attached.

•

This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if F were pressed.

Subconsole Operation

3-17

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE INPUT JOB QUEUE

The job queue status display shows all entries from the requesting display station
on the input job queue.
Command Format

STATUS JOBO [,jobnameJ
(D)

(J)

J08Q: Displays one or all entries on the input job queue.

Parameters

jobname: The 8-character, system-assigned name of the job

for which status information is displayed. If jobname is
omitted, the display shows the status of all jobs on the input
job queue for the requesting display station.
Example

STATUS JOBO or

The following display appears:

••••

.0.

AGd~-=~---::J=7-I--4'SUB
,.,
JOBS QUE~~~PEO/ I ~PLETE*;I J' \ CLOLE
IN

POS

JOB

1 WI081521
2 WI081805
3 WI091214

3-18

3 OF

PROCEDURE

PAYROLL
ACCTREC
ACCTPAY

20
JQ PRTY

EXEC PRTY

USER

LIBRARY

N
H

HHL
HHL
HHL

PAYLIB
LEDGER
LEDGER

--ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••..••••••.• F

The relative position of the job in the queue.

JOB lists the jobname assigned to this job.

•

The number of jobs currently in the queue out of the maximum that can be
in the queue.

•

STOPPED appears if the JOBQ has not been started.

•

PROCEDURE lists the procedure name of this job.

e
o

JO PRTY indicates a job's position on the input job queue. Jobs with a job
queue priority of 5 are the first to be taken from the queue for execution.
COMPLETE appears only if the entries shown on the screen are the last entries
for this display station
EXEC PRTY indicates a job's execution priority. Jobs with high priority
are run with the least number of interruptions.
H: High execution priority
M: Medium execution priority
N: Normal execution priority
L: Low execution priority

USER lists the user 10 of the submitter .

•

LIBRARY lists the optional user library the procedure is to come from.

e
o

SUBCONSOLE indicates that the STATUS JOBO command was issued from
subconsole mode and subconsole commands are valid with the I oPtion.
This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if F were pressed.

Subconsole Operation

3-19

HOW TO CANCEL JOBS ON THE INPUT JOB QUEUE

The CANCEL control command cancels a job on the input job queue that you previously entered via the JOBO control command. The CANCEL command must
come from the same display station and the same user-id that were used to place
the job on the input job queue.
Command Format

CANCE L JOBO, jobname
(C)
(J)

Parameters

JOBQ: Cancels a job on the input job queue.
jobname: The 8-character, system-assigned name of the
job that you want to cancel. To cancel job W1001111 on
the input job queue, enter:
CANCEL JOBO,W1001111 or

C J,W1001111
To see what your job name is, use the STATUS JOBO
command.

3-20

HOW TO DISPLAY SPOOL FILE ENTRIES

The Spooled Print Status display shows entries for printers controlled by your subconsole display station that are in the spool file.
Command Format

STATUS PRT ['ws-id]
(D)

(P)

PRT: Displays entries on the spool file. Refer to Figure 3-1
for an explanation of the display that appears.

Parameters

ws-id: Displays only the entries to be printed on the printer
with the specified work station 10. If you do not enter this
parameter, all entries are displayed.
Example

STATUS PRT or

D P

Get

PRINT STATUS
**HELD**
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PROC
JOBNAHE USER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

SPOOOO
SPOOOI
SPOO02
SPOO06
SPOOO7
SPOO08
SPOO09
SPOOIO
SPOOl!

PROC2
PROC2
PROC2
PROC2
PROC2
PROCI
PROCI
PROCI

W2140104
W2140104
W2140104
W2140104
W2140104
W2140200
W2140200
W2140200
W2140436

JEN
JEN
JEN

12 SPOO14

PROCI

W2140456

JEN

JEt~

JEN
JEN
JEN
JEN
JEN

BCOHSOLE

115
10 PRTY FORM COpy
PLINEI
PLINE2
PLINE3
PLINE7

P2 A2
P2 2H
P2 1
P2 Cl
PLIt~E8
P2 1
PLINEI
P2 1
PLINE2
P2 1
PLINE3
P2 1
PRINTKEY P2 1
P4 1
P4 1
PLINEI
P2 1

0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001

--PAGES- TOTAL
WRT

1
3
1 *****3
1
3
3
1
3
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
1
2
4
1
256
3
1
10

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••••••••••••

•
~.
2
5

Figure 3-1. Spooled Print Status Display

Subconsole Operation

3-21

e
CD
G

e
o

o
•

o
G
G
•

POS: the relative position of the entry in the spool file.
10: the name assigned by the system to this job step's spooled data. This is
the spool 10 used with the spool commands. Only the spool lOs that pertain
to your subconsole will be displayed. The blanks at lines 10 and 11 indicate
that this subconsole does not control those spool lOs.

PROC: the outermost procedure name associated with this entry. If this
entry is blank, the job was run through OCL (/ / LOAO) or this entry does not
pertain to your subconsole display station.
BLOCKS AVAILABLE: the number of blocks available in the spool file or
the extents that can still be allocated on disk out of the total number that can
be allocated if space is available. The spool file is full when the first number
is zero.
JOBNAME: the job name assigned by the system (work station 10 and time).
HELO: indicates that the entire spool file is being held. No jobs can be
printed until the spool file is released by the RELEASE PRT command. Jobs
can still be written to the spool file.
USER: the user 10 associated with this job. The user 10 will appear only if
the entry is controlled by your subconsole.
COMPLETE: appears only if this is the last screen of the Spooled Print Status
display.
PRINTER: the printer file name associated with this job.
10: the 10 of the printer that output is to be routed to.

PRTY: the priority assigned to this job from the printer statement. An A
indicates that the spool writer is currently printing this entry. A C
indicates that the spool file entry is being copied by the user access to spool
(COPYPRT) procedure. An H indicates that the spool file entry is held.
FORM: the form number assigned to this job.
COPY: the number of copies remaining to be printed; default is 1 unless
changed on a PRINTER statement or by the CHANGE command. If the job
is being printed, this value includes the copy being printed.
TOTAL: the total number of pages of output generated. If the number is
preceded by one or more asterisks, the print entry is still being created and
the number indicates which page is being created. If the page count is zero
and there are no asterisks displayed with the zero, the system failed before
the spool file entry was completed.
WRT: the page number that is being printed. If a spool file entry is being
printed by the spool writer, this column indicates the page number that
is being printed. If the spool writer is stopped while printing a spool file entry,
this column indicates the pa~enumberthat was being printed by thespoot
writer when it was stopped.
This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if J: were entered.

3-22

HOW TO START A SPOOL WRITER

{,AL~}

Command Format

START PRT, [torms number]
(S)
(P)

Parameters

PRT: Starts the spool writers for the printers controlled by
your subconsole display station. The PRT parameter can
be used to start the spool writer(s) after IPL. (If the autowriter function is active, the spool writers are automatically
started during IPL and you need not enter a START PRT
command.) The PRT parameter can also be used to start
the spool writer(s) after the STOP PRT command has been
entered to stop the spool writer(s); when a spool writer is
started, printing begins with the first available entry on
the spool file.

,ws-Id

forms number: Only entries using the specified forms

number are printed. Up to four characters can be specified.
If a forms number is not specified, all entries can be printed
regardless of the forms number that is required.
ws-id: The work station ID of the printer for which the
spool writer is to be started. This work station ID must be
a printer controlled by your subconsole display station.
If you omit this parameter, the spool writer for the printer
assigned as the system printer will be started, if the system
printer is controlled by your subconsole display station.

ALL: Starts spool writers for all printers that are controlled
by your subconsole display station.

Note: When a spool writer is started, printing normally begins
with the first available spool file entry. However, printing
may not begin for one of the following reasons:
• The entire spool file has been held by the system operator.
• The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The spool file is empty or does not contain any entries
that are available for printing on the specified printer.
Spool file entries may not be available for printing if
they are held, being copied by the COPYPRT procedure,
still being created, or if they require different forms than
the spool writer is using (if the spool writer was started
with a forms number specified).
• There are insufficient system resources available to
allow the spool writer to begin printing.
• The printer is being used by another program, is offline,
is not powered on, or requires some other operator
intervention, such as correcting a paper jam. In any of
these cases, the spool writer attempts to begi n pri nti ng
and issues a message when the condition is detected.
Subconsole Operation

3-23

HOW TO STOP A SPOOL WRITER

Command Format

Parameters

PAGE
STOP PRT,
]
(P)
(P) lJOB

{,AL.L}
,ws-Id

PRT: Stops the spool writers for the printers controlled by
your subconsole display station. If an entry is being printed,
printing stops. You can restart the printing by entering the
START PRT control command or the RESTART PRT
control command. You can stop the spool writers for only
the printer(s) controlled by your subconsole display station.
Entries can be added to the spool file when the writer is
stopped, but the entries cannot be printed until the spool
writer is started or restartea.
PAGE: Stops the spool writer at the end of the current

page.
JOB: Stops the spool writer at the end of the spool fi Ie

entry currently being printed.
ALL: The spool writers are stopped for all the printers
that are controlled by the subconsole display station.

ws-id: The work station 10 of the printer for which the
spool writer is to be stopped. You can only enter the 10
of a printer controlled by your subconsole. If you omit
this parameter, the spool writer for the printer assigned as
the system printer will be stopped if your subconsole
display station controls the system printer.

3-24

HOW TO RESTART A SPOOL WRITER

Command Format

RESTART PRT, [page number] {,ws-id}
(T)

(P)

Note: Use this control command either to resume printing by restarting the spool
writer after it was stopped, or to restart the printing of a spool file entry that is
currently being printed by the spool writer.
Parameters

PRT: Restarts the spool writer for the specified printer if
the printer is controlled by your subconsole display station.
page number: The number of the page where printing is to

be restarted. If the page number is not specified, printing
restarts at the beginning of the printed output. The maximum page number you can specify is 65,535.

ws-id: The work station 10 of the printer for which the
spool writer is to be restarted. This work station 10 must
be for a printer that is controlled by your subconsole
display station. If you omit this parameter, the spool
writer is restarted for the printer assigned as the system
printer if your subconsole display station controls the
system printer.
Note: If a RESTART command is entered and the spool
writer is not printing a spool file entry and no entries
on the spool file were being printed when the writer was
stopped, the first entry on the spool file that you have
control of will be printed starting from page 1 even if a
page number was specified.
Example

Example A

To restart printing of the current entry on the spool file
at the top of page 6, on printer P2, enter:
RESTART PRT,6,P2 or
T P,6,P2
Example 8

The entry currently being printed contains-300pages of
printed output on printer P2. Only the last 50 pages of
output are required. Once the job has begun printing, the
operator can use the following command to print the last
50 pages:
RESTART PRT,251,P2 or
T P,251,P2

Subconsole Operation

3-25

HOW TO DISPLAY THE SPOOL WRITER STATUS
The Spool Writer Status display shows the status of the spool writer for each
printer.
Command Format

STATUS WRT Gws-id]
(D)

WRT: Displays the status of the spool writer for each

Parameters

printer. Refer to Figure 3-2 for an explanation of the
display that appears.

ws-id: The work station ID of the printer for which the
spool writer status information is to be displayed. If you
do not specify a printer ID the spool writer status information for all printers is displayed.
Example

STATUS WRT or
D

WRT

••
"
~IT:ts

CTRL
CNSL

PI
P2
P3
P4

WI
WI
Xl
WI

PIH

MSG
N
N

N
N

ACTIVE
STARTED
STOPPED
STARTED
STARTED

------RES
N
y

N
Y

FORMS

0
1
1

0001
0001
0001
0001

SPOOL
10

PROC
NAME

SPOO03

CATALOG

-------

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •.•••.••••... F

Figure 3-2. Spool Writer Status DispJay

3-26

•

W771

PRTY
N
N
N
N

G
G

e
e

PRT 10: the work station 10 of the printer.
CTRL CNSL: the work station 10 of the display station that controls the
printer. If the printer is currently controlled by a subconsole, the work
station 10 of the subconsole is displayed; if the printer is not currently
controlled by a subconsole, the system console work station 10 is displayed.
MSG: Y specifies that a spool writer message is pending. N specifies that
no spool writer messages are pending.
ACTIVE: indicates one of the following for the status of the spool writer:
• STARTED: indicates the spool writer is started.
• STARTED forms number: indicates the spool writer is started and will
print only the jobs that require the forms number that was specified with
the START PRT command.
•

RESTARTED: indicates that the subconsole operator or the system
operator has entered the RESTART command and that the spool writer
has been restarted.

• STOPPED: indicates that the spool writer is stopped.
• STOP PAGE: indicates that the spool writer is stopped when·it finishes
printing the current page because the STOP PRT command was entered
with the PAGE parameter.
• STOP JOB: indicates that the spool writer is stopped when it finishes
printing the current job because the STOP PRT command was entered
with the JOB parameter.
• STOP SYSTEM: indicates that the spool writer is started but that the
system operator has entered a STOP SYSTEM command; therefore, the
spool writer cannot perform any printing until the system operator enters
a START SYSTEM command.
•

o
CD

QUEUE HELD: indicates that the spool writer is started but that the
system operator has entered the HOLD PRT command; therefore, the
spool queue is held and the spool writer cannot perform any printing until
the system operator enters a RELEASE PRT command.

RES: Y specifies that the spool writer is resident. N specifies that the spool
writer is swappable.
PRTY: indicates the priority assigned to this spool writer: H indicates a
high priority and N indicates a normal priority.
SEP PAGES: indicates the number of separator pages that are printed preceding each spool file entry.
FORMS: indicates the forms number that the spool writer is currently
using for printing.

Subconsole Operation

3-27

o
•

SPOOL ID: is the 6-character system-assigned name of the entry on the
spool file that the spool writer is currently printing.
PROC NAME: is the name of the procedure that created the spool file
entry that the spool writer is currently printing.

Notes:
1. The spool-id and the procedure name are both blank if the spool writer
is not printing a spool file entry.
2. The spool-id and the procedure name are both displayed for printers
you control if the spool writer is currently printing an entry from the
spool file.
-So ~tdashes} aredisplayedinstead--of-the spool-id and the procedure
name for printers you do not control if the spool writer is currently
printing an entry from the spool file.

3-28

HOW TO CANCEL SPOOL FILE ENTRIES

~SPOOI-id}

Command Format

Parameters

CANCEL PRT
(C)
(P) {

~ALL

~ws-id

PRT: Cancels the specified entry (spool-id) or all spool file
entries for all printers or for a specific printer controlled
by your subconsole display station.
spool-id: Deletes the entry identified by the 6-character
spool file 10, beginning with the characters SP. You can
use the STATUS PRT control command to determine the
spool file 10 of the entry to be canceled. This entry must
be destined for a printer controlled by your subconsole
display station.

ALL: Deletes all entries controlled by your subconsole
display station from the spool file, except any entries
being copied by the COPYPRT procedure or any entries
that are still being created.
ws-id: Deletes all entries from the spool file for the specified printer that is controlled by your subconsole display
station, except any entries being copied by the COPYPRT
procedure, or any entries that are still being created.

Note: When ALL or a printed 10 is specified, the system
indicates the CANCEL command is successful, even though
there may not have been any spool file entries cancelled
by the command.
Example

To cancel all entries controlled by your subconsole display station on the spool file, enter:
CANCEL PRT,ALL or
C P,ALL

Subconsole Operation

3-29

HOW TO HOLD SPOOL FILE ENTRIES
Command Format

HOLD PRT {,.SPO.OI-id}
(H)
(P)
,ws-Id

Parameters

PRT: Holds the specified entry (spool-id) or all spool file
entries for a specified printer controlled by your subconsole display station. The spool-id parameter or ws-id
parameter must be specified.

spool-id: The 6-character spool file 10, beginning with the
characters SP, of the entry to hold. You can use the STATUS
PRT control command to determine the spool file 10 of
the entry to be held.

ws-id: All entries for the specified work station 10 are held.
The specified printer must be controlled by your subconsole
display station.
Notes:
1. You can enter the HO LD command before the program
creating the spool file entry has terminated.
2. If you specify a HOLD command for an entry while it
is printing, the spool writer no longer prints that entry
but begins printing the next entry on the spool file. The
held entry will not be printed until a RELEASE control
command is entered for the held entry.
3. If you specify a HOLD command for all spool file
entries destined for a printer you control while the spool
writer is printing an entry on that printer, the spool
writer will no longer print that entry nor any other
entry in the spool file. As new entries are added to the
'i' spool file they may be printed, but entries that were
in the spool file when the HOLD command was entered
cannot be printed until they are released by the
RELEASE command.
Example

To hold entry SP0036 on the spool file, enter:
HOLD PRT,SP0036 or
H P,SP0036
Entry SP0036 will stop printing.

3-30

HOW TO RELEASE SPOOL FILE ENTRIES

Command Format

Parameters

,SPOOI-id}
RELEASE PRT ,AllH
(l)
(P) { ,ws-id

PRT: Indicates that a specified entry or all entries on the
spool file for all printers or for a specific printer controlled
by your subconsole display station should be released. The
RELEASE command releases the spool file entry that is
held and makes it available for printing.

spool-id: The 6-character spool file 10, beginning with the
characters SP, of the entry to release. You can use the
STATUS PRT control command to determine the spool
file 10 of the entry to be released. The entry must be for
a printer controlled by your subconsole display station.
ALLH: Releases all entries controlled by this subconsole
that were either individually held or put in the spool file
with a PRINTER OCl statement that specified
PRIORITY-D. The AllH parameter does not release the
entire spool file if it was held by the system operator. Use
the STATUS PRT command to determine if the spool
file has been held.

ws-id: All entries for the specified printer are released.
The printer must be controlled by your subconsole
display station.
Note: When a spool file entry is released, the spool writer
normally begins printing the entry if the spool writer is
not already printing another spool file entry. However,
printing may not begin for one of the following reasons:
• The spool writer has been stopped by the subconsole
or system operator.
• The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The entire spool file has been held by the system operator.
Use the STATUS PRT command to determine if the
spool file has been held.
• The spool file entry is not available for printing because
the entry is still being created, is being copied by the
COPYPRT procedure, or requires different forms than
the spool writer is using (if the spool writer was started
with a forms number specified).

Subconsole Operation

3-31

• There are insufficient system resources to allow the
spool writer to begin printing .
• The printer is offline, is not powered on, or requires some
other kind of operator intervention, such as correcting
a paper jam. The spool writer attempts to start printing
and issues a message when any of these conditions are
detected.
Example

To release entry SP0036 on the spool file, enter:
RELEASE PRT,SP0036 or
L P,SP0036

3-32

HOW TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF PRINTED COPIES OF SPOOL FILE ENTRIES

Command Format

CHANGE COPIES,nn,spool-id
(G)

Parameters

COPIES: Changes the number of copies of printed output

for an entry on the spool file. You can use the STATUS PRT
control command to determine the number of copies remaining to be printed for all entries in the spool file. You can
change the number of copies only for those entries for a
printer controlled by your subconsole display station.

nn: The number of copies to print for the entry. This
parameter can be from 1 through 99.

spooUd: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the entry
on the spool file, which begins with SP. You can use the
STATUS PRT control command to determine the spool
file 10 of the entry for which the number of copies is to
be changed.
Example

To change entry SP0011 on the spool file to print five copies
of output, enter:
CHANGE COPIES,5,SP0011 or
G COPIES,5,SP0011

Subconsole Operation

3-33

HOW TO CHANGE THE DEFER STATUS OF A SPOOL FILE ENTRY

Command Format

CHANGE DEFER,

(G)
Parameters

[~~S] ,spool-id
---

DEFER: Indicates whether the spool file entry can be

printed while it is being created or only after it has been
created.
YES: Indicates that the spool file entry is to be printed
only after it has been created.
NO: Indicates that the spool file entry can be printed
while it is being created. NO is the default.

3-34

spool-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the
entry on the spool file, which begins with SP. You can use
the STATUS PRT control command to determine the spool
file 10 of the entry for which the defer status is to be
changed.
Notes:
1. As a subconsole operator, you can change the defer status
for only those spool file entries that will be printed on
the printers controlled by your subconsole display station.
2. When the defer status of a spool file entry that is still
being created is changed to NO, the spool writer normally
begins printing the entry if the spool writer is not already
printing another spool file entry. However, printing may
not begin for one of the following reasons:

• The spool writer has been stopped by the subconsole
or system operator.
• The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The entire spool file has been held by the system
operator.
• The spool file entry is not available for printing
because the entry is held, is being copied by the
COPYPRT procedure, or requires a different form
than the spool writer is using (if the spool writer
was started with a forms number specified).
• There are insufficient system resources available to
allow the spool writer to begin printing.
• The printer is being used by another program, is
offline, is not powered on, or requires some other
operator intervention, such as correcting a paper
jam. In any of these cases, the spool writer
attempts to begin printing and issues a message
when the condition is detected.
3. If you change the defer status to YES for an entry that
is being both created and printed, the spool writer will
no longer print that entry, but begins printing the next
entry in the spool file. The entry for which the defer
status was changed can be printed after it has been
created, or if the defer status is changed back to NO.
Example

To print entry SP0023 while it is being created, enter:
CHANGE DEFER,NO,SP0023 or
G DEFER"SP0023

Subconsole Operation

3-35

HOW TO CHANGE THE FORMS NUMBER OF SPOOL FILE ENTRIES

Command Format

CHANGE FORMS,xxxx,spool-id
(G)

Parameters

FORMS: Changes the forms number to be used for an e':ltry
on the spool file. The entry must be to a printer controlled
by your subconsole display station.

xxxx: The forms number of the forms to be used for the
entry. You can specify from 1 to 4 characters.

3-36

spool-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the
entry on the spool file. You can use the STATUS PRT
control command to determine the spool file 10 of the
entry on the spool file and to determine the forms
number for the entry.
Notes:
1. As a subconsole operator, you can change the forms
number for only those spool file entries that will be
printed on the printers controlled by your subconsole display station.
2. An error message is issued if you attempt to change
the forms for an entry that is being printed by the
spool writer.
3. If the spool writer was started with a specified forms
number so that only the spool file entries that required
the specified forms are printed, and if the CHANGE
command is used to change the forms number required
by a spool file entry to the forms number that the spool
writer is printing, then the spool writer normally begins
printing the spool file entry if the spool writer is not
already printing another spool file entry. However,
printing may not begin for one of the following
reasons:

To change the forms number of entry SP0011 to PT1, enter:
CHANGE FORMS,PT1 ,SP0011 or
G FORMS,PT1,SP0011

Subconsole Operation

3-37

HOW TO CHANGE THE PRINTER 10

Command Format

CHANGE 10,ws-id
(G)

Parameters

{'SPO~dI1-id}
,WS-I

ID: Changes the printer 10 for a spool file entry or for all
spool file entries that are to be printed on a specified
printer.
ws-id: This is the 10 of the newly assigned printer. This
work station 10 need not be controlled by the subconsole
operator.
spool-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the
entry on the spool file. Only entries for a printer controlled
by your subconsole display station can be changed. You
can use the STATUS PRT control command to determine
the spool file 10 of the entry to be changed.
ws-id1: This is the work station 10 of a printer. This
printer must be controlled by your subconsole display
station. All spool file entries that are to be printed on
this printer will be changed to be printed on the printer
indicated by ws-id, except any print file that is
currently being printed by the spool writer.

3-38

Notes:

1. If ws-id1 is specified in this command, the system indicates that the change was successful even though there
were no spool file entries to be changed.
2. If ws-id1 is specified, the command applies only to the
spool file entries that were in the spool file when the
command was entered. Spool file entries added afterward are not affected by the command.
3. If a spool-id is specified, an error message is issued if
the specified spool file entry is being printed by the
spool writer.
4. When the printer destination of a spool file entry is
changed, the spool writer normally begins printing
the entry if the spool writer is not already printing
another spool file entry. However, printing may not
begin for one of the following reasons:
• The spool writer has been stopped by the subconsole
or system operator.
• The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The entire spool file has been held by the system
operator.
• The spool file entry is not available for printing because
it is held, is still being created, is being copied by the
COPYPRT procedure, or requires different forms than
the spool writer is using (if the spool writer was started
with a forms number spet:ified).

Example

•

There are insufficient system resources available to
allow the spool writer to begin printing.

•

The printer is being used by another program, is
offline, is not powered on, or requires some other
operator intervention, such as correcting a paper jam.
In any of these cases, the spool writer attempts to
begin printing and issues a message when the condition is detected.

To change all spool file entries with an 10 of P2 to a
printer with a work station 10 of P1, enter:
CHANGE 10,P1,P2, or
G 10,P1,P2
To change the entry SP0035 to have a printer with a work
station 10 6f P2, enter:
CHANGE 10,P2,SP0035
G 10,P2,SP0035

Subconsole Operation

3-39

HOW TO CHANGE THE ORDER OF SPOOL FILE ENTRIES

Command Format

CHANGE PRT ,spool-id [,spool-id1]
(G)

Parameters

(P)

PRT: Changes the position of an entry in the spool file.
spool-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the
entry on the spool file. The entry being changed (spool-id)
is placed after the entry with spool-id 1 and is assigned the
same priority as the entry with spool-id1. If you do not
specify spool-id1, the spool-id is the first entry in the
spool file and has a priority of 5.
Note: You can only change the position of spool file entries
(spool-id) that are for a printer controlled by your subconsole display station. You do not have to control the spool
file entries (spool-id1) to change the position of the spool-id.

Example

To move entry SP0036 ahead of all entries on the spool
file, enter:
CHANGE PRT,SP0036 or
G P,SP0036

3-40

HOW TO CHANGE THE PRIORITY OF A SPOOL WRITER

Command Format

Parameters

PRTY: Changes the priority of a spool writer. Use the
ST ATUS WRT command to determine the priority of a
spool writer.

HIGH: The spool writer is to have high priority.
NORMAL: The spool writer is to have normal priority.
NORMAL is the default value if a priority is not
specified.

ws-id: The 1D of the printer for which the spool writer
priority is to be changed. The 1D specified must be for a
printer controlled by your subconsole display station. If
a printer ID is not specified, the ID of the system printer
is assumed if your subconsole display station controls the
system printer.
Example

To assign high priority to the spool writer for printer P2,
enter:
CHANGE PRTY,HIGH,P2 or
G PRTY,HIGH,P2

Subconsole Operation

3-41

HOW TO CHANGE THE RESIDENT/SWAPPABLE ATTRIBUTE OF A SPOOL WRITER

Command Format

CHANGE
(G)

Parameters

RES,[~~S]

['ws-id]

RES: Changes the resident/swappable attribute of a
spool writer. Use the STATUS WRT command to
determine the status of the resident/swappable attribute.
YES: The writer is to be resident when loaded into
main storage.

NO: The writer can be swapped when loaded into
main storage. NO is the default value.

ws-id: The 10 of the printer for which the resident/
swappable attribute of the spool writer is to be changed.
The 10 specified must be for a printer controlled by your
subconsole display station. If a printer lOis not specified,
the 10 of the system printer is assumed if your subconsole
display station controls the system printer.
Note: This command cannot be entered while the spool
writer is in main storage. To ensure that the spool writer
is not in main storage, use the STOP command to stop
the spool writer.
Example

To make the spool writer for printer P2 swappable, enter:
CHANGE RES,NO,P2 or
G RES"P2

3-42

HOW TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF SEPARATOR PAGES PRINTED
BY A SPOOL WRITER

Command Format

CHANGE SEP,

(G)
Parameters

[!l~ [,w~idJ

SEP: Changes the number of separator pages printed by

the spool writer before each spool file entry. Use the
STATUS WRT command to determine the number of
separator pages that are printed.

0,1,2,3: The number of separator pages to be printed by
the spool writer before each spool fi Ie entry. The defau It
value is 0 if a number is not specified.

ws-id: The 10 of the printer for which the number of
separator pages printed by the spool writer is to be
changed. The 10 specified must be for a pri nter controlled by your subconsole display station. If a printer
10 is not specified, the 10 of the system printer is
assumed if your subconsole display station controls
the system printer.
Example

To have no separator pages printed on printer P2 by
the spool writer, enter:
CHANGE SEP,O,P2 or
G SEP"P2

Subconsole Operation

3-43

HOW TO REPLY TO A MESSAGE

You must use the REPLY control command to reply to all messages that have reply
IDs. After you have responded to a message, the screen shows two asterisks (**),
replacing the reply 10. Messages that you have replied to roll up and off the top of
the display. Messages that you have not replied to do not roll off the display until
you reply.

Command Format

I
}
REPLY C
{ msg-id [,response]
(R)

Parameters

I: Responds to all informati~nal messages on the display.
(You must enter either R or REPLY and I.)

Compresses a display so that only messages that need
responses are displayed. (You must enter R or REPLY
and C.)

msg-id: The 10 of the message that you are responding to.

You can omit the left zero of a reply 10; R 01,3 and R 1,3
are equivalent responses. The command name (R EPL Y or
R) is not required when msg-id is used.

response: Your response to the message (blank, 0, 1,2,
or 3).
Example

To respond with a 3 option to message 02, enter:
REPLY 2,3 or

R 2,3 or
2,3 (For the REPLY control command, you can enter
_only the message 10 and option.)

For those messages that are classified as printer intervention required, the REPLY
control command has no effect. You should ready the printer to reply to the
message.

3-44

HOW TO SEND A MESSAGE

When used as a subconsole control command, the MSG command sends a message
to the system console or to a selected display station or display station operator.
Command Format

WS-id ]
MSG [
'd
user-I

,message text

Note: If the first parameter is not entered but the second
one is, the message is sent to the system console.
Parameters

ws-id: The 2-character work station 10 of the display station
to which the message is sent. The STATUS WORKSTN control command can be used to determine the work station
IDs. If you specify the work station ID of the system
console, the message is sent to the Commandd_isplay at the
system console. If you do not enter the first parameter,
and you enter a message text, the message is sent to the
Console display at the system console.

user-id: The'- to 8-character user 10 that identifies the
operator to whom the message is sent. Each display station
operator enters a user lOon the Sign On display when the
session is started. The STATUS WORKSTN control command can be used to determine user IDs. If you specify the
system operator's user 10, the message is sent to the
Command display at the system console. If you do not
enter the first parameter, the message is sent to the Console
display at the system console.

message text: Up to 60 alphameric characters.
Example

A subconsole operator wishes to give the system operator
control of the printers that the subconsole operator
currently controls. To inform the system operator of this,
the subconsole operator enters:
MSG ,PLEASE TAKE CONTROL OF PRINTER P3

Subconsole Operation

3-45

HOW TO DISPLAY THE TIME

The TIME control command displays the time of day and the system date.
Command Format

TIME

Example

TIME-14:56:23

DATE 07/19/80

HOW TO SIGN OFF A SUBCONSOLE

To sign off a subconsole, you must place your display station in command mode.
Press the Shift key and the Sys Req key. Then press the Enter /Rec Adv key.
When you get a Command screen, you may enter the 0 F F command. See
Chapter 2 for additional information.

3-46

Chapter 4. System Console Operation

The system console is the display station that monitors and controls the system.
As system console operator, you are responsible for operating the systems, which
includes tasks such as:
•

Inserting correct diskettes in the diskette unit

• Operating the system unit operator panel
• Using the CE panel on the side of the system unit when necessary
• Operating the system printer (see the 5211 Operator's Guide, the 3262 Component Description and Operator's Guide, the 5256 Operator's Guide, the
5224 Printer Operator's Guide, or the 5225 Printer Operator's Guide for
information on how to operate the printer)
These tasks are discussed early in this chapter. In addition, the system console
operator controls:
• Jobs
•

Input job queue

•

Print spooling

• Starting and ending system operation

System Console Operation

4-1

SYSTEM CONSOLE OPERATOR CONTROL COMMANDS

The control commands that you will use to perform these and other functions are
listed below with the page numbers on which they are discussed.
ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56

PRTY jobname . . . . . . . . . . . . '- , .4-74

tAl
RELEASE PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87
CANCEL jobname . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73

(L)

(P)

(C)

REPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63
CANCEL JOBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
(C)

(R)

(J)

RESTART PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-81
CANCEL PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85
(C)

(T)

(P)

START JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
CHANGE COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89

(S)

(G)

START JOBO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
CHANGE DEFER .............4-90

(S)

(J)

(G)

START PRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79
CHANGE FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92

(S)

(P)

(G)

START SESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
CHANGE ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-94

(S)

(N)

(G)

START SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
CHANGE JOBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116

(S)

(J)

(G)

START WORKSTN ........... .4-72
CHANGE PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-96
(G)

(S)

(W)

(P)

STATUS JOBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
CHANGE PRTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-97

(D)

(J)

(G)

STATUS MESSAGE .......... .4-53
CHANGE RES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98

(D)

(G)

STATUS PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76
CHANGE SEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99

(D)

(P)

(G)

STATUS REMOTES . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37

(D)

HOLD PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86

STATUS SUBSESS ........... .4-51

(H)

(D)

(P)

IDELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64
MSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62

4-2

(R)

(N)

STATUS SUBSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
(0)
(I)

STOP P RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80
(P)
(P)

STATUS SYSTASK . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
(0)
(T)

STOP SESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
(P)
(N)

STATUS USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67
(0)
(U)

STOP SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65

STATUS WORKSTN . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
(0)
(W)

STOP WORKSTN . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70

STATUS WRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82
(0)
(WRT)

TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65

STOP JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70

(P)

(S)

(W)

VARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55
(V)

(P)
STOP JOBQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
(P)
(J)

System Console Operation

4-3

OPERATOR PANEL

,
""

"",

" , ,,

,,
,

Diskette
Door

4-4

The operator panel, on the front of the system unit, contains:
•

IPO (Immediate Power Off) Switch: The IPO (Immediate Power Off) switch
on the left side of the 5340 system unit should be used only to turn the 5340
System Unit off in an emergency. This switch must remain set to the 1 (on)
position during normal system operation. Set this switch to the 0 (off) position to remove system power in an emergency.
Power Check Light: The Power Check light comes on and the system turns
off when a voltage problem or current problem occurs. Refer to Chapter 1 €?,
Pro,?lem Determination, for suggested ways to resume operating after a
power check.
Thermal Check Light: The Thermal Check light comes on and the system
turns off when the system overheats. To power on the system, set the Power
switch
to the 0 position, wait for the system to cool, and then set the
Power switch to the 1 position. Before restarting the system, try to find the
cause of the thermal check. Refer to Chapter 16, Problem Determination, for
suggestions.

Processor Check Light: The Processor Check light comes on when the processing unit detects an error that the system cannot correct. Refer to Chapter 16,
Problem Determination, for suggested ways to resume operating after a processor
check.
Console Check Light: The Console Check light comes on for a system console
or work station controller feature when certain errors are detected. The Console
Check light goes off when the error is corrected. Refer to Chapter 16, Problem
Determination, for the types of errors and suggested ways to resume operating
after a console check.

o
CD

System In Use Light: The System In Use light comes on when programs are
executing. When this Iight is on, you should not press the Load switch or
power off the system.
Load Switch/light: Press the Load switch to start the system. The Load
light comes on while the system starts IPL. This light goes out when the disk
comes up to speed.
Power Switch: Set the Power switch to the 1 (on) position to power on the
system. After a few seconds, the Power light comes on. Set the Power switch
to the 0 (off) position to power off the system.

Note: The main line circuit breaker (located behind the front cover) and the
IPO switch" must both be on.

Power Light: The Power light is on when the system power is on. This light
is off when the system power is off.

System Console Operation

4-5

CE PANEL

The CE panel, behind the door on the side of the system unit, is intended primarily
for use by customer engineers.
To remove the CE panel cover:
1.

Open the door.

Support the weight of the door with your left hand and remove the two thumbscrews that fasten the door to the syste-m frame.

Use both hands to remove the door from the frame.

During normal operation:
"

These switches should be down. To run the SETDUMP command, the
Add Comp (Address Compare) switch should be in the Stop position.

CD The Address/Data switches must be set to 0000.

4-6

The Mode Selector switch must be set to the Proc Run position.

INSN STEP/
• DPL Y LSR
• ALTER STaR

•~~VR

•

MAR

• DPLY STaR
.INSN STEP
DPL Y CHKS
·INSN STEP
DPL Y PCR

Lsys INSN SHP
MODE SE LECTOR

CESTART

CSIPL

STOR SEL ADD CaMP

~i~

System-E:-onsole Operation

4-7

DISKETTE HANDLING
•

Do not use damaged diskettes. They will cause errors.

•

Put the diskette in its envelope when you are not using it or when you are
writing on its label.

•

Always handle the diskette by its label area to avoid touching the recording
surface.

•

Never write on a diskette with an erasable pencil. IBM recommends using fiber-tip
pens for labeling diskettes.

•

Do not use paper clips.

•

Do not touch or clean the recording surface.

•

Keep the diskette away from magnets. Any diskette exposed to a magnetic field
may lose information.

•

Do not expose the diskette to excessive heat or sunl ight.

•

Do not place heavy objects on the diskette.

•

If mailing diskettes, place them in a box or heavy cardboard mailer.

In short, HANDLE WITH CARE.

HOW TO INSERT AND REMOVE DISKETTES AND MAGAZINES
Before inserting a diskette in the diskette unit, check to be certain that you are
using the correct type of diskette for your unit. While a diskette 1 can be used
in either a diskette 1 unit or a diskette 20 unit, the diskette 20 can be used
only in a diskette 20 unit. You can use diskette 1s or diskette 2Ds in the
diskette magazine unit.

4-8

How to Insert a Diskette in the Diskette 1 or Diskette 20 Unit
1.

Press as shown and slide the cover to the right. Check to make sure that
slot is empty.

CAUTION:
Be sure that you insert the diskette so that it rests against the back of the slot.
Insert the diskette slowly, because it can bounce away from the back of the
slot and not be fully seated. If it is not in all the way, the diskette can be
damaged, and data may be lost.
2.

Remove the diskette from its envelope and insert the diskette in the slot
with the labels facing you as shown.

Close the cover by sliding it to the left until it latches.

System Console Operation

4·9

How to Remove a Diskette from the Diskette 1 or Diskette 20 Unit

Press as shown and slide the cover to the right.

Pull the diskette from the slot.

Put the diskette in its envelope and label the diskette if required.

How to Insert Diskettes in Slot 1, 2, or 3 of the Diskette Magazine Unit

4-10

Remove the diskette from its envelope.

Insert the diskette between the guide wires of the selected slot. (The diskette must be placed in the slot with the diskette label facing to the right).

Push the diskette in toward the diskette window until the diskette clears
the stop, then pull the diskette back until the edge of the diskette touches
the stop.

Close the diskette magazine unit cover.

How to Remove Diskettes from Slot 1, 2, or 3 of the Diskette Magazine Unit
1.

Open the diskette magazine unit cover.

Pull the diskette back until the edge of the diskette touches the stop.

Lift the diskette slightly, to clear the stop, and remove the diskette from
the slot.

Put the diskette in its envelope.

How to Insert Diskettes into the Magazine
1.

Remove the diskette from its envelope.

Push down the diskette retainer spring and insert the diskette, as shown on
the magazine label (slot positions are numbered 1 through 10, counting from
right to left, when you face the open end of the magazine).

Carefully push the diskette in until the retainer spring clears the edge of
the diskette (spring tension causes the spring to return to its original position)
and locks the diskette in place inside the magazine.

How to Remove Diskettes from the Magazine
1.

Remove the diskette from the magazine by pushing the diskette retainer
spring away from the diskette and then pulling the diskette out.

Put the diskette in its envelope.

. System Console Operation

4-11

How to Insert a Magazine in the Diskette Magazine Unit
1.

Remove the magazine cover.

Place the magazine between the guide rails of the position selected (1 or 2),
with the open end of the magazine facing the diskette window.

Push the magazine in toward the diskette window until the magazine retainer
spring locks the magazine in place.

Close the diskette magazine unit cover.

How to Remove a Magazine from the Diskette Magazine Unit

4-12

Open the diskette magazine unit cover.

Press the magazine retainer spring to eject the magazine.

Lift the closed end of the magazine (end nearest you) slightly to clear the
stop, and remove the magazine.

Put the magazine cover on the magazine.

How to Clear a Magazine Diskette Jam
To remove a jammed magazine diskette:
1.

Enter the STOP SYSTEM command at the system console.

Wait for the STOP SYSTEM COMPLETED message at the system console.

Power off the system.

Press the magazine interlock/indicator down to move it away from the
carriage bed. Press the magazine retainer spring and remove the magazine.

Magazine

System Console Operation

4·13

How to Clear a Diskette I/O Slot Jam
To remove a jammed diskette from slot 1,2, or 3:

Power off the system.

Push in on the jam removal thumbwheel and turn it in a downward direction
until the jammed diskette starts to move forward.

Release the thumbwheel and pull the diskette out.

Jam Removal
Thumbwheel

4-14

INITIAL PROGRAM LOAD FROM THE SYSTEM CONSOLE
Every time you turn the power on (set the Power switch on the operator panel to
the 1 position), you must perform an I PL (initial program load).
IPL causes the SSP (System Support Program Product) to be loaded into storage
from either disk or diskette. Normal operation is from disk; an IPL from a diskette
is needed only when installing the system library, or in the case of certain system
failures (current system not working correctly).
If IBM has reconfigured your system to allow 256 K bytes of main storage, the
system library (#LlBRARY) was destroyed when the CUSTOMIZ program was run
after reconfiguration. Therefore, the first time you perform IPL after reconfiguration, you must perform an IPL from diskette to reload #LlBRARY. If you
try to perform this IPL from disk, a processor check will occur.

System Console Operation

4-15

IPL from Disk
Before starting an IPL, make certain that the system printer is on.
1.

Make sure the Address/Data switches on the CE control panel are set to 0000.

Make sure the MSIPL and CSIPL switches on the CE control panel are set to
the Disk position.

Press the Load switch on the front of the system unit. After a few seconds,
the IPL Sign On display that follows appears on the system console. If the
IPL Sign On display that appears is not the same as that shown, this means
only that your system has a different configuration than the system that this
menu represents. If the IPL Sign On display does not appear, refer to Chapter
16, Problein Determination, for recommended steps to continue.
Note: After you enter a field, use the Field Exit key to advance the cursor
from field to field on this display.

This line will appear
only if badge security

!PL SIGN ON
ENTER BADGE • • •
USER 10 • • • • •
PASS~:ORD

t!EHU (OptIONA L ) •
LID~A~Y . • . • .
IGC SESSION? (Y,N)
DATE (HMDDYY) • .
TItlE (HH~1~1SS) . • •
OVERRIDES? (Y,N)

4-16

This line will
appear only
if password
security is
active on your
system.
This line wi II
appear only if
the ideographic
version of the
SSP is configured, and if
your display
station is ideographic capable.

•

Insert your badge in the magnetic stripe reader. If badge security is not active,
ENTER BADGE is not on the IPl Sign On display; skip this step.
Enter your user 10. If password security is active, enter the user 10 assigned
you by your security officer.

•

Enter your four-character password (it will not appear on the display). Your
security officer will assign your password. If password security is not active,
PASSWORD is not on the IPL Sign On display; skip this step.

•

Enter the name of the menu you want to have active after IPL. Skip this
entry if you do not want to use a menu following an IPl, or if you want to
use the default menu assigned you by your security officer. If you are not
restricted to a menu, you can override a default menu by entering another
menu name, or by entering 000000.

If a library name appears on the display, that library is the designated user
library for your work session. If no library name appears, or if you want a
different user library, you can enter the name of the desired user library. If
this entry is set to blank or all zeros, no user library will be active unless a user
library is specified among the Oel you execute. If you enter the name of a
secured user library and resource security is active, you must be authorized to
execute programs from this user library. leave this entry blank if you wish
to use the default library assigned by your security officer.
This prompt appears only if the system configuration includes the ideographic
version of the SSP and if your display station is ideographic capable. If you
specify Y (yes), you can enter ideographic characters, and system messages
and screen formats are displayed using ideographic characters. If you specify
N (no), the system will display only alphanumeric characters on system
displays, but you can still enter and display ideographic characters on userdefined formats.
The date format may be YYMMDD, DDMMYY, or MMDDYY; where YY
means year, MM means month, and DO means day.
The current system date is shown to the right of the prompt. Either update
the date (be sure you do not change the order of month, day, and year), or
leave the date unchanged.

Enter the current time; hours, minutes, seconds.
This entry activates a timer which establishes the actual time displayed on the
display screen or printed on the printed output thereafter. Specify hours
according to the 24-hour clock. For example, for an IPl at 4:30 p.m., enter
163000 for the time.

System Console Operation

4-17

•

If you want to override system configuration options, enter Y. The IPL File
Rebuild-System Options display appears. After you respond to that display,
respond to the remaining IPL displays.
If you do not want to override system configuration parameters, enter N. The
IPL File Rebuild-System Options display appears. Press the Enter/Rec Adv key
to complete IPL.

Reformatting after a Power Failure or a Program Check

If the system goes down because of a power failure or a program check while
spooling or executing from the input job queue, the spool and input job
queue files may not be usable. Either specify a reformat of the files at IPL
time or attempt to retrieve as much data as possible. However, the usability of
the files is not guaranteed.
For more information on the processor check light, refer to Processor Check
Light On in Chapter 16 of this manual. For more information on the reformatting of the spool and input job queue, refer to the IPL Overrides-Spooling
Parameters display and the IPL Overrides-Input Job Queue Parameters display
later in this section.

4-18

This display allows you to determine the status of all the files on the disk. The
file rebuild function should be run when the status of a file or files is in question (for example, in the case of a system failure or when files are being updated
or if a processor check occurs during a COMPRESS). The entries shown on
the display are the default values (those that will be used unless you change
them).
1.

Y (yes) must be given here or items 2 through 5 are ignored. Y causes the
file rebuild utility to be run as specified by the values given in items 2
through 5. N causes no action.
Note: The file rebuild function runs in dedicated mode, which means no
other task can be started until file rebuild is completed.

Y causes files that cannot be repaired or corrected to be deleted. N does not
delete the files.
Files that are irreparable are those with one or more of the following
cond iti ons :
a. Invalid latest date indicator (neither * nor binary zero)
b. Invalid data flag
c. Invalid retention - neither P nor T
d. Invalid file type - not sequential, direct, indexed, or a combination
of types
e. End of key beyond end of record
f. Start of key before beginning of record
g. Starting sector and/or ending sector of file is not on a block boundary
or the sector address is not within the bounds of the user disk area
h. Record length exceeds 4096 bytes
Note: If a processor check occurs during a COMPRESS, IPL file rebuild
will call COMPRESS to complete its function. If any of the messages
numbered 1900 through 1909 are issued and option 2 is taken, the file will
not be deleted, no further processing of files will occur, and I PL file
rebuild will end. This will allow the user to take corrective action on the
disk files and then perform the IPL.

System Console Operation

4-19

However, files with the following conditions are considered reparable:
a. If the file contains more records than the VTOC indicates, IPl file
rebuild will correct the VTOC to indicate the correct number of
records.

Note: If the system was performing IPl or a power failure occurred
during an output, update, or add, the last record may be only partially
written~

b. If the VTOC for an indexed file (1) is updated to reflect the number of
records, (2) has the invalid index flag set, or (3) has an unequal number
of index entries compared to the number of records, then the index
will be reconstructed from the records in the file.
3.

Y causes file rebuild to examine the old files in addition to looking at the
new files. N means the old files are not looked at.
New files are those created for the first time or recreated by loading an
existing file. When the file is deallocated, the new flag is removed and the
file is now old. A file used for update or add is not new.

Y causes the file labels of all irreparable files to be displayed. N means the
labels are not displayed.

Y causes the files created for the purpose of checkpoint/restart to be deleted.
In addition, the checkpoint status flag is turned off in all user files and
libraries that have been checkpointed. N means all checkpoint record files
and checkpoint active files are ignored. This line is not displayed if the
checkpoint/restart feature is not configured.

Note: If N is specified for 3 (examine old files also) and Y is specified for 5
(delete checkpoint files), 3 (examine old files atso) is treated as if Y were specified.

4-20

IPL OVERRIDES-GENERAL

SYSTE~

PARAMETERS

l. DATA FORMAT
A=DDt1MYY

B
B=tU~DDYY

2. SINGLE PROGRAM MODE

C=YYMtlOD
N

3. STARTUP PROCEDURE NAME

The date format can be DDMMYY, MMDDYY, or YYMMDD where DD means
day, MM means month, and YY means year. If the format is changed, the current date is changed to reflect the new format.

This entry defines whether you will be in single program mode after IPL.

The name of a user-written initialization procedure that can be run at IPL.
A blank entry indicates no procedure will be run.

System Console Operation

4-21

IPL OVERRIDES-COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
1.

ACTIVATE RENOTE WORK STATIONS?

(Y,N)

AUTO VARY ONLINE REMOTE WORK STATIONS?

ACTIVATE SSP-ICF? (Y,N)

ACTIVATE AUTOCALl? (Y,N)

Y
(Y~N)

Changing this response to N cancels remote work stations only for this IPL.
This option will not be displayed if remote work stations are not configured.

Changing this response to N indicates that those work stations selected for
auto vary during system configuration will not be brought online at IPL.
This option is not displayed if you did not specify any remote work stations
as auto vary on.

Changing this response to N indicates that the SSP-ICF feature will not be
active for this IPL. This option will not be displayed if SSP-ICF is not
configured.

Changing this response to N indicates that the AUTOCALL feature will not
be active for thfs IPL. This option will not be displayed if the autocall feature
-is -not configured .

Note: This screen will not be displayed if neither communications feature is
configured.

4-22

IPL

OVERRIOES-PERFQ~MANCE

~ORK

PARAMETERS

STATION DATA MANAGEMENT

A=TRA~~SIE~n

B=RESIDENT
C=RESID~NT/TRANSIENT

With the response of A, work station data management is not loaded into the
nucleus at IPL time; instead, the work station data management stays in the
transient area and is brought into the nucleus on an as-called basis. If remote work
stations are active, A = TRANSI ENT is not displayed and only options 8 and C
are valid for this display.

Notes:
1. This screen will not appear if single program mode has been selected.
2. This screen will not appear if the ideographic version of the SSP is loaded and if
ideographic-capable devices are configured.

System Console Operation

4-23

Absent if spooling
is not active. (The
IPL OverridesSpooling Parameters
display will also be
skipped.)

IPL OVERRIDES-SYSTEM PARAMETERS
1- CANCEL PRINT SPOOLING?

(Y,N)

2. DELETE SFOOL FILE?

(Y,Ni

3. CANCEL INPUT JOB QUEUE?

(Y,N)

4. DELETE INPUT JOB QUEUe?

(Y,N)

4-24

:}
:}

---------+- Absent if input job
queue is not active.
(The IPL OverridesInput Job Queue
Parameters display
will also be skipped.)

J
1.

Changing this response to Y cancels the print spooling function for this IPL
only.

If you cancel the print spooling function, you can also delete the print spool
file. Any data on the print spool file is lost.

Changing this response to Y cancels the input job queue function only for
this IPL.

If you cancel the input job queue fu nction, you can also delete the input job
queue. All jobs on the queue are lost.

N indicates that spooling will be only to the system printer by default. Other
printers can be spooled by specifying SPOOl·YES on the appropriate PRINTER
Oel statement(s).

This size is a performance factor for the line printer.

Y indicates that the spool writer(~) will be automatically started during IPL.
N indicates the spool writer(s) will not be automatically started. The
START PRT command must be entered to start the spool writers.

System Console Operation

4·25

The number of blocks on disk to be reserved for the spool file. When
necessary, the spool file will be extended up to 6 times this size. The value
specified is rounded down to the nearest multiple of the spool file segment
size.

Note: If an override size is not given and the spool file is empty, the size is
set to the configured size, not the last size set.
5.

The number of blocks on disk for each spool file segment (the smallest unit
of the spool file). There must be between 2 and 800 segments for each extent
of the spool file.

You can specify the preferred location for the spool file if you have mUltiple
disk drives.

Y removes any entries that may exist on the spool file. If the size was
changed in entry 4 or 5, Y must be specified here.

Note: If the processor check light goes on when you attempt to IPL after a power
failure, do the following:
• Attempt another IPL and answer Y to the Overrides prompt on the Sign On
display.
• Specify Y for optron 7 on the Spooling Parameters display.
• Then specify Y for option 2 on the Input Job Queue Parameters display.
All other override values will default.

4-26

,
IPL OVERRIDES-INPUT JOB QUEUE PARAMETERS
1.

I~?UT

JOB QUEUE SIZE

(20-120 JOBS)

020

2. REFCRMAT INPUT J03 QUEUE?

3. START INPUT J03 QUEUE?

This is the maximum number of jobs that can be placed on the input job
queue (at two jobs per sector).
Note: If an override size is not given and the input job queue is empty,
the size is set to the configured size, not to the last size set.

Y removes any jobs that currently are on the input job queue. If the size
was changed in entry 1, Y must be specified here.

Y indicates the input job queue is to be started at IPL time; N indicates
the input job queue is to be started by the system operator.

Note: If the processor check light goes on when you attempt to IPL after a power
failure, do the following:

•

Attempt another IPL and answer Y to the Overrides prompt on the Sign On
display.

•

Specify Y for option 7 on the Spooling Parameters display.

• Then specify Y for option 2 on the Input Job Queue Parameters display.
All other override values will default.
For more information, refer to Reformatting after a Power Failure or a Program
Check earlier in this chapter.

System Console Operation

4-27

IPL OVERRIDES-HISTORY FILE WRAP FEATURE
1.
2.

4-28

HISl'C::!Y FILE AUTO:-IATIC J'~RAP?
DELETE HISTORY OVERFLOW FILE?

t::!
N

Y causes previous entries to be overwritten when the history file is full;
N requires that the history file be copied into the history overflow file
before any entries are overwritten.

Y causes the history overflow file to be deleted if it is empty. Y is valid only
when Y is selected for 1.

IPL OVERRIDES-HISTORY FILE l4RAP FEATURE
1.

HISTORY OVERFLOW FILE SIZE?
(NUnSER OF HISTORY FILE tlULTIPLES)

REFORMAT OVERFLOW FILE?

PREFERRED LOCATION?

(1-8)

(Al,A2)

This is the number of multiples of the history file size that should be
allocated to the history overflow file.

Y causes the history overflow file to be marked as empty; N does not permit
any change to the overflow file.

This is the preferred spindle location.

System Console Operation

4-29

IPL OVERRIDES-PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS
1- WORK STATION BUFFER SIZE.

(4-64)

(6-64)

(NUMBER OF 1/2 K UNITS)
2. SYSiEM ASSIGN/FREE SIZE.

(NUMBER OF 1/2 K UNITS)
3.

TRACE TABLE SIZE.
(N~t:3tR

(16-512 )

032

-OFWACE -cNTlU-ESi

4. MAIN STORAGE NUCLEUS SIZE

18K

Note: Different limits are displayed when remote work stations are active.
- Work station buffer size (8-64)
(9-64)
- System assign/free size
The values that appear in items 1 through 3 were entered at system configuration
time. These values may be changed on this IPL override display. For information
about choosing these values, see the Installation and Modification Reference
Manual and the Planning Guide.
1,2.

These values are a function of the number of command display stations configured to the system.

Trace table size is set at system configuration time; the primary purpose of the
trace table is to aid in ~roblem resolution.

This value is informational only. This is the total size of the fixed nucleus and
all the components of the variable nucleus. You alter this value by changing
the values of items 1 through 3.

When no further changes are made that affect the main storage nucleus size, press
the Enter/Rec Adv key.
IPL is complete. The message #IPLPROC IS RUNN ING appears, followed by the
command display.

4-30

IPL from Diskette

IPL is from diskette when installing a new system libra-ry or in the case of certain
system failures.
To perform System/34 IPL using diskettes:
l.

The Address/Data switches should be set to 0000 to perform an IPL from
diskette. The only exception is to perform an IPL from diskette location 1
in magazine 1. In this instance, set the Address/Data switches to 0011.

Set the MSIPL switch on the CE panel to the Diskette position.

Insert the first diskette or magazine. (The diskette must go in slot 1 of
diskette magazine 1.)

Press the Load key on the front of the system unit.

The following display appears if the correct diskette was inserted.
(Otherwise, the system will probably process check.) You can change any of
the values on this display. Press the Enter/Rec Adv key and go to step 6.

RELOAD--->ENTER DATA FOR SYSTEM AREA ALLOCATION:

This line appears
only if the ideo-

LIGRARY BLOCKS
DIRECTROY SECTORS
HISTORY FILE BLOCKS
the SSP is 10aded.~TASK WORK FILE BLOCKS
f.EXTN FILE BLOCKS
NU~9ER OF VTOC ENTRIES
DELETE FILES FRO~ VTOC (YIN)
USE BACKUP CONFIGURATION (YIN)
This line does not
TOTAL SYSTEM BLOCKS USED
appear if security
!
is on your system.
"f
"
grap h IC verSion 0

L!6?ARY

j=I

1000
200
012
354
080
200

'-----------------------~------------------------------------------.,
Note: If you have the diskette magazine unit, the following RELOAD parameters

are assumed when IPL is from diskette:
S1 (or M1.01) and AUTO
Refer to the System Support Reference Manual for more information on the
RELOAD command parameters.

System Console Operation

4-31

The following display appears. Insert the second diskette, then press the
Enter/Ree Adv key. If you have more than two diskettes, this display
reappears for each diskette until the last diskette has been read. Then the
display in step 7 appears.

PxESS ENTER TO CONTINUE:
I~SERT DISKETTE VOLUME WITH
FILE LA6EL- ~LleRA~Y
FILE DATE- 7iCc04

SEQUENCE NU~!3ER- 002

SYS-3907 END OF VClUNE--INSERT NEXT DISKETTE

~-------------------------------------------------------------------',I
7.

The following display appears when the last diskette has been read. Press the
Enter/Rec Adv key and go to step 8.

PRESS

ENTER TO CONTINUE:

REMOVE LAST DISKETTE VOLUME

4·32

When the following display appears, set the MSIPL switch back to the Disk
position and press the Load switch to perform an IPL from disk. Sign on to
the system.

RELOAD COMPLETEO-IPl FROM DISK REQUIRED

Using the RELOAD Command to Perform an IPL from Diskettes
If you need to reload the system library, you can do the following:
1.

Insert the first diskette or a magazine.

Enter the RELOAD procedure command. RELOAD cannot be run while
any other jobs are being run or while a user is signed on at any other display
station. Refer to the System Support Reference Manual for the RELOAD
command parameters.

The system goes from the the reload procedure to IPL from diskettes automatically. The first display for IPLfrom diskette, the Reload display,
appears.

Complete IPL from diskette as shown in the previous section. When you
complete the IPL from diskette, IPL from disk takes place automatically.

System Console Operation

4-33

After IPL and IPL sign on are complete, either from disk or diskette, the message
#IPLPROC IS RUNNING appears, followed by the Command display. Hold the
Shift key down and press the Sys Req key. Press the Enter fRec Adv key and the
System display appears. On the System display, an informational message appears
that reminds you of the available user main storage area, as shown in the following
example:

SYSTEM

CONSOLE

01 AVAILABLE USER MAIN STORAGE AREA IS 42K.

The System display indicates that the system console is in console mode. From
the System display, you can enter system console control commands only. These
commands allow you to control and monitor system activity. (This chapter
explains how you can use these commands. The System Support Reference Manual
also provides a description of each of these commands.)

4-34

System Display

SYSTn1

Cct{SOLE

SYS-5701 SPOOL FILE IS EMPTY NeW

SYS-5602 COI-iMAl':O NOT

ALLm~ED

IN CONSOLE NODE

Console

DW
DU

Roll Area - - - -

D F'
SYS-570l SPOOL FILE IS EMPTY NOW
D

S P

STAQT COMMAND SUCCESSFUL

Message LineS _ _ {

SY5-5701 SPOOL FILE !S EMPTY NS~
SYS-1405 O?T!O:~S (01 )
DO yeU ~;\NT SFO:JL SEPARATOR PAGES ON PRINTER Pl •••

Input Lines _ _{
100...

The console roll area shows a history of output to the system console and input
from the system console. When this area is full, the old (top) entries roll up and
off the display and the new entries appear at the bottom of the display. Messages
that you have not responded to will not roll off the display. If the screen is full
of active messages, you must clear (respond to) some of the current messages to
get any new messages. Message lines contain output from the system to you. Input
lines are lines on which you enter system control commands or reply to system
messages.

Note: If the Message Waiting indicator is on, but no more messages are being rolled
into the console roll area, it may be that the roll area is full. In this case, respond
to the messages in the roll area to provide room for additional messages.
If you are operating from an ideographic terminal and you change from IGC
SESSION-Y to IGC SESSION-N at sign on, you will get a blank screen. The
system is rebuilding the screen display.

System-Console Operation

-4~35-

HOW TO USE THE SYSTEM CONSOLE AS A DISPLAY STATION
You can use the system console for entering commands and DC L statements just
like a command display station.
To switch from system console mode to command mode, hold down the Shift
key and press the Sys Req key, release them and press the Enter/Rec Adv key.
If you are using the system console as a command display station for data entry
or for interactive jobs and the system requires the console for a system console
function, you are notified by the Message Waiting indicator on the display screen
and a buzzing from the console. When you finish entering the current data on the
screen, you can switch from command mode to system console mode to accept
the system message. To do this, hold down the Shift key and press the Sys Req
key, then press the Enter/Rec Adv key.
After taking proper action, you can switch the system console back to a command
display station (by holding down the Shift key and pressing the Sys Req key, and
then pressing the Enter/Rec Adv key) and continue entering data.
After you switch from command mode to system console mode, the system cannot
send you messages pertaining to a job you entered in command mode. You may
want to switch back to command mode periodically to check for messages, or
leave the system console in command mode until the job ends.

4·36

ALTERNATIVE SYSTEM CONSOLE

You can switch to the alternative system console either during IPL or at any time
that the system console becomes inoperative. To switch during IPL, go to the
designated alternative system console, and press the Sys Req key with the Shift key
and then press the Enter/Rec Adv key. The message IPL IS IN PROGRESS,
PLEASE WAIT appears. Disregard this message and enter the CONSOLE control
command on the display of the alternative system console (see the following
example). Then press the Enter/Rec Adv key. The IPL Sign On display will then
appear at that display station. Complete the IPL Sign On display, which causes
that display station to become the system console.
To switch consoles if the system console becomes inoperative at any time other
than during IPL, sign on to the alternative system console and enter the CONSOLE
control command. The CONSOLE command can be entered only from command
mode. The alternative system console activated after IPL is complete must have a
display screen that is the same size or larger than the system console. The system
console and alternative system console are specified during system configuration.
To determine which devices have an attribute of alternative system console, use
the STATUS WORKSTN control command.

IPL

IPL IS IN PROGRESS, PLEASE WAIT.
CCNSOLE_

Notes:
1. If the CONSOLE command is entered after IPL has completed, the alternative
system console from wh ich the command is entered must have the same or
larger size screen (1920-character) as the current system console. If the
CONSOLE command is entered before IPL has completed, the alternative
system console can be assigned to a smaller size (960-character) screen.
2. If an alternative console is made the system console via the CONSO LE command
and then made an alternative console again, it will have NOSUB attribute. To
reactivate the subconsole function, the system console operator must issue
the ASSIGN SUB command.

System Console Operation

4-37

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE SYSTEM DEVICES
Command Format

STATUS WORKSTN [,ws-id]
(D)

Parameters

(W)

WORKS TN: Displays status information about: local

and non-offline remote display stations and printers, the
diskette drive, or a selected display station or work
station printer.
ws-id: The 10 of the display station or printer for which
status information is display-ed. If you do not specify an
10, status information for all display stations and
printers is displayed.

Example

You enter
STATUS WORKSTN or

o W
The following two-part display appears:

W(RKSTATION S ATUS
WS-ID

CONS

WI
~':2

1.J3

COMPLETE
STATllS
ON-LINE
ON-LINE
ACTIVE
OH-LINE
ON-LINE

Wl
USER

cve

TYPE
DISKETTE
SYS PRINTER
SYS Cot{SOLE
ALT CONSOLE
ALT CONSOLE

SUB

N
N

SIZE
1920
1920
1920

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARO, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END.............

4-38

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or Rolil (roll down) key, the next part of the
STATUS WORKSTN display appears.

WORKSTATION-5TATUS
MSG

~~S-ID

cm SOLE

cmlPLETE

CU2R LN

POSS LN

Pl
WI

W2
W3

N
N

IGC _ _ _ _ This field appears
only if you have
N
the
ideographic
N
version of the
N
N
SSP.

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
e-+-ENTER F-FORIIARD, I-INPUT,

R~R~START)

U-UPDATE, OR E-END ..•...••...••

~--------------~
"

e
e

WS-ID is a list of the diskette drive, all local display stations, all local printers, and
the remote devices that are active, online, or pending. 11 is the ID for the
diskette, and the other IDs are defined at system configuration time.
CONS shows the controlling console configured for each printer.
STATUS Iists the current status of each of the devices. Possible entries are:
ON-LINE - The device is online but is not presently being used.
OFF-LINE - The device has been varied offline by the system operator.
ACTIVE - The device is currently being used.
PEND ING - The remote device is being varied on or off.

e
e

COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
USER lists the user ID that was entered at sign-on time for each active display
station. Inactive local display stations, local printers, and the diskette show
hyphens (----) for the user ID.

System Console Operation

4-39

TYPE describes each device listed on this display.
DISKETTE: The diskette drive.
SYS PR INTER: The system printer.
PR INTER: A printer other than the system printer.
DATA: This device is a data only display station.
COMMAND: This is a command display station.
SYS CONSOLE: This is a system console.
ALT CONSOLE: This is an alternative console.
SUBCONSOLE: This is a subconsole display station.
SUB shows whether a subconsole or an alternative console is currently active
as a subconsole (receiving printer related messages).
CONSOLE indicates that the STATUS WORKSTN command was issued from
console mode and console commands are valid with the I option.

o
e

SIZE shows the size of the display station display screen.
960-character display screen
1920-character display screen
MSG indicates whether broadcast messages failed to get to this display station.
Y indicates that the system operator sent a broadcast message to all display
stations but this display station did not receive the message because its message
queue was full. This field is valid for display stations only; for printers and
the diskette drive, this field contains a hyphen (-).

•

C U indicates the control unit 10 of the remote device.

•

CURR LN: if the device is online and attached via a communications line,
shows the line number (line 1,2,3, or 4).

•

POSS LN: if the device is attached via a communications line, shows the
numbers of all possible lines on which an offline device can communicate
(line 1,2,3, or 4). If the device is pending, shows the line number it will
communicate on when it is online (line 1,2,3, or 4).

•

IGC: appears only if you have the ideographic version of the SSP.

Appears if only the display station is ideographic capable.

Appears if both the display and the keyboard are ideographic
capable, or if the device is an ideographic-capable printer.

Appears for non ideographic devices.
Appears for the diskette drive.

4-40

This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing
the Enter fRec Adv key causes the following action:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last page and
more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to the first
page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed again. If
you enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system will
respond as if F were pressed.
When entered along with a command or OCl on the input fields
below the prompt, caUses the command or OCl to be processed.
You can end the current STATUS session by entering a procedure
command, an OCl statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control
command, or another STATUS command.

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

If you enter the STATUS WORKSTN [,ws-id] command and include a work
station ID, the following two-part di"splay appears. In this example, work station
W2 requested the status of work station W1.

WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID
Wl

cmts

CONSOLE

COMPLETE
STATUS
ACTIVE

USER
KSA

TYPE
SYS CONSOLE

SUB

SIZE
1920

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ••••••••••••

System Console Operation

441

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or Roll-L. (roll down) key, the next part of the
display appears.

'~ORKST

WS-ID
W1
W2
1<1:5

ATION STATUS
HSG

COMPLETE

cm~SOLE

C U

CURR LN

pass LN

N
N
N

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL n:FORMATICN
ENTER F-FORWARO, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO ••••••••.•••

4-42

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE REMOTE SYSTEM DEVICES

Command Format

STATUS REMOTES [,ws-id]
(D)

Parameters

(R)

REMOTES: Displays status information about the remote
display stations and printers, or displays status information
about a selected remote display station or work station
printer.

ws-id: The ID of the remote display station or printer for
which status information is displayed. If you do not specifyan ID, status information for all remote display stations
and printers is displayed.
Example

You enter
STATUS REMOTES or

The following display appears:

WORI'STATION S ATUS
WS-IO

01
02
P2

CONS

STATUS

--01

ACTI'iE
OFf-LINE

USER
KSA

TYPE

SIZE

1920
1920

SUBCCN'30LE

CO;'l:1AND

m~-Ln~E

PRItHER

p[NDn~G

SL'3Cot-1SO LE

I} 405

PEtmlt~G

cmi~lAH[)

1920
1920

FEf~D!~iG

OFF -LIt~E

cm111AN:J
CO! ::1Al'~D

0960

PO~JING

PRINTER

0';;60

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORNATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RE5TART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••••.•••••.•

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or RolI"j.. (roll down) key, the next part of the
STATUS R EMOTES display appears.

System Console Operation

4-43

•

WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID
01
02
P2
03
04
05
06
P3

MSG
Y

N
N
N

••

•

COMPLE:EuJ~~~
CU1
CUI
CUI
CU2
CU2
CU2
CU2
CU2

I
I
2
2
2
2

N
N
H
H
H
H
N
H

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL IHFORMATIOH
~--~--ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ••••••.•.••••

o
o
e

WS-ID is a list of the remote display stations and printers defined for the
system_
CONS: shows the controlling console configured for each printer.
STATUS Iists the current status of each of the devices. Possible entries are:
ON-LINE - The device is online but is not presently being used.
OFF-LINE - The device has been varied offline by the system operator.
ACTIVE - The device is currently being used.
PEND ING - The remote device is being varied on or off, or the remote
device is in slow poll mode.

CD
•

COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
USE R lists the user ID that was entered at sign-on time for each active remote
display station. Inactive remote display stations and printers show hyphens
(----) for the user ID.
TYPE describes each device listed on this display.
PR INTE R: A printer other than the system printer.
DATA: A data only display station.
COMMAND: A command display station.
SUBCONSOLE: A subconsole display station.

4-44

SUB: shows whether a subconsole or an alternative system console is
currently active as a subconsole (receiving printer related messages).

This field
appears only
if you have
the ideographic
version of
the SSP.

o
o

CONSOLE indicates that the STATUS REMOTES command was issued
from console mode, and system console commands are valid with the I option.
SIZE shows the size of the display station display screen.
960-character display screen
1920-character display screen

o
o

MSG indicates whether broadcast messages failed to get to this display station.
Y indicates that the system operator sent a broadcast message to all display
stations but this display station did not receive the message because its message
queue was full. This field is valid for display stations only; for printers and
the diskette drive, this field contains a hyphen (-).
C U indicates the control unit 10 of the remote device.
CURR IN: if the device is online and attached via a communications line,
shows the line number (line 1, 2, 3, or 4).

•

POSS IN: if the device is attached via a communications line, shows the
numbers of all possible lines on which an offline device can communicate
(tine 1,2, 3, or 4). If the device is pending, shows the line number it will
communicate on when it is online (tine 1, 2, 3, or 4).

•

IGC: appears only if you have the ideographic version of the SSP.

C!)

Appears if the device is an ideographic-capable printer.

Appears for non ideographic devices.

This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing
the Enter fRec Adv key causes the following action:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last page and
more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to the first
page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed again. If
you enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system will
respond as if F were pressed.
When entered along with a command or OCl on the input fields
below the prompt, causes the command or OCl to be processed.
You can end the current STATUS session by entering a procedure
command, an OCl statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control
command, or another STATUS command.

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

System Console Operation

4-45

If you enter the STATUS REMOTES ~ws-id] command and include a remote work
station ID, the following display appears. In this example, work station W3 has
requested the status of work station D 1 .

WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID

CONS

COMPLETE

TYPE
COMt1AND

USER
KSA

STATUS
ACTIVE

SUB

SIZE
1920

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORt1ATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ••••••••.•••

After you press the Rollt (roll up) or RolI-J, (roll down) key, the next part of the
display appears.

WORKSTATION STATUS
WS-ID
01

t1SG
N

COMPLETE
CU
CUI

CURR LN

POSS LN

ROLL KEYS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ••••••••••••

4-46

HOW TO DISPLAY THE TASKS IN THE SYSTEM

Command Format

STATUS SYST ASK [,jObname
]
(D)
(T)
,system task id

Parameters

SYSTASK: Displays the job name and the task control block
address of the job, or displays the system task name and task
control block address.
jobname: The name of the user job.
system task id: The two-character code that identifies the task
control block as a system task.

Example

You enter
STATUS SYSTASK or

D T
The following display appears:

TC8~

0200
6818

6478

DESCRIPTION
F8- R~S

TCSe)
6SEO

CONSOLE
DESCRIPTION
F6- SDLC

6900

~5160751

6938

W4161639

COMPLETE
TCSe)

.iiI.....-t--ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR

E-E~m.............

System Console Operation

4-47

e
o

TCB@ is a list of the Task Control Block Addresses active in the system.
DESCRIPTION indicates the user job name or system task description that
is associated with the task control block.
COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
CONSOLE indicates that the STATUS SYSTASK command was issued from
console mode and system console commands are valid with the I option.
This line is for operator action. Entering one of these characters and pressing
the Enter/Rec Adv key causes the following action:
F

Causes forward paging. If the display is already on the last pa.ge
and more than one page exists, the display will wrap around to
the first page. If only one page exists, that page will be displayed
again. If you enter any character other than I, R, U, or E, the system
will respond as if F were pressed.
When entered along with a command or OCL on the input fields
below the prompt, causes the command or OCL to be processed.
You can end this STATUS session by entering a procedure command,
an OCL statement, a MENU, OFF, or MODE control command, or
another STATUS command.

4-48

Restarts (or redisplays) the first page of this status function.

Updates the display for more current information.

Ends this status display.

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE SSP-ICF SUBSYSTEMS

Command Format

STATUS SUBSYS
(D)

(I)

SUBSYS: Displays status information about the enabled

Parameters

SSP-ICF subsystems.
Example:

You enter:
STATUS SUBSYS or
D
The following display appears:

COMPLE E
06144 BYTES
CONFIG
NAME
INTRA
BSCELP2

SWAPPABlE
YIN
TYPE
Y
Y

INTRA
BSCEl

LINE
0

CONSOLE
ACTUAL

COM~mN

QUEUE SP CE 05664 BYTES

TASK SIZES IN BYTES I I QUEUE SPACE
SUB
o MGT
LINK I I ALlOe AVAIL
02048
08192

06144

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO •.•••••••••••

05952

System Console Operation

4-49

e
e
e
E)

o
CD

o
o
•

4-50

CON F IG NAM E contains a list of subsystem configuration names currently
enabled or being enabled.
This field contains the allocated common queue space for th~ SSP-ICF subsystems. This..field may be blank if no subsystem is fully enabled.
SWAPPABLE indicates whether or not the subsystem task is swappable. A
value of Y indicates that it is swappable. If a data management task is
req~ired for the subsystem task, the data management swap status task is the
same as the subsystem task swap status.
TYPE describes the type of subsystem.
SNUF - SNA upline facility
CCP - CCP
CICS - CICS/VS
IMS - IMS/VS
BSCE L - BSC equivalence link
INTRA - Intra System/34
SNA PEER - SNA peer
3270BSC - BSC 3270
3270 SD LC - SNA 3270
FINANCE - Finance
COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
LINE describes the communications line allocated to the subsystem configuration currently enabled or being enabled.
TASK SIZE IN BYTES: SUB indicates the size of the subsystem task. D
MGT indicates the size of the data management task for the subsystem if one
is required. LINK indicates the size of the communication link task for the
subsystem if one is required. If the link task is SDLC, the value displayed is
the sum of the link task size plus line buffer size.
This field contains the amount of common queue space currently available.
This is the sum of all the free areas. This field may be blank if no subsystem
is fully enabled.
QUEUE SPACE indicates the status of the subsystem-task's queue space.
ALLOC indicates the amount of subsystem queue space allocated to the subsystem task. AVAI L indicates the actual amount of subsystem queue space
currently available and is the sum of all the free areas in the queue space of
the subsystem task .
SUBCONSOLE indicates that the STATUS SUBSYS command was issued
from subconsole mode, and subconsole commands are valid with the I option.
This line is for operator action. If you press any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if F were pressed.

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE SSP-ICF SUBSYSTEM SESSIONS

Command Format

STATUS SUBSESS
(D)

(N)

Parameters

SUBSESS: Displays status information about the SSP-ICF
subsystem sessions.

Example

You enter:
ST ATUS SUBSESS or
D N
The following display appears:

CONFIG
NAME

LOCATIOH
NAME

INTRA

nnt'~

10
PHYS/SYM
07
08
11

BSCELP2

"."""-ENTER

BSCELP2

F-FOR~!ARD,

12
09

I-INPUT,

TYPE

81
11

A
E

E
A

K-!~ESTART,

INV
STAT
N
N
E

I
N

STATUS
OM OC ST

JOB
NAHE

20
20

HI0245:;:6
WI0245:.6
11030l!;3
120000('0
W10245:-6

OPE~AT10N

MRTMAX
N
N
N
Y
N

20
20
20

20
20
01

0
0

00
20

0
0

U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO •••••••••••••

System Console Operation

4-51

e
G

•
e
e
•

CONFIG NAME contains a list of subsystem configuration names currently
enabled or being enabled.
This field contains a list of location names. The location name will appear
in any messages logged by the subsystem or SSP for this subsystem configuration. For SNA peer, this is the remote location name .
This field contains a list of subsystem session IDs. PHYS indicates this is the
system defined ID. SYM indicates this is the symbolic session ID used by
the program owning the session. This ID is used by a program for outgoing
communications with an SSP-ICF session.
COMPLETE appears only on the last page of a status function.
This field describes the session type. A indicates this session is an acquired
session. E indicates this session is an evoked session. * indicates a noncommunicating peer station .
INVSTAT:
E

Program has requested data from the session.
SSP has marked the session complete to satisfy an accept input
issued by the program owning the session.

Program does not want data from the session.

Program has requested data from the session and the data is now
available.

The following four fields indicate the status of the session:
MRTMAX

If this session is attached to an MRT and the session is waiting because the maximum number of requestors has been
reached, this field will have a Y displayed. Otherwise, an N
will appear.

The following three fields are primarily for diagnostic purposes. They
indicate the state of the SSP-ICF sessions when the STATUS SUBSESS
command was entered.

4-52

This is the current operation command modifier.

This is the current operation command code.

This is a two-character field. The first character is either an
A (operation active), 0 (operation complete), or I (operation in an initial status). The second character is either
blank or an asterisk (*). If this character is an asterisk, the
program is currently waiting for this session to complete.

o
o
•

CONSOLE indicates that the STATUS SUBSESS command was issued from
console mode, and console commands are valid with the I option.
JOBNAME contains the job name assigned to the process to which the
session is attached.
This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if F were pressed.

HOW TO DISPLAY THE STATUS OF MESSAGES AT SUBCONSOLE DISPLAY
STATIONS

Command Format

STATUS MESSAGE [,ws-id]
(D)

Parameters

(G)

MESSAGE: Displays messages that have been sent to
subconsoles and have not been replied to.

ws-id: The two-character work station I D of a subconsole
display station. If this parameter is specified, only messages
that have been sent to that particular subconsole are displayed.
If you do not specify a ws-id, all messages that have been
sent to all subconsole display stations and have not been
replied to are displayed.
Note: If messages sent to a subconsole contain ideographic
characters, but the system console is not ideographic capable,
periods will appear in place of ideographic characters on the
system console display.
Example

You enter:
STATUS MESSAGE or

System Console Operation

4-53

The following display appears.

G
SUBCONSOLE MEiSAGE STATUS

COMPLETE

ji)

THIS SUBCONSOLE COMPLETE
SUBCONSOLE - W2
SYS-6566
P2--THIS PRINTER IS NOT OPERATIONAL NOW
02 SYS-6566
P3--THIS PRINTER IS NOT OPERATIONAL NOW

• .!'......I---Ol

-03

SYs--lof04

~I----ON

~~~-ENTER

UFTI011S

•

CONSOLE

You can reply to any message which is at the subconsole whose messages you are
displaying. To do this, key in I (for INPUT) followed by an appropriate version
of the REPLY control command.

e
e

This is the work station I D of the subconsole display station whose
messages you are displaying. The Status Message display shows the
messages for one subconsole display station at a time.
This field appears on the last page of the status function for each subconsole display station. If there are enough messages at one subconsole
display station to overflow one page, only the last page shows TH IS
SUBCONSOLE COMPLETE.
This field appears when all the messages at all subconsole display stations
have been displayed. If there is more than one subconsole, or if there is
more than one page of messages for this subconsole, only the last page shows
COMPLETE .

•

CONSOLE indicates that the STATUS MESSAGE control command
was issued from console mode, and system console commands are valid
with the I option.

•

The ellipsis shows that additional information is available for this message.
To view this information enter I followed by REPLY or R and the message
ID, or I followed by the message ID.

CD
4-54

This is the reply ID of the message. Use this to reply to the message.

This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, E, or F, the display will continue to display the same page.

SYSTEM
SYSTEM

PRINTER P2 CHANGE TO FORMS NUMBER 003

F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •..•..•.•.•••

HOW TO TAKE LOCAL OR REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE AND OFFLINE
(VARY COMMAND)
The VARY control command changes the status of a display station, a printer, or
the diskette drive from online to offline or from offline to online. (The VARY
command varies the system configuration.) Offline devices cannot be used by
programs on the system. You cannot use VARY to take an active device offline.
To determine the current status of devices on the system, use the STATUS
WORKSTN or STATUS REMOTES control command.
ws-id
PRT

Command Format
VARY
(V)

{~~F}

(P)
,

11
cu-id
,line
cu-id,line

Parameters

ON: Place the specified device online.
OFF: Place the specified device offline.

Note: If the device varied offline is a subconsole, any
messages that were queued to that subconsole are sent
to the system console.

ws-id: The 10 of a display station or printer. The status
of this device is changed.
PRT: The status of the system printer is changed.
11: The status of the diskette drive is changed.

cu-id: A 3-character 10 of a control unit. All work
stations associated with this control unit that are not
active will be varied online or offline. If the line parameter is not specified with this parameter, the default is
the line(s) specified at configuration time.

line: 1, 2, 3, or 4. When entered without the cu-id
parameter, all control units and work stations associated with this line that are not active will be varied online or offline.

cu-id,line: Places a control unit online or offline on a
specified line. This parameter is invalid for nonswitched
lines.

Notes:
1. Normally, the diskette drive and system printer are
varied offline only in the event of failures.
2. After a VARY ON command has been entered, press
the Shift key and the Sys Req/ Attn key, and the Enter
key before trying to sign on.

System COllsoJe O-PElraHon

4-55

Example

The system printer has been taken offline. To place the
printer online, enter:
VARY ON,PRT or
V ON,PRT or
V ON,P

HOW TO EXCHANGE DEVICE IDs (ASSIGN COMMAND)
The ASSIGN control command temporarily exchanges the I Ds of two display
stations or two printers, or temporarily assigns another printer as the system
printer. You can use ASSIGN to assign an alternative display station or printer
for an inoperative display station or printer. The original IDs are restored the
next time you do an IPL. The ASSIGN command can also activate or de-activate
subconsole display stations.
When you exchange the I Ds of two devices, both devices must be offline. Refer to
How to Take Local or Remote Devices Online and Offline (VARY Command)
in this chapter for further information.

Command Format

ASSIGN
(A)

ws-id1
NOSUB
SUB
PRT

,ws-id2

(P)

Parameters

ws-id1: The I D of the display station or printer that will
have the new 10, ws-id2.
NOSUB: De-activates the subconsole function for the
subconsole specified by ws-id2.
SUB: Activates the subconsole function for the subconsole specified by ws-id2.
PRT: Assigns the printer specified by ws-id2 as the
system printer.
ws-id2: The temporary I D given to the device with
ws-id1, or the 10 of a display station that will either
be assigned or revoked subconsole support. If PRT
is entered in the first parameter position, ws-id2 is
the work station 10 of a printer that is to be assigned
as the system printer.

Note: ASSIGN SUB is needed in only two cases:

4-56

•

If ASSIGN NOSUB has been issued for that work station

•

If the subconsole is an alternative console and was returned to alternative status
because another display station was made the system console

Example

Work station W3 is inoperative; to exchange lOs with
work station W1, enter:
ASSIGN W1 ,W3 or
A W1,W3

MESSAGES
Messages can appear at the system console to indicate (1) incorrect program operation (of programs run either from your display station or from other display
stations), (2) device errors, or (3) information or instructions for you. A message
intended for the system console operator is called a system log message.
Messages originally appear at the bottom of the display but are rolled up as additional
messages come to your display station.
While you operate the system console, you may hear a buzzer or see the Message
Waiting indicator. The following types of indications and messages can occur at
your system console:
•

Buzzer, no Message Waiting indicator:
A system log message at the bottom of the display. The message may have
options (0, 1,2,3) that must be responded to.

•

No buzzer, no Message Waiting indicator:
Control command errors that require correction
- Informational messages from a procedure that requires no action

•

Buzzer and Message Waiting indicator:
A message sent by an MSG command from a display station
Printer-intervention-required messages that require you to resolve the
problem before you reply to the message

•

Flashing four-digit number in the bottom left corner of the screen, no buzzer, no
Message Waiting indicator: a keyboard error that must be corrected. Either press
the Error Reset key and correct the error, or press the Help key for additional
information.

Note: If the buzzer sounds and no apparent message has been sent, it may be

because the job that sent the message completed processi ng and the message sent
during processing was destroyed. This happens if the configuration option to keep
informational messages at end of job was not taken.
If the Message Waiting indicator remains on after all messages currently displayed
have been handled, do the following to display the message:
1.

Press the Enter/Rec Adv key.

If the message appears, respond to the message. (If no message appears but
the Message Waiting indicator turns off, the system has recovered from the
error. )

If no message appears but the indicator remains on, you must switch to
display station mode.
a. Press the Sys Req key with the Shift key.
b. Press the Enter/Rec Adv key.
c. Enter MSG to display the message.
System Console Operation

4-57

System messages (along with OCl statements and commands) are written to the
history file on disk. This occurs when the message is issued and again when (and if)
you respond to the message. The history file will contain a log of everything that
has occurred in the system, in the order in which it occurred, up to the capacity of
the file. The history file is a wrap-around area; when the file is full, the newest
entry replaces the oldest entry.
Figure 4-1 shows an example of messages displayed at the system console.

SYSTEM
01

CONSOLE

AVAILABLE

USER

MAIN STORAGE AREA IS 42K

ENTER
S P

VOLUME

START

CCm1At\!) SUCCESSFUL
OPT!O:\S (01
)

FOR

OUTPUT DISKETTE

-I---eorr- SYS-1405

Rij....

PAGES

PRINTER Pl •••

3,PMODS2

CGr-lt1AHD SUCCESSFUL

CO~:t-1A!;/D

SUCCESSFUL
,NAtlE-NEIHtNT
S1'5-2509 OPTIO;,lS ( 1 3)
LI8~ARY-O

#LIBRARY--SPECIFIED

~lcl~SERS

W3133735----+---··

NOT IN THIS LIBRARY

Figure 4-1. Example of Messages Displayed at the System Console

4-58

The reply 10, used with the REPLY command when responding to this
message. Some informational messages do not have reply IDs.
The message identifier, which consists of three or four characters followed by
four numbers. Each message that has an identifier other than USE R is
documented in the Displayed Messages Guide. You can us~ the character code
to find the appropriate chapter in the guide. The character codes are:
SYS-System Support Program Product
KBD-Keyboard
RPG-RPG II
SORT-Sort Program
DFU-Data File Utility
SEU-Source Entry Utility
WSU-Work Station Utility
ASM-Assembler
SDA-Screen Design Aid
FORT-FORTRAN
CBl - COBOL
BAS - BASIC
CGU - Character Generator Utility
SRTX - Ideographic Sort
EM U - 3270 Device Emulation
ESU - 3270 Device Emulation

The messages are listed in sequence within each chapter according to the fourdigit number (this number is called a message identification code).

The options list: the val id responses for this message. See the Displayed
Messages Guide for a complete description of the options. Possible options
and responses are:
Option 0: When you select this option, generally the error is ignored and
the job continues. Always refer to the Recovery part of each message
description in the Displayed Messages Guide for specific details before
selecting this option.
Option 1: When you select this option, generally you can retry the operation causing the error and continue the job. Always refer to the Recovery
part of each message description in the Displayed Messages Guide before

selecting this option.
Option 2: Select this option to end the job step. Any new data created up

to this point is preserved and you can continue with the next job step.
Option 3: Select this option to cancel the job. Any new data created or

work done by a previous job step is preserved; however, any new data
created or work done by the current job step is lost.
Option D: This option is available at the system console whenever an
option 3 is shown on the display screen; however, option D is never
shown on the display and is seldom in the message description in the
Displayed Messages Guide. When you select option D, the contents of
main storage are copied to the dump area on disk, unless a protected dump
exists in the dump area on disk. The system action described for option 3
occurs.

After a dump is taken, you should save the information in the dump area
on disk by using the APAR procedure or the DUMP procedure.

The eight-character, system-assigned ID of the job that received the message.
This field will show SYSTEM if this message was issued by a system function.
If this message is from a display station via the MSG command, this ID does
not appear. Instead, the ID of the display station that sent the message
appears at the front of the message text.
The message text. If the console was switched from ideographic capable to
nonideographic, messages that contained ideographic characters will display
periods.
Three periods at the end of the message text indicate that there is additional
information that you can display for the message. Refer to Figure 4-2 and
4-3 for sample Additional Information display and an explanation of how to
show the additional information.

System ~onsoleOperation

4-59

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

SELECT OPTION 0 TO PRINT WITHOUT SEPARATOR PAGES.
SELECT OPTION 1 TO PRINT WITH SEPARATOR PAGES.
SELECT OPTION 2, IF PRESENT, TO STOP SPOOL WRITER

Figure 4-2. Sample Additional Information Display for Message SVS·1405

Press the Enter/Rec Adv key to return to the original display so that you can
respond to the message.
Figure 4-3 is a guide to help you respond to messages that appear at the
system console. This guide assumes that a one-line or two-line message is on
the display.

4-60

READY

Displayed Messages

">----~

Yes

You can find a complete description of
the message and recovery actions in the

The message is informational. No
reply is required.

The message is not documented and
should indicate your recovery action.
If message has reply ID and no options,
reply with the message ID or the
REPLY I command.

If the message ends with three periods,
additional information can be displayed.
Key REPLY x and press Enter, or key x
and press Enter where x is the one- or
two-digit reply ID of the message. Figure 4-2 shows an example of the displayed additional information. Press
Enter to return to the original display.

Displayed Messages
Guide.

Reply to the message
(refer to How to Reply to a Message in
this chapter).

Figure 4-3. Guide to Responding to a Message at the System Console

System Console Operation

4-61

Keyboard Errors
Keyboard errors are indicated by a flashing four-digit number in the lower-left
corner of the display. If you know the cause of the error, press the Error Reset key
and rekey the required data. If you do not know the cause of the error, press the
Help key. A message appears on the bottom line of the display (see Figure 4-4).
If you need an explanation of the message, refer to the KBO section of the
Displayed Messages Guide and then take the recommended recovery action.

,
W2

COM~lAND

ENTER COMMAND OR OCl STATEr-lENT.

<- REt-.DY
KBD-OOOS CURSOR IN PROTECTED AREA OF DISPLAY

Figure 4-4. Sample Keyboard Error Display, After. the Help Key Has Been Pressed

How to Send a Message

ALL} ' message text
{

Command Format

MSG

Parameters

ALL: Sends the message to all display stations that are
varied online. If the message contains ideographic characters, only ideographic-capable devices will receive the
message.

ws-id.
user-Id

ws-id: The two-character 10 of the work station that

receives the message. You can use the STATUS WORKSTN
control command to determine work station lOs.

4-62

user-id: The user ID of the operator that receives the
message. Each operator enters a user ID on his Si gn On
display to start his work session. You can use the STATUS
WORKSTN contro~-command to determine user IDs.
Note: If you enter either a work station I D or a user ID that
is not on the system, the system will return a diagnostic message informing you of this. If you send a message with userid in parameter 1 and that user is signeu on al more than one
work station, the message is sent to only one of the work
stations.

message text: As many as 60 characters of text are allowed.
If you need to send more than 60 characters, you will have
to send more than one message.
Note: If you specify Y (yes) for IGC session at sign on,
and if you are sending a message to an ideographic-capable
display station, the message text may contain ideographic
characters.

How to Reply to a Message
If you are operating the system console in command or data entry mode and a
message is sent to the system console, the buzzer will sound and the message light
will turn on. There are two ways to reply to the message and then resume the data
entry job. You can press the shift and Sys Req keys and the Enter key. This will
put your display station in system console mode, and the message will be displayed.
By pressing the shift and Sys Req keys and the Enter key again, you can return to
command or data entry mode. The second way to respond to message indicators
is to press the Attn key, placing your display station in inquiry mode. If the
message is a system message, enter MSG. Respond to the message if necessary and
press the Enter key. The Inquiry display will appear. Take option 0 (resume
interrupted job) to return to your job.
You must use the REPLY control command to reply to all messages that have
reply IDs. After you have responded to a message, the screen shows two asterisks
'**) replacing the reply ID. Messages that you have replied to roll up and off the
top of the display. Messages that you have not replied to do not roll off the display
until you reply.

Control Command

I
}
REPLY C
{
(R)
msg-id [,response]

Parameters

I: Responds to all informational messages on the display.
(You must enter either R or REPLY and I.)

Compresses a display so that only messages that need
responses are displayed. (You must enter either R or
REPLY and C.)

System Console Operation

4-63

msg-id: The 10 of the message that you are responding to.
You can omit the left zero of a reply 10; R 01,3 and R 1,3

are equivalent responses. The command name d:~ EPL Y or
R) is not required when msg-id is used.

response: Your response to the message (blank, 0, 1,2,

3, or D). The comma should.not be keyed in if your
response is blank.
To respond with a 3 option to message 02, enter:

Example

REPLY 2,3 or
R 2,3 or
2,3 (For the REPLY control command, you can enter
only the message 10 and option.)
For those messages that are classified as printer intervention required, the REPLY
control command has no effect. You should ready the printer to reply to the
message.
See the Displayed Messages Guide for explanations of response options. Also see
the System Support Reference Manual for an explanation of the D (dump) option.

How to Suppress Informational Messages
The IDELETE control command specifies whether informational messages directed to
the system console are immediately displayed. An informational message is one that
does not require an operator response. If IDE LETE is active (ON), messages that do
not need a response will not cause the buzzer to sound and will not turn on the
Message Waiting indicator. Informational messages generated by system security,
however are not suppressed. For example, if you make a typing error when entering
your user 10, a message is displayed. Informational messages might also be overlaid
by other messages and therefore might not be displayed. IDELETE is useful when
you are operating as a system console operator and do not want to be interrupted
by informational messages.
I

[~~J

Command Format

IDELETE

Parameters

ON: Informational messages are automatically replied to
and might not be displayed.
OFF: Informational messages are displayed and should
be replied to with the REPLY control command.
Note: If you sign off and messages designated for the

system console are still pending, these messages will be
displayed the next time you sign on the system console.

4-64

HOW TO DISPLAY THE TIME

The TIME command displays the time of day and the system date.
Command Format

TIME

Example

TIME-14:56:23

DATE-07/19/80

HOW TO SHUT DOWN SYSTEM/34

Command Format

STOP SYSTEM [
(P)

(S)

]
,SORT
NOSORT
,

The STOP SYSTEM control command causes the following to occur:
•

For each input operation to a program, a condition code indicating STOP SYSTEM
is returned to the program along with the input data. Programs can check for this
condition, save their data files, and end as soon as possible.

•

Initiation of jobs and certain control commands on the system stops. New jobs
cannot be initiated from the system console, any display station, the input job
queue, or the spool file.
You must respond to all messages at the console that require responses before shutdown can complete. When the system has stopped, a message is displayed at the
system console informing you of this.
When all activity stops (indicated by the System In Use light turning off), enter OFF
and, if necessary, set the Power switch on the operator panel to the 0 position to
turn power off.
If you allow the SORT default, index keys are sorted as part of the system shutdown.
If you specified NOSORT, indexed keys are not sorted.

HOW TO RESTART SYSTEM/34

The START SYSTEM control command resumes the system activity that was
stopped by a STOP SYSTEM control command. If you turned power off after the
STOP SYSTEM control command, you must do an IPL to resume system activity;
the START SYSTEM control command is not required after IPL.
Command Format

START SYSTEM
(S)

(S)

System Console Operation

4-65

SETTING THE PRINT BELT IMAGE AFTER CHANGING THE PRINT BELT
After changing the print belt on the line printer (see the 5211 Operator's Guide or
the 3262 Operator's Guide for instructions), you must change the print belt image
to match the new belt. To change this image, use the SET procedure command
with only the source name parameter:
SET, source name

source name: The name of the print belt member that contains the new print belt characters for the line printer.

The print b-e1t member names are tisted -in -the following t-a-ble;
Print Belt Member Name

Associated Printers

BELT48
BELT64
BELT96
BELT188
BELT48HN
BE LT64B Standard
BE LT64C Optimized
BELT188B

5211
5211
5211
5211
5211
3262
3262
3262

or 3262 Printers
Printer
or 3262 Printers
Printer
or 32.62 Printers
Printer
Printer
Printer

Note: The belt member name is referred to as the UCSB (Universal Character Set
Buffer) in the 3262 Printer Operator's Guide.

You can verify that you have selected the correct characters by entering the
STATUS SESSION command and checking the IMAGE CHARACTERS line on the
second session status screen. Refer to How to Display the Status of Your Work
Session in Chapter 2 of this Manual.
Refer to the System Support Reference Manual for additional information on the
SET procedure.

JOB CONTROL FROM THE SYSTEM CONSOLE
This section explains how to:
•

Display job status

•

Stop job initiation

•

Stop job execution

•

Restart job initiation

•

Restart job execution

•

Cancel an executing job

•

Change the priority of an executing job

If job initiation is stopped, display station operators cannot start jobs. If job execution is stopped, only the specified job is stopped and display station operators can
still start jobs.
4-66

How to Display Job Status
The Users Status display shows the status of jobs that are running on the system.
Command Format

STATUS USERS [,jobname]
(D)

(U)

USERS: Displays the status of all user jobs running on
the system (if you do not specify a jobname) or displays
the status of one job (the jobname). Figure 4-5 shows
and explains the Users Status display.

Parameters

jobname: The 8-character, system-assigned name of the
job for which status information is displayed.

WI
JOB

PRCCED~RE

PROGRAM

STATUS

TYPE

PRTY

REG/PROS

W2130113

BlDtlDU

BlDF

ACTIVE

SRT

NORM

10K/10K

Only one line appears
on this display if you
specify jobname.

-..,.-t---nnER

F-FOR1~ARD,

I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END • • • • • • • • F

Figure 4-5. Users Status Display

JOB gives the system assigned jobname for each user task in the system.
System tasks such as spool writer are not listed. The jobname is of the
format WWHHMMSS where:
WW = work station ID of the display station which initiated this job
HHMMSS = the time in hours, minutes, and seconds when the job was
submitted.

e
•

PROCEDURE gives the initial procedure name if the job was run from a
procedure. This is the name of the outermost procedure .
COMPLETE appears only on the last page of the job status.

System Console Operation

4-67

•

PROG RAM is the currently active program name. This changes from one job
step to another. If the screen has been displayed for a while, the program
name displayed may not be the currently active program. To see the currently
active program name" enter a U (update) and press the Enter/Rec Adv key .
STATUS is one of the following:
ACTIVE:

The job is not swapped out and no wait conditions were
detected.

INITIATOR:

The job is in the initiator initiating the next step. Since
some of the job status data, such as PROCEDURE and
PROGRAM, is not predictable when the job is in the
initiator, these fields will contain -----.

10 ERROR:

The job has been suspended due to an input/output
error.

STOPPED:

The job has been stopped by the system operator via the
STOP command

SETDUMP:

The job has been suspended because the SETDUMP command
was entered.

TERMINATE:

The job is in termination. As with INITIATOR, some
of the other data is unpredictable and the fields will contain -----.

SWAPPED:

The job has been swapped out to disk.

INQUIRY:

The user was running the job and interrupted with
inquiry.

IN CANCEL:

The job has been canceled but is not yet gone.

TWA-WAIT:

The job is waiting for space in the task work area.

Note: If this condition occurs frequently, it may be
necessary to expand the size of the task work area by
reconfiguring the system.

4-68

PRT-WAIT:

The job is waiting to allocate the printer.

LINE-WAIT:

The job is waiting for a communications line.

11-WAIT:

The job is waiting for the diskette drive.

DISK-WAIT:

The job is waiting for disk space.

INIT-WAIT:

The initiator is waiting for resources (this also causes
dashes in some of the other fields).

o
CD

MSG-WAIT:

The job is waiting for a message response from the system
operator.

EDF-WAIT:

File extension is currently taking place.

CHECKPNT:

A checkpoint is currently taking place.

TYPE contains three fields of data. The first field, if it is not blank, indicates
that the job is a never-ending-program (NEP). The second field indicates what
type of program is running (MRT, SRT, NRT, or JBQ). The third field appears
only for MRTs, and it indicates the number of MRT requesters. If the task is
being checkpointed, a -C will appear immediately after the last non-blank
field.
PRTY identifies the priority of the job. HIGH indicates the program is running
with user defined high priority; MED I UM indicates the program is running
with medium priority; NORM indicates the program is running with normal
priority; LOW indicates the program is running with low priority.
Note: Normal priority is equivalent to medium priority unless the job is a
batch job. In that case, the system may change a job from normal to
medium-low priority. (Medium-low priority cannot be assigned by an operator.)

CONSOLE indicates the STATUS USERS command was issued from console
mode, and system console commands are valid with the I option.

•

REG is the number of bytes (in K) of the region being used by this task. This
value is the actual amount of region reserved by the task .
PROG is the number of bytes (in K) of the actual storage size being used by
this task.
This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if F were pressed.

System Console Operation

4-69

How to Stop Job Initiation

Command Format

STOP WORKSTN {,WS-id}-

(P)

Parameters

(W)

,ALL

WaR KSTN: Stops the initiation of Jobs and entry
of the JOBQ control command from one or all ~splay
stations. Any Jobs that are already running when
you enter the STOP control command will run to
completion.

ws-id: Display station 10. The command applies to the
specified display station.
ALL: The command applies to all display stations.
Example

To stop initiation of jobs from display station Wl, enter:
STOP WORKSTN,Wl or
P W,Wl

How to Stop Job Execution
You can use the STOP control command to:
•

Suspend a job that appears to be holding control of the system

•

Suspend individual jobs in order to run an important job or a job that must be
run when no other jobs are running

Note: If you stop a job that has been taken off the input job queue and the job
is running, no new jobs will be taken from the input job queue for processing.

Command Format

STOP JOB -{ ,jobname }

(P)

Parameters

,ALL

JOB: Suspends the execution of one or all jobs and the
initiation of jobs (except from the system console).
jobname: The 8-character, system-assigned job name of
the job to be stopped. You can use the STATUS USERS
control command to determine the job's name.

ALL: The command applies to all currently running
tasks and prevents initiation of other user tasks.
Example:

To stop job W2010112, enter:
STOP JOB,W2010112 or
P JOB,W2010112

4-70

How to Stop SSP-ICF Subsystem Sessions
You can use the STOP control command to stop requests to evoke any SSP-ICF
subsystem sessions.
Command Format

STOP SESSION
(P)

Parameters

(N)

SESSION: Stops the initiation of jobs from incoming

SSP-ICF sessions.
Example

To stop initiation of jobs from incoming SSP-ICF
sessions, enter:
STOP SESSION or

PN
How to Start SSNCF Subsystem Sessions
You can use the START command to initiate SSP-ICF subsystem sessions after
they have been stopped.
Command Format

START SESSION
(S)

Parameters

(N)

SESSION: Resumes the system activity that was

stopped by a STOP SESSION control command.
Example

To start initiation of jobs from incoming SSP-ICF
sessions, enter:
START SESSION or

System

Con~ole

Qperation _

4~71

How to Restart Job Initiation
You can use the START control command to resume initiation of one or all jobs
that you stopped via a STOP control command.

Command Format

START WORKSTN {,WS-id}
(S)
(W)
,ALL

Parameters

WORKSTN: Allows initiation of jobs and entry of
control commands from one or all display stations for
which you entered a STOP WOR KSTN control command.

ws-id: Display station I D. The command applies to
the specified display station.
ALL: Allows the operator to initiate jobs and enter control commands.
Example

To restart initiation of jobs from display station W1, enter:
START WORKSTN,W1 or
S W,W1

How to Restart Job Execution

Command Format

START JOB {,jObname}
(S)
,ALL

Parameters

JOB: Resumes execution of one job or all jobs stopped by
a STOP JOB control command.
jobname: The 8-character, system-assigned name of the job
to be started. You can use the STATUS USERS control
command to determine the job's name.

ALL: Resumes execution of all jobs stopped by STOP JOB
control command(s).
Example

To start job W201 0112 enter:
START JOB,W201 0112 or
S JOB,W2010112

4-72

How to Cancel an Executing Job

You can cancel an executing job via a CANCE L control command.

Command Format

CANCEL jobname
(C)

[l ]
,DUMP
(D)

Parameters

jobname: The 8-character, system-assigned name of the job

to cancel. You can use the STATUS USERS control command to determine the job's name.
2: Specifies a controlled cancel. All files used by the job
are closed. Remaining job steps do not execute.

3: Specifies an immediate cancel. Files used by the current
job step are not closed and new files created by the current
job step are lost. Remaining job steps do not execute.
DUMP: Specifies an immediate cancel; in addition, main

storage and control storage assigned to the job is written to
the dump area on disk (unless a protected dump exists in
the dump area). Remaining jobs steps do not execute, files
used by the current job step are not closed, and new files
created by the current job step are lost.
Example

To cancel job W2010112 and close files that the job uses,
enter:
CANCEL W2010112,2 or
C W2010112,2

System Console Operation

4-73

How to Change the Priority of an Executing Job
The PRTY command can be used to change the execution priority of a job. If
priority is specified for a certain job, that job will be given priority for resources
over other interactive or batch jobs running on the system. This will usually result
in faster job completion. However, other jobs running on the system may experience a decrease in response.

Command Format

HIGH
ON
MEDIUM
PRTY jobname', OFF
NORMAL
LOW

Parameters

jobname: The 8-character system-assigned name of the job
whose priority changes. You can use the STATUS USERS
control command to determine the job's name. If the
job is on the input job queue, you can use the STATUS
JOBO command to determine its name.

HIGH: The highest level priority you can set for your job's
execution. System resources are assigned to a high priority
job before they are assigned to any other job.

ON: The default. ON is equivalent to HIGH.

MEDIUM: The second level of priority for a job's execution.

NORMAL: The third level of priority for a job's execution.
NORMAL overrides any other priority specified within
the job.
OFF: The equivalent of NORMAL, but does not override
any other priority specified within the job.
LOW: The lowest level of priority you can set for your
job's execution. System resources are assigned to any
higher priority jobs before they are assigned to a job with
low priority.
You should reserve HIGH or ON for jobs that must have the highest available
priority.
For a job that requires high priority, key in PRTY ,H IGH or PRTY ,ON or just
PRTY. Press the Enter key and then enter the OCL statements, procedure, or
menu number for the job you want to execute.
To assign a job a specified position on the input job queue, use the JOBO command. See the sections on JOBO in Chapter 2.
Example

To assign high priority to job W2010112, enter:
PRTY W2010112,HIGH
PRTY W2010112,ON
PRTY W2010112

4-74

PRINT SPOOLING-CONTROL FROM THE SYSTEM CONSOLE

This section contains all of the operating information necessary for the system
operator to control print spooling. For further information about print spooling,
refer to the following manuals:
•

The Planning Guide, which contains general information on print spooling.

• The Concepts and Design Guide, which contains additional general information
as well as performance considerations for print spooling.
• The System Support Reference Manual, which contains a detailed description
of the PRINTER OCl statement, which can be used by the programmer to
control spooled output. Chapter 3 of the System Support Reference Manual
also describes the operator commands for controlling print spooling. However,
that description gives the programmer only general information about the
control commands and their functions.
• The Installation and Modification Reference Manual, which contains information
on the different print spooling options available at system configuration time.
In an environment that generates a large amount of printer output, the system
frequently must wait for a printer to complete printing before it can continue
processing. Print spooling allows you to make more efficient use of th,e processing
unit and printers. Print spool ing is a part of the System/34 SSP that stores print
data on disk for printing later. It can be used with batch processing to allow
the processing unit and a printer to operate as fast as possible. Print spooling
normally reduces program execution time.
With print spooling, job output for a printer is intercepted and stored on disk in a
spool file. Upon your request, the stored output prints while another job executes.
The other job may also have printed output that is spooled. Processing with print
spooling allows programs to execute without waiting for a printer.
Print spooling is selected during system configuration. At that time, the autowriter
option can also be chosen. The autowriter option causes the spool writer(s) to be
started automatically during IPL. If the autowriter option is not selected, you must
enter the appropriate START PRT command in order to start the spool writer(s).
Once the spool writers have been started, they will begin printing whenever there
is data ready to print.

System Console Operation

4-75

Once configured in System/34, you can modify spooling during IPL in the following
ways:
• Cancel print spooling
•

Delete the spool fi Ie

• Specify the default (spool-yes or no) for work station printers that are not the
system printer
• Change the spool writer buffer size
• Change the autowriter option
• Change the size of the disk area reserved for the spool file
• Change the size of the spool file segments
• Change the preferred location of the spool file
• Delete all existing entries in the spool file
Refer to IPL from Disk, earlier in this chapter, for an explanation of the displays
that allow these modifications.

Control of Print Spooling
To control the spool file, the system operator uses the control commands described
on the following pages.

How to Display Spool File Entries
The Spooled Print Status display shows entries that are in the spool file.
Command Format

STATUS PRT Gws-id]
(D)

Parameter

(P)

PRT: Displays entries in the spool file. Refer to Figure 4-6
for an explanation of the display that appears.
ws-id: Displays only the entries to be printed on the printer
with the specified work station 10. If you do not enter this
parameter, all entries are displayed.

Example

STATUS PRT or

o P

4-76

oe eGO

\=1.:\~jLD"
BLOCKS

P~S

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

AVAILA~LE:

PROC

JOBNAHE

USER

SPOOOO
SPOOOI
SPOOO2
SPOO06
SPOO07
SPOO08
SPOO09
SPOOI0
SPOOll

PROC2
PROC2
PROC2
PROC2
PROC2
PROC1
PROCI
PROC1

1012140104
1012140104
1012140104
1012140104
1012140104
1012140200
1012140200
1012140200
1012140436

JEN
JEN
JEN
JEN
JEN
JEN
JEN
JEN
JEN

80Ge

.E1itE

'1152
CQMP
1098 OF
PRINTER 10 PRTY FORM COpy
PLINE1
PLINE2
PLINE3
PLINE7
PLINE8

P2 A2
P2 2H
P2 1
P2 C1
P2 1
P2 1
PLU~E1
PLINE2
P2 1
PLINE3
P2 1
PRIHTKEY P2 1

0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001
0001

JW2
-- PAGES--TOTAL
IoIRT

3
1
1 *****3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
3
1
1
1

ENTER F-FORIoIARO, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO .••.••..•••••

2
5

Figure 4·6. Spooled Print Status Display

e
E)

G
G

e
o

POS: the relative position of the entry in the spool file.
10: the name assigned by this system to this print file. This is the spool 10
used with the spool commands.
PROC: the outermost procedure name associated with this entry. If this
entry is blank, the job was run through OCl (1/ lOAD).
BLOCKS AVAI lABlE: the number of blocks available in the spool file
or the number of extents that can still be allocated on disk out of the total
number that can be allocated if space is available. The spool file is full when
the first number is zero.
JOBNAME: the job name assigned by the system (work station 10 and time).
HELD: indicates that the entire spool file is being held. No jobs can be
printed until the spool file is released by the RELEASE PRT command.
Jobs can still be written to the spool file.
USE R: the user 10 associated with this entry
COMPLETE: appears only if this is the last screen of the Spooled Print Status
display.

System Console Operation

4-77·

PRI NTER: the printer file name associated with this job.

•

ID: the ID of the printer that output is to be routed to.

•

COPY: the number of copies remaining to be printed; default is 1 unless
changed on a PRINTER statement or by the CHANGE command. If the job
is being printed, this value includes the copy being printed .

•

TOTAL: the total number of pages of output generated. If the number is
preceded by one or more asterisks, the print entry is still being created and
the number indicates which page is being created. If the page count is
zero and there are no asterisks displayed with the zero, the system failed
before the spool file entry was completed.
WRT: the page number that is being printed. If a spool file entry is being
printed by the spool writer, this column indicates the page number that is
being printed. If the spool writer is stopped while printing a spool file
entry, this column indicates the page number that was being printed by the
spool writer when it was stopped.

4·78

This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R,
U, or E, the system will page forward as if F were entered.

How to Start a Spool Writer

r,L,

Command Format

START PRT, [forms number]
(S)
(P)

WS-idJ
ALL

Parameters

PRT: Starts spool writers for the printers. The PRT
parameter can be used to start the spool writer(s) after
IPL. (If the autowriter function is active, the spool writers
are automatically started during IPL and you need not
enter a START PRT command.) The PRT parameter can
also be used to start the spool writer(s) after the STOP PRT
command has been entered to stop the spool writer(s);
when a spool writer is started, printing begins with the
first available entry on the spool file.
forms number: Only entries using the specified
forms number are printed. Up to four characters can be
specified. If a forms number is not specified, all entries
can be printed regardless of the forms number that is
required.

ws-id: ID of the printer for which the spool writer is to
be started. If you omit this parameter, the spool writer
for the printer assigned as the system printer will be
started.

ALL: Start spool writers for all printers.
Note: When a spool writer is started, printing normally
begins with the first available spool file entry. However,
printing may not begin for one of the following reasons:

• The entire spool file has been held by the system
operator.
•

The system has been stopped by the system operator.

•

The spool file is empty or does not contain any entries
that are available for printing on the specified printer.
Spoolfitetmtrles may not be available for printing if
they are held, being copied by the COPYPRT procedure,
still being created, or if they require different forms than
the spool writer is using (if the spool writer was started
with a forms number specified).

• There are insufficient system resources available to
allow the spool writer to begin printing.
• The printer is being used by another program, is offline,
is not powere~ on, or requires some other operator
intervention, such as correcting a paper jam. In any of
these cases, the spool writer attempts to begin printing
and issues a message when the condition is detected.

System Console Operation

4-79

How to Stop a Spool Writer
Command Format

STOP PRT, [PAGE] [,WS-idJ
(P)
(P)
JOB
,ALL

Parameters

PRT: Stops spool writers for the printers. If an entry is
being printed, printing stops. You can restart the printing
by entering the START PRT control command or the
RESTART PRT control command. Entries can be added
to the spool file when the writer is stopped, but the
entries cannot be printed until the spool writer is started
or restarted.
PAGE: Stops the spool writer for the specified printer
(ws-id) after the current page has completed printing.

JOB: Stops the spool writer for the specified printer
(ws-id) after the current spool file entry has completed
printing.

ws-id: 10 of the printer for which the spool writer is
to be stopped. If you omit this parameter, the spool
writer for the printer assigned as the system printer will
be stopped.
ALL: Stops the spool writers for all printers.

4-80

How to Restart a Spool Writer
Command Format

RESTART PRT, [page number] [,ws-id]
(T)

(P)

PRT: Restarts the spool writer for the specified printer.
page number: The number of the page where printing of
the current entry restarts. If the page number is not specified, printing restarts at the beginning of the printed output.
The maximum page number you can specify is 65,535.

ws-id: The work station ID of the printer for which the
spool writer is to be restarted. If you omit this parameter,
the spool write-r for the printer assigned as the system
printer will be restarted.
Note: If a RESTART command is entered and the writer
is not printing a spool file entry and no entries on the spool
file were being printed when the writer was stopped, the
first entry on the spool file will be printed starting from
page 1 even if a page number was specified.
Example

Example A

To restart printing of the current spool file entry at the top
of page 6 on the system printer, enter:
RESTART PRT,6 or
T P,6
Example 8

The entry currently being printed contains 300 pages of
printed output to the system printer. Only the last 50
pages of output are required. Once the job has begun
printing, the operator can use the following command
to print the last 50 pages:
RESTART PRT,251 or
T P,251

System Console Operation

4-81

How to Display the Spool-Writer Status
The Spool Writer Status display shows the status of the spool writer program for
each printer.
CommaAd-Format

STATUS WRT [,ws-id]
(D)
(WRT)

Parameters

WRT: Displays the status of the spool writer for each
printer. Refer to Figure 4-7 for an explanation of the
display that appears.

w&id:- The. workstation 10 of the printer for which the
spool writer status information is to be displayed. If you
do not specify a printer ID, the spool writer status information for all printers is displayed.
Example

STATUS WRT or
D
WRT

•e
r

:::~RITER

•

e 0

•
STATUS

IT 7Wl

PRT
ID

CTRl
CNSl

HSG

ACTIVE

RES

PRTY

SEP
PAGES

PI
P2
P3
P4

WI
WI
Xl
WI

N
N
N
N

STARTED
STOPPED
STARTED
STOPPED

N
Y
N
Y

N
N
N
N

0
1
I
I

FORMS

SPOOL
ID

0001
0001
0001
0001

SP0003 CATALOG

PROC
NAME

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR- E-"END •••••••••..•• F

Figure 4-7. Spool Writer Status Display

4-82

e
CD

PRT ID: the work station ID of the printer.
CTR L CNSL: the work station ID of the display station that controls the
printer. If the printer is currently controlled by a subconsole, the work
station ID of the subconsole is displayed; if the printer is not currently controlled by a subconsole, the system console work station ID is displayed.
MSG: Y specifies that a spool writer message is pending. N specifies that
no spool writer messages are pending.
ACTIVE: indicates one of the following for the status of the spool writer:
• STARTED: indicates that the spool writer is started.
• STARTED forms number: indicates that the spool writer is started and
will print only the jobs that require the forms number that was specified
with the START PRT command.
•

RESTARTED: indicates that the subconsole operator or the system
operator has entered the REST ART command and that the spool writer
has been restarted.

• STOPPED: indicates that the spool writer is stopped.
• STOP PAGE: indicates that the spool writer is stopped when it finishes
printing the current page because the STOP PRT command was entered
with the PAG E parameter.
• STOP JOB: indicates that the spool writer is stopped when it finishes
printing the current job because the STOP PRT command was entered
with the JOB parameter.
• STOP SYSTEM: indicates that the spool writer is started but that the
system operator has entered a STOP SYSTEM command; therefore, the
spool writer cannot perform any printing until the system operator
enters a START SYSTEM command.
•

QUEUE HELD: indicates that the spool writer is started but that the
system operator has entered the HOLD PRT command; therefore, the
spool queue is held and the spool writer cannot perform any printing
until the system operator enters a RELEASE PRT command.

System Console Operation

4-83

RES: Y specifies that the spool writer is resident. N specifies that the
spool writer is swappable.

•

PRTY: indicates the priority assigned to this spool writer: H indicates a
high priority and N indicates a normal priority.

•

SEP PAGES: indicates the number of separator pages that are printed
preceding each spool file entry.

o
e

FORMS: indicates the forms number that the spool writer is currently
using for printing.
SPOOL 10: is the 6-character system-assigned name of the entry on the
spool file that the spool writer is currently printing.
PROC NAME: is the name of the procedure that created the spool file entry
that the spool writer is currently printing.

Notes:
1. The spool-id and the procedure name are both blank if the spool writer is not
printing a spool file entry.
2. The spool-id and the procedure name are both displayed if the spool writer is
currently printing a spool file entry .

•

4-84

How to Cancel Spool File Entries

Command Format

Parameters

CANCEL PRT
(C)
(P)

{::~~I-id}
,ws-id

PRT: Cancels the specified entry (spool-id), all spool file
entries for a specified printer (ws-id), or all spool file
entries on the spool file.
spool-id: The 6-character spool file ID, beginning with the
characters SP. You can use the STATUS PRT control
command to determine the spool file ID of the entry to
be cancelled.

ALL: Deletes all entries from the spool file except any
entries being copied by the COPYPRT procedure or any
entries that are still being created.
ws-id: The work station ID of the printer for which all
entries are to be cancelled. Any entries being copied by
the COPYPRT procedure or any entries that are still
being created are not cancelled.

Note: When Allor a printer ID is specified, the system
indicates the CANCEL command is successful, even though
there may not have been any spool file entries cancelled
by the command.

Example

To cancel all entries on the spool file, enter:
CANCEL PRT,Allor
C P,All

System Console Operation

4-85

How to Hold Spool File Entries
Command Format

Parameters

HOLD PRT
(H)
(P)

[,S. PO~I-id]
,ws-Id

PRT: Holds the specified entry (spool-id) or all spool file
entries on the spool file to be printed on the specified
printer. If neither the spool-id parameter nor the ws-id
parameter is specified, the entire spool file is held.

spool-id: The 6-character spool file 10, beginning with
the characters SP, of the entry to hold. You can use the
STATUS PRT control command to determine the spool
file 10 of the entry to be held.
ws-id: The work station 10 of the printer for which all
entries are to be held.
Notes:
1. You can enter the HOLD command even before the
program creating the spool file entry has terminated.
2. If you specify a HOLD command for an entry while it
is printing, the spool writer no longer prints that entry
but begins printing the next entry on the spool file.
The held entry will not be printed until a RELEASE
command control is entered for the held entry.
3. If you specify a HOLD command for all spool file
entries for a printer while the spool writer is printing
an entry on that printer, the spool writer will no longer
print that entry nor any other entry in the spool file.
As new entries are added to the spool file they may be
printed, but entries that were in the spool file when
the HOLD command was entered cannot be printed
until they are released by the RELEASE command.
4. If you enter a HOLD command without specifying a
spool-id or a ws-id, the entire spool file is held. Spool
file entries currently being printed are allowed to finish
printing, but n.Qotber spool file entries can be printed
until the RELEASE PRT command is entered (with
no other parameters). Holding and releasing the entire
spool file in this way has no effect on the held status
of individual spool file entries.

Example

To hold entry SP0036 on the spool file, enter:
HOLD PRT,SP0036 or
H P,SP0036
Entry SP0036 will stop printing immediately.

4-86

How to Release Spool File Entries

Command Format

,SPOOI-idJ
RELEASE PRT ,AllH
[
(l)
(P)
,ws-id

Parameters

PRT: Indicates that a specified entry or all entries on the
spool file for all printers or for a specific printer should be
released. The RELEASE command releases spool file
entries that are held and makes them available for
printing. If a spool-id, the AllH parameter, or a ws-id
is not specified, the entire spool file is released, except
for entries that were held individually.
ALLH: Releases all entries that were either individually
held or put in the spool file with a PRINTER OCl statement that specified PRIORITY-O. The AllH parameter
does not release the entire spool file if the entire file was
held.

ws-id: The work station 10 of the printer for which all
entries are to be released for printing.
Note: When a spool file entry is released, the spool writer
normally begins printing the entry if the spool writer is
not already printing another spool file entry. However,
printing may not begin for one of the following reasons:
• The spool writer has been stopped by the subconsole
or system operator.
• The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The entire spool file
operator.

h~_~peen

held by the system

• The spool file entry is not available for printing
because the entry is still being created, is being copied
by the COPYPRT procedure, or requires a different
form than the spool writer is using (if the spool
writer was started with a forms number specified).
• There are insufficient system resources to allow the
spool writer to begin printing.
• The printer is offline, is not powered on, or requires
some other kind of operator intervention, such as
correcting a paper jam. The spool writer attempts
to start printing and issues a message when any of
these conditiens are detected.
System Console Operation

4-87

Example

Example A

To release entry SP0036 on the spool file, enter:
RELEASE PRT,SP0036 or
L P,SP0036
Example 8

To release the entire spool file if previously held using
the HOLD PRT command with no other parameters
specified, enter:
RELEASE PRT or

L P
Note: Individually held entries will continue to be held.

4-88

How to Change the Number of Printed Copie$ of Spool File Entries
Command Format

CHANGE COPI ES,nn,spool-id
(G)

Parameters

COPIES: Changes the number of copies of printed output
for an entry in the spool file. You can use the STATUS
PRT control command to determine the number of copies
remaining to be printed for all entries in the spool file.

nn: The number of copies to print for the entry. This
parameter can be from 1 through 99.

To change entry SPOOll on the spool file to print five copies
of output, enter:
CHANGE COPIES,5,SP0011 or
G COPIES,5,SPOOll

System Console Operation

4-89

How to Change the Defer Status of a Spool File Entry
Command Format

CHANGE DEFER,
(G)

Parameters

[~~SJ ,spool-id
-

DEFER: Indicates whether the spool file entry can be
printed while it is being created or only after it has been
created.
YES: Indicates that the spool file entry is to be printed
only after it has been created.
NO: Indicates that the spool file entry can be printed while
it is being created. NO is the default.
spool-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the

entry on the spool file, which begins with SP. You can use
the STATUS PRT control command to determine the spool
file ID of the entry for which the defer status is to be
changed.
Notes:

1. When the defer status of a spool file entry that is still
being created is changed to NO, the spool writer normally
begins printing the entry if the spool writer is not
already printing another spool file entry. However,
printing may not begin for one of the following reasons:
• The spool writer has been stopped by the subconsole
or system operator.
• The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The entire spool file has been held by the system
operator.
• The spool file entry is not available for printing
because the entry is held, is being copied by the
COPYPRT procedure, or requires a different form
than the spool writer is using (if the spool writer
was started with a forms number specified).
• There are insufficient system resources available
to allow the spool writer to begin printing.
• The printer is being used by another program, is
offline, is not powered on, or required some other
operator intervention, such as correcting a paper
jam. In any of these cases, the spool writer
attempts to begin printing and issues a message
when the condition is detected.

4-90

2. If you change the defer status to YES for an entry that
is being both created and printed, the spool writer will
no longer print that entry, but begins printing the next
entry in the spool file. The entry for which the defer
status was changed can be printed after it has been
created, or if the defer status is changed back to NO.
Example

To print entry SP0023 while it is being created, enter:
CHANGE DEFER,NO,SP0023 or
G DEFER"SP0023

System Console Operation

4-91

How to Change the Forms Number of Spool File Entries
Command Format

CHANGE FORMS,xxxx,spool-id
(G)

Parameters

FORMS: Changes the forms number to be used for an

entry on the spool file.

xxxx: The forms number of the forms to be used for the
entry. You can specify from 1 to 4 characters.
spool-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the
entry on the spool file. You can use the STATUS PRT
control command to determine the spool file 10 of the
entry on the spool file and the forms number for the
entry.
Notes:
1. An error message is issued if you attempt to change
the forms for an entry that is being printed by the
spool writer.
2. If the spool writer was started with a specified forms
number so that only the spool file entries that
required the specified forms are printed, and if the
CHANGE command is used to change the forms
number required by a spool file entry to the forms
number that the spool writer is printing, then the
spool writer normally begins printing the spool file
entry if the spool writer is not already printing another
spool file entry. However, printing may not begin
for one of the following reasons:
• The spool writer has been stopped by the subconsole
or system operator.
• The system has been stopped by the system operator.
• The entire spool fi Ie has been held by the system
operator.
• The spool file entry is not available for printing
because it is held, is still being created, or is being
copied by the COPYPRT procedure.
• There are insufficient system resources available to
allow the spool writer to begin printing.
• The printer is being used by another program, is
offline, is not powered on, or requires some other
operator intervention, such as correcting a paper
jam. In any of these cases, the spool writer attempts
to begin printing and issues a message when the
condition is detected.

Example

To change the forms number of entry SP0011 to PT1, enter:
CHANGE FORMS,PT1 ,SP0011 or
G FORMS,PT1,SP0011

System Console Operation

4-93

How to Change the Printer 10

{'SPO~I-id}

Command Format

CHANGE 10
(G)
,

Parameters

ID: Changes the printer 10 for a spool file entry or for
all spool file entries that are to be printed on a specified
printer.

,ws-ld1

ws-id: This is the 10 of the newly assigned printer.
spoo/-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the

entry on the spool file. You can use the ~ ATUS PRT
control command to determine the spool file 10 of the
entry to be changed.
ws-id1: This is the work station 10 of a printer. All spool
file entries that are to be printed on this printer will be
changed to be printed on the printer indicated by ws-id,
except any print file that is currently being printed by
the spool writer.
Notes:

1. If ws-id1 is specified in this command, the system
indicates that the change was successful even though
there were no spool file entries to be changed.
2. If ws-id1 is specified, the command applies only to the
spool file entries that were in the spool file when the
command was entered. Spool file entries added afterward are not affected by the command.
3. If a spool-id is specified, an error message is issued if
the specified spoQI file entry is being printed by the
spool writer.
4. When the printer destination of a spool file entry is
changed, the spool writer normally begins printing
the entry if the spool writer is not already printing
another spool file entry. However, printing may
not begin for one of the following reasons:
• The spool writer has been stopped by the subeonsole or system operator;
• The system has been stopped by ~he system operator.
• The entire spool file has been held by the system
operator.
• The spool file entry is not available for printing
, because it is held, is still being created, is being copied
by the COPYPRT procedure, or requires different
forms than the spool writer is using (if the spool
writer was started with a forms number specified).

4-94

• There are insufficient system resources available to
allow the spool writer to begin printing .
• The printer is being used by another program, is
offline, is not powered on, or requires some other
operator intervention, such as correcting a paper
jam. In any of these cases, the spool writer attempts
to begin printing and issues a message when the
condition is detected.
Example

To change all spool file entries with an ID of P2 to printer
ID P1, enter:
CHANGE ID,P1 ,P2 or
G ID,P1,P2
To change the entry SP0035 to have a printer ID of P2,
enter:
CHANGE ID,P2,SP0035
G ID,P2,SP0035

System Console Operation

4-95

How to Change the Order of Spool File Entries
Command Format

CHANGE PRT ,spool-id [,spool-id1 ]
(G)

Parameters:

(P)

PRT: Changes the position of an entry in the spool file.
spoo/-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of the

spool file entry to be changed. You can display the spool
file via the STATUS PRT control command to determine
an entry's name.
spoo/-id: The 6-character, system-assigned name of an

entry on the spool file, which begins with SP. The entry
being changed (spool-id) is placed after the entry with
spool-id1 and is assigned the same print priority as the
entry with spool-id 1. If you do not specify spool-id 1,
spool-id becomes the first entry in the spool file with a
priority of 5.
Example

To move entry SP0036 ahead of all entries on the spool file,
enter:
CHANGE PRT,SP0036 or
G P,SP0036

4-96

How to Change the Priority of a Spool Writer
HIGH

]

[

.]
,ws-Id

Command Format

f~ANGE PRTY, [ NORMAL

Parameters

PRTY: Changes the priority of a spool writer.
HIGH: The spool writer is to have high priority.
NORMAL: The spool writer is to have normal priority.
NORMAL is the default value if a priority is not specified.

ws-id: The 10 of the printer for which the spool writer
priority is to be changed. If a printer 10 is not specified,
the 10 of the system printer is assumed.
Example

To assign high priority to the spool writer for printer P2,
enter:
CHANGE PRTY,HIGH,P2 or
G PRTY,HIGH,P2

System Console Operation

4"97

How to Change the Resident/Swappable Attribute of a Spool Writer
Command Format

CHANGE RES,
(G)

Parameters

[~~S]

Gws-id]

RES: Changes the resident/swappable attribute of a spool
writer. Use the STATUS WRT command to determine the
status of the resident/swappable attribute.
YES- The writer is to be resident when loaded into main
storage.

NO: The writer can be swapped when loaded into main
storage. NO is the default value.

ws-id: The 10 of the printer for which the resident/
swappable attribute of the spool writer is to be changed.
If a printer 10 is not specified, the 10 of the system printer
is assumed.
Note: This command cannot be entered while the spool
writer is in main storage. To ensure that the spool writer
is not in main storage, use the STOP command to stop
the spool writer.
Example

To make the spool writer for printer P2 swappable, enter:
CHANGE RES,NO,P2 or
G RES"P2

4-98

How to Change the Number of Separator Pages Printed by a Spool Writer

Command Format

CHANG E SEP,
(G)

Parameters

[!]

[,ws-id]

SEP: Changes the number of separator pages printed by
the spool writer before each spool file entry.

0,1,2,3: The number of separator pages to be printed by
the spool writer before each spool file entry. The default
value is 0 if a number is not specified.
ws-id: The 10 of the printer for which the number of
separator pages printed by the spool writer is to be
changed. If a printer 10 is not specified, the 10 of the
system printer is assumed.

Example

To have no separator pages printed on printer P2 by the
spool writer, enter:
CHANGE SEP,O,P2 or
G SEP"P2

System Console Operation

4-99

General Spooling Examples
There are several ways to accomplish the tasks required in Example 1 and Example
2. The ways that are described show how spooling commands can be used
together to give you control of the spool file.

Example 1

You have three entries in the spool file. SP0295 has 120 pages of printed output,
SP0296 has five pages of printed output, and SP0297 has 282 pages of printed
output. You have started the spool writer either by entering the START PRT
command or by using the autowriter function, and SP0295 has started printing.
You decide to print the five-page job (SP0296) without having to wait for the
120-page job (SP0295) to complete printing. By entering the STATUS PRT
control command at this time, the status display would look like this:

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
JOBNAME USER
POS 10
PROC
1 SP0295 lISTLIBR WI081225 RON
2 SP0296 CATALOG WI081500 RON
3 SP0297 LISTL1BR WI081537 RON

**COMPLETE**
763 OF
1134
PRINTER 10
$SYSLIST P2 Al
$SYSLIST P2 1
$SYSLIST P2 1

0001
0001

0'001

1
1
1

120
5
282

Notice the A
in the PRTY
(priority) column.
This tells you
that the spool
writer is currently printing
SP0295.

The 14 in the
WRT column
tells you that
the spool writer
is currently
printing page 14.
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-ENO •••.••.••..•. F

To print SP0296 before SP0295 has completed printing, you must first stop the
printing of SP0295. This can be done by stopping the spool writer using the
STOP PRT control command. Enter:
STOP PRT"P2
(P)

(P)

When you enter the STOP PRT command, the following display is shown:
Notice that the A in the PRTY
(priority) column is no longer
displayed, indicating that the
spool writer is not printing
SP0295.

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PROC
JOBNAHE USER

**COHPLETE**
763 OF
ll34
PRINTER 10

1 SP0295 LISTLIBR WI081225 RON
WI081500 RON
3 SP0297 LISTLIBR WI081537 RON

$SYSLIST P2
$SYSLIST P2
$SYSLIST P2

2 SP0296 CATALOG

CONSOLE
WI
---PAGES--TOTAL
WRT
0001
0001
0001

120

282

With the absence of
the A in the PRTY
(priority) column,
the 14 in the WRT
column indicates that
the spool writer was
printing page 14 when
it was stopped.

SPOOL WRITER STOPPED FOR PRINTER P2
ENTER F-FORWARO, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO •••.••••••••• I
P p, ,P2

Now you have stopped the printing of SP0295. To begin printing the five-page
job (SP0296) ahead of SP0295, move SP0296 to the top of the spool queue,
ahead of SP0295. This can be done using the CHANGE PRT control command.
Enter:
CHANGE PRT,SP0296
(G)

(P)

System Console Operation

4-101

When you enter the CHANGE PRT command, the following display is shown:
Notice that SP0296 has been
moved to the top of the spool
queue, ahead of SP0295.

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
uLOCKS AVAILABLE:
JOBt-tAME USER
1 SP0296 CATALOG W1081500 RON
2 SP0295 LlS-llIBR W-l-O~ ROW
3 SP0297 LISTLIBR WI081537 RON

**COMPLETE**
CONSOLE
WI
763 OF
1134
---PAGES--PRINTER 10 PRTY FORM COpy TOTAL
WRT
$SYSLIST P2

--$-~I-S-:r ~

$SYSLIST P2

1
The priority of
SP0296 has been
changed to the
maximum value (5)
because it was
moved to the top
of the spool queue.

CHANGE COMMAND SUCCESSFUL
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••..•••••••. I
G P,SP0296

The spool file entries are now in the desired sequence for printing. To begin
printing, use the START PRT control command to start the spool writer. Enter:
START PRT"P2
(S)

4-102

(P)

When you enter the START PRT command, the following display is shown:
Notice the A in the PRTY (priority)
column. This tells you that the spool
writer has begun printing SP0296.

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PROC
JOBNAME USER
1 SP0296 CATALOG W1081500 RON
2 SP0295 LISTLIBR WI081255 RON
3 SP0297 LISTLIBR WI081537 RON

**COMPLETE*.~

CONSOLE
WI
763 OF
1134
---PAGES--PRINTER 10 PR.Y fORM COPY TOTAL
WRT
$SYSlIST P2 A5
$SYSLIST P2 1
$SYSLIST P2 1

0001
0001
0001

1
1
1

5
120
282

1
14"
"

1'\

The 1 in the WRT
column tells you
that the writer is
currently printing page 1.

SPOOL WRITER STARTED FOR PRINTER P2
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ....••••••••. F
S P" P2

When SP0296 has completed printing, it is removed from the spool file, and the
spool writer begins printing SP0295 because it is next on the queue.

System Console Operation

4-103

Notice that SP0296 is no longer on the
spool queue. The spool writer has begun
printing SP0295 and is currently on page 1.~

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PROC
JOBNAME USER
1 SP0295 LISTLIBR 1011081225 RON
2 SP0297 LISTLIBR WI081537 RON

CONS~L
" :WI ~

**COMPLETE**
770 OF
1134
PRINTER 10 PRTY FORM COpy
$SYSLIST P2 Al
$SYSLIST P2 1

0001
0001

---PA~ES---

TOTAL

WRT

120
282

ENTER F-FORWARO, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO .•...•.•.••.. F

Because the first 13 pages of SP0295 were printed prior to stopping the spool
writer, you may not want to print them again. If not, you can use the RESTART
PRT control command to restart the spool writer on page 14. Enter
RESTART PRT,14,P2
(T)

4-104

(P)

14"\.

Notice that the spool writer
now begins printing page

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PROC
JOBNAME USER
1 SP0295 lISTl1BR WI081225 RON
2 SP0297 lISTl1BR WI081537 RON

CON~OL.:"':';
WI"
--+P

**COMPLETE**
770 OF
1134
PRINTER 10 PRTY FORM COpy
$SYSLIST P2 Al
$SYSL1ST P2 1

0001
0001

~ES---

TOTAL

WRT

120
282

SPOOL WRITER RESTARTED FOR PRINTER P2
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO .•..••..••••• F
T P,14,P2

System Console Operation

4-105

Example 2

You have several entries in the spool file to be printed. One of the entries
requires form ABCD, and the remaining entries require form 0001. The spool writer
is currently printing entry SP0306, using form 0001. By entering the STATUS PRT
control command at this time, the status display would look like this:

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PIroG
JOmWtE- USER
1
2
3
4
5

SP0306
SP0307
SP0308
SP0309
SP0310

CATALOG
CATALOG
LI8LIST
HISTORY

WI082600
WI083622
WI0837I8
WI083744
WI0839IO

RON
RON
RON
RON
RON

**COMPLETE**
CONSOLE
WI
1029 OF
1134
---PAGES--PRUnER 10 PRT'( FORM COpy TOTAL
WRT
$SYSLIST
$SYSLIST
$SYSLIST
$SYSLIST
PRINTKEY

P2 Al
P2 I
Pi! 1
P2 1
P2 I

000r1:_ _~5_:3__
ABCD 1
0001 1
2
Notice in the
0001 1
36
---FORM column
1
0001 1
there are several
entries to be
printed on form
0001 and one
entry to be
printed on
form ABCD.

ENTER f-fORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END .•••..••.••.• f

When SP0306 has been printed, it is removed from the spool queue, and the
spool writer begins printing SP0307. Prior to beginning the printing of SP0307,
the spool writer determines that form ABCD is required, and the spool writer
issues a message asking you to mount form ABCD on printer P2.

4-106

Notice that SP0306 has been removed from
the spool file, and that the spool writer is
attempting to print SP0307 requiring
form ABeD.

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PROC
JOBNAHE USER
1 SP0307 CATALOG
2 SP0308 LIBLIST
3 SP0309 HISTORY
4 SP0310

WI083622
WI083718
WI083744
WI083910

RON
RON
RON
RON

WI
CONSOLE
---PAGES--TOTAL
WRT

**COHPLETE**
1043 OF
1134
PRINTER 10
$SYSLIST
$SYSLIST
$SYSLIST
PRINTKEY

P2 Al
P2 1
P2 1
P2 1

ABCO
0001
0001
0001

2
36
1

ENTER f-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPOATE, OR E-ENO ..•...•..•••. F

System Console Operation

4-107

If you end the STATUS PRT display and return to the console display, you will
see the spool writer message (SYS-1404) asking you to change the forms.

SYSTEM

R C

REPLY. COMMAND SUCCESSFUL
SYS-1404 OPTIONS (012 )
ON PRINTER P2 CHANGE TO FORMS NUMBER ABCD .••

You would like to change the forms as few times as possible. Remembering the
STATUS PRT display showed the normal sequence of printing would require
you to change to form ABeD to print one entry from the spool file and then
change back to form 0001 to print the remaining entries, you decide instead to
print SP0307 after all the other entries have been printed.
This can be done by using the HOLD PRT control command to hold entry
SP0307 for later printing. Instead of responding to message SYS-1404, enter:
HOLD PRT,SP0307
(H)

4-108

(P)

CONSOLE

Notice that the system automatically
replaces the message reply ID with
two asterisks.

SYSTEM

CONSOLE

R C

REPLY COMMAND SUCCESSFUL

** SYS-1404 OPTIONS (012 )
** ON PRINTER P2 CHANGE TO FORMS NUMBER ABCD .••
H P,SP0307
HOLD COMMAND SUCCESSFUL

To return to the STATUS PRT display, enter the STATUS PRT control command.

System Console Operation

4-109

Notice that the A is no longer displayed
in the PRTY (priority) column for SP0307,
indicating that the spool writer is no longer
attempting to print SP0307, and that an H
is displayed in the PRTY (priority) column
indicating that SP0307 has been held.

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PROC
JOBNAME USER
1 SP0307 CATALOG
SPG30S lIBU-ST
3 SP0309 HISTORY
4 SP0310

WI083622 RON
RON
W1083744 RON
WI083910 RON

Wl083718

CONSOLE
WI
---PAGES--TOTAL
WRT

**COMPLETE**
1043 OF
1134
PRINTER 10
$SYSLIST
$SYSlIST
$SYSLIST
PRINTKEY

P2
P2

ABCD
0001

5
2

b001

1
1

0001

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••.••••••••. I

Notice that the A is displayed in the PRTY
(priority) column for SP0308, indicating that
the spool writer has begun printing SP0308.
The 1 in the WRT column indicates that the
spool writer is printing page 1.

4-110

As each entry that requires form 0001 is printed, the entry is removed from the
spool queue so that only SP0307 (held) remains to be printed.

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PROC
JOBNAME USER
SP0307 CATALOG

W1083622 RON

**COMPLETE**
CONSOLE
WI
1078 OF
1134
---PAGES--PRINTER 10 PRTY FORM COPY TOTAL
WRT
$SYSLIST P2

ABCD

ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •••...•.•.•.. F

System Console Operation

4-111

Because SP0307 is held, it must be released before it can be printed. YOLI can
use the RELEASE PRT control command to release the entry. Enter:
RELEASE PRT,SP0307
(L)

(P)

When the release command has been entered, the spool writer will begin printing
SP0307. Prior to printing SP0307, the spool writer will issue a message asking
you to change the forms to ABeD. After you have changed the forms, respond
to the message with option 1, and printing will begin.

SPOOLED PRINT STATUS
BLOCKS AVAILABLE:
POS 10
PROC
JOBNAME USER
SP0307 CATALOG

W1083622 RON

**COMPLETE**
CONSOLE
WI
1078 OF
1134
---PAGES--PRINTER 10 PRTY FORM COpy TOTAL
WRT
$SYSLIST P2 Al

ABCD

Notice that the
H is no longer
displayed in the
PRTY (priority)
column because
SP0307 is no
longer held and
the spool writer
has begun
printing SP0307.

RELEASE COMMAND SUCCESSFUL
ENTER F-FORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END ...•.•.••••.• F
L P,SP0307

4-112

INPUT JOB QUEUE-CONTROL FROM THE SYSTEM CONSOLE

A display station operator can enter a job and then continue with other activities,
without waiting for that job to execute, by using the SSP facility called input job
queue. The input job queue is a list of jobs that have been submitted for execution
but are not currently executing.
Waiting for a job to execute can waste time and decrease the productivity of the
system. If a job does not require input from an operator during execution, the job
can be placed on the input job queue. You would typically want to place long running jobs and jobs that require minimal attention (perhaps only form changing, for
example) on the input job queue.
The default size of the input job queue is 20 jobs. Jobs must be a command
statement or an OCl statement (LlSTLlBR or CATALOG, for example). At IPl,
you can change the size of the input job queue, remove existing jobs from the queue,
and specify whether or not to begin executing jobs from the queue. Refer to IPL
from Disk, earlier in this chapter, for an explanation of how to override the current
parameters.
Only one job executes at a time from the input job queue, and informational message output is directed to the system console and/or system printer or disk.
You control the order of initiation of the queued jobs and give them priority as
required. Specifically, you can use control commands to:
•

Display the queue

•

Start initiation of jobs from the queue

• Stop initiation of jobs from the queue
• Cancel one job or all jobs on the queue
• Change the order of jobs on the queue
This section explains each of these activities.
Once a job is initiated from the input job queue, it can be controlled (started or
stopped) by using the START JOB or STOP JOB control command.

System Console Operation

4-113

How to Display the Input Job Queue

The job queue status display shows all entries on the input job queue.
Command Format

STATUS JOBO [,jobname]
(D)

(J)

JOBQ: Displays one or all entries on the input job queue.

Parameters

jobname: The 8-character, system-assigned name of the job

for which statuslnformatlon is displayed. If jobname is
omitted, the display shows the status of all jobs on the input
job queue for the requesting display station.
STATUS JOBQ or
oJ

Example

The following display appears:

OGe~Goe

'\~:~ q~~OBS
POS
1
2

~OB

WI081521
WI081805
WI091214

s~--:J::-I:-i-\-j----'OLE
~PLETEJ'* I
~

QUE~~~PEOI

r:jjSTATUS
IN

00 • •

PROCEDURE
PAYROLL
ACCTREC
ACCTPAY

3 OF

\20

PRTY

EXEC PRTY

USER

LIBRARY

3
3

N
M

HML
HML
HML

PAYLIB
LEDGER
LEDGER

ENTER f-fORWARD, I-INPUT, R-RESTART, U-UPDATE, OR E-END •......•••..•

o
e.
e
e

The relative position of the job in the queue.

JOB lists the jobname assigned to this job.
The number of jobs currently in the queue out of the maximum that can be in
the queue.
STOPPED appears if the JOBO has not been started.

•

4-114

PROCEDURE lists the prpcedure name of this job.

o
CD
CD

o
e
o
o

JO PRTY indicates a job's position on the input job queue. Jobs with a job
queue priority of 5 are the first to be taken from the queue for execution.
COMPLETE appears if the entries shown on the screen are the last entries
listed for this display station.
EXEC PRIORITY indicates a job's execution priority. Jobs with high priority
are run with the least number of interruptions:
H: high execution priority
M: medium execution priority
N: normal execution priority
L: low execution priority
USER lists the user ID of the submitter.
LIBRARY lists the optional user library the procedure is to come from.
CONSO LE indicates that the STATUS JOBO command was issued from
console mode and system console commands are valid with the I option.
This line is for operator action. If you enter any character other than I, R, U,
or E, the system will page forward as if F were pressed.

How to Start the Input Job Queue
Command Format

START JOBO
(S)
(J)

Parameter

JOBO: Starts running jobs on the input job queue. If the
input job queue becomes empty, running of jobs begins
automatically when one or more jobs are placed on the
queue.

Example

The initiation of jobs from the input job queue was stopped
by a STOP JOBO control command. To start running jobs
from the queue, enter:
START JOBO or

S J

How to Stop the Input Job Queue
Command Format

STOP JOBO
(P)
(J)

Parameter

JOBO: Stops the initiation of jobs from the input job queue.
The job that was running continues until it completes.

Example

STOP JOBO or

P J

System Console Operation

4-115

How to Cancel Jobs on the I nput Job Queue

Command Format

Parameters

CANCEL JOSO
(C)
(J)

{,~LL

}

,Jobname

JOBQ: Cancels the specified job or all jobs on the input
job queue.

ALL: Cancels all jobs from the input job queue.
jobname: Specifies the job to cancel.
Examples

•

To cancel

~II

jobs on the input job queue, enter:

CANCEL JOSO,ALL or
C J,ALL
•

To cancel only job W2001820 on the input job queue,
enter:
CANCEL JOSO,W2001820 or
C J,W2001820

How to Change the Order of Jobs on the Input Job Queue
Command Format

CHANGE JOSO ,jobname [,jobname1]
(G)

Parameters

(J)

JOBQ: Changes the position of a job on the input job queue.
jobname: The 8-character, system-assigned job name of the
job to be moved. You can display the input job queue via
the STATUS JOSO control command to determine a job's
name.
jobname-1: The 8-character, system-assigned job name of a
job on the input job queue. The job being moved (jobname) is placed on the input job queue following the job
with the name specified by jobname-1. In addition, the
job being moved assumes the same job queue priority as
jobname-1. If jobname-1 is not specified, the job being
changed is moved to the front of the queue and becomes
a job queue priority 5 job.

See How to Put a Job on the Input Job .Queue in
Chapter 2 of this manual for more information on job
queue priority.
Example

To move job W3083001 on the input job queue so that it
follows job W1051050, enter:
CHANGE JOSO,W3083001,W1051050 or
G J,W3083001,W1051050

4-116

Chapter 5. How to Operate WSU

The work station utility (WSU) provides a way to code data entry, data edit, data
correction and inquiry programs for System/34. This chapter explains how you
generate WSU source programs that the programmer has written; how you use a
WSU program that is the result of the generation; and how you can interactively
enter data for a WSU program. You can enter, review, delete, and insert records.
You can also switch work sessions to correct or update records. A WSU Aid Display
shows options that are valid when you are not in enter mode and when you are
required to direct WSU processing.
If your system supports the ideographic version of the SSP, WSU allows file data to
be ideographic. WSU allows ideographic literals on the D and C specifications only
if ideographic support is indicated by an entry on the J specification. All work
stations that sign on to a WSU program will be required to be of the same type
(alphanumeric or ideographic).

WSU COMMAND STATEMENT

WSU generation begins when you enter the WSU procedure command. You can use
the HELP procedure to enter the WSU procedure command. Enter HELP WSU to
be prompted for the WSU procedure command parameters. The procedure command format is:

library name] [number of blOCkS]
WSU source program name, [ #LlBRARY
, 50
'

HALT
NOHALT ]
NOSTOP
[
REPLACE

[LIST
NOLIST ]
NOLISTS
NOLlSTW

PROC
' [NOPROC] ,
PGM

[y] , [lJ
N

source program name: Specifies the name of the member that contains the. source
program. This name is a required parameter. If you omit it, WSU prompts for it.
library name: Specifies the name of the Iibrary that contains the source program.
If you specify a library name but WSU cannot find the source program in that
library, an error message is issued and program generation does not occur. If you
omit the library name, WSU assumes that the system library (#LlBRARY)
contains the WSU specifications.
number of blocks: Specifies the number of blocks allocated for a work file. If you
omit the number of blocks, WSU allocates 50 blocks for a work file.

HAL T: When a program generation terminal error occurs or a duplicate member is
found, processing stops and a message that requires an operator's reply is issued.
HALT is the default.
NOHAL T: When a terminal error occurs during program generation, processing does
not stop and a message is not issued.

How to Operate WSU

5-1

NOS TOP: A combination of the functions indicated by NOHAl T and REPLACE.
Processing does not stop for terminal errors, and existing members are replaced
automatically with the newly generated program, procedure, $SFGR source
member, or $SFGR object member. If neither NOSTOP nor REPLACE is specified, a message appears for the operator each time a member with a duplicate name
is found.
REPLACE: Any existing members that have the same name as the generated program, procedure, $SFGR source member, or $SFGR object member are automatically replaced by the members created during this generation.
LIST: A complete WSU program generation listing is printed. A complete listing
includes source information, diagnostic information, and $SFGR information.
NOLIST: Source statements, certain diagnostic information, and $SFGR information are not printed in the WSU program generation listing. Only main storage
requirements, disk storage requirements, the procedure generated for program execution, and diagnostic text are printed.
NOLISTS: $SFG R information is not printed in the WSU program generation
listing. Only source information and diagnostic information are printed.
NOLISTW: Source statements and certain diagnostic information are not printed
in the WSU program generation listing. Only the main storage requirements, disk
storage requirements, the procedure generated for program execution, diagnostic
text, and $SFGR information are printed.
PROC: A procedure that calls the WSU program is generated. PROC is the
default when this parameter is omitted.
NOPROC: A procedure that calls the WSU program is not generated.
PGM: Only the WSU program is generated. A procedure, display screen source,
and display screen formats are not generated.

N: Do not place the job on the input job queue. N is the default value when the
parameter is omitted.

Y: Place the job on the input job queue.

5-2

0: Only the following sections are printed in the WSU program generation listing:
•

Source information

•

Extended diagnostics

•

Undefined indicators

•

Multiply defined field names

•

Undefined field names

•

Main storage requirements

•

Disk storage requirements

•

Procedure generated for WSU program execution

•

Diagnostic text

1: Certain cross-reference information, the Indicator Name Usage and Field Name
and Program Label Usage sections, is not printed in the WSU program generation
listing. The default value when the parameter is omitted is 1.
2: Cross-reference information, the Indicator Name Usage and Field Name and
Program Label Usage sections, is printed in the WSU program generation listing.

How to Operate WSU

5-3

WSU PROMPT DISPLAY

System/34 provides a prompt display as an alternative means of entering the WSU
procedure command and its parameters. This display appears when the WSU procedure command is entered and the first parameter (source program name) is missing or when the HELP WSU command is entered. Those parameters that have been
specified on the WSU procedure command are shown on the display. Default values
are shown for parameters that have not been specified.
The fourth line of the prompt display, which allows a WSU job to be placed on the
input job queue, can also be done via the JOBO operator control command, the
JOBO OCl statement, or the WSU procedure command. Refer to the System
Support Reference Manual for descriptions of the JOBO control command and the
JOBO OCl statement.

WORK STATION UTILITY
Allows Creation And Operation Of Interactive Data
Entry, Data Edit ~nd Data Correction Programs_
Source Program Name
L1brary Name •........•..•....•......•.•.•.•.....••..•.........
Stop Option

(HALT/NOHALT/NOSTOP/REPLACE/bl~nk)

~LIBRARY

....•...••••••... HALT

Place On Input Job Queue (YIN) •. _•.•.••.•.•.••••••.•.•.•••••.• N
Print

~SU

Source (LIST/NOLIST/NOLISTW/NOLISTS) .•.•...••..••.•. LIST

Number Of Blocks For Work Fi Ie (1-9999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Build

~SU

Procedure (PROC/NOPROC/PGtl) .....••..••...••....••..• PROC

Cross Reference Level

5-4

(0/1/2)

••••••••••••••.•.••••••••••••••• 1

HOW TO SIGN ON
To use a WSU program, enter the name of the WSU program as shown on the following display (in this example, the name of the WSU program is RAENTRY):

,
Wl

CCtiMAND

ENTER cm1MAND OR eCl STATEMENT
RAENrRY

<- READY

ENTER MODE
Enter mode is the initial operating mode, which allows you to enter records into the
transaction file.

How to Operate WSU

5-5

How to Key Data on a Display
When a display appears, the cursor is at the first input field as shown on the following sample display:
Column separators (I )
are programmer defined.

Input Fields

/
INVENTORY RECEIPTS
TRANSACTION QUANTITY
ITEM NUMBER
P.O./MEMO REFERENCE

1-'I I 'I'
" II I

11""'"'

As you key data in a field, the cursor moves left to right across the field. For some
fields that you fill, the cursor will automatically jump to the next input area when
you have keyed the last digit or character in the field. For fields that you do not
fill or for fields that the cursor does not automatically exit, you will have to press a
field exit key (Field Exit, Field+, or Field-) to enter the field (see Figure 5-1 later
in this chapter for key locations). Numeric fields will be right-adjusted when the
field is entered; alphameric fields will be left adjusted when the field is entered,
unless the pro-Qram specifies right-adjust.
To enter a negative value in a field, enter the value and then press Field-. The field
will be right-adjusted and the minus sign will follow the last digit. For example, if
you enter 50 and press the Field- key, 50- is displayed.

5-6

As you enter fields, the cursor advances from left to right across a line as shown
below. When the rightmost input field has been entered, the cursor advances to the
leftmost input field on the next line.

INVENTORY RECEIPTS
TRANSACTION QUANTITY

Il~~1

ITEM NUtiBER

II " I II

P.O./MEMO REFERENCE

IIII I 11111

Now press a field exit key to enter the transaction quantity. The quantity will be rightadjusted and the cursor will move to the next
input field (item number).

You can use any field exit key to skip over a field if a value in that field is not
requ ired by the program.
When you complete a display, enter it by pressing the Enter/Rec Adv key or a user
command function key.

Note: Certain fields, when you complete them or enter them, can cause entry of all
input fields on the display.

How to Operate WSU

5-7

,
INVENTORY RECEIPTS
TRANSACTION QUANTITY

lop.j~

ITEM "''UMBER

Illo~~o~

P.O./MEMO REFERENCE

l~qo~11

Now press the Enter/Rec Adv
key or a user command function key to enter this display.
REVIEW MODE

Review mode is the operating mode that lets you look at records in the transaction
file. If the program allows review and update, you can also update records in the
transaction file.
How to Review Records

You can select review mode in one of the following ways:
•

Hold the Shift key down and press the Page Backward Record key (RolI·O

•

Hold the Shift key down and press the Page Forward Record key (Rollt)

•

Press the Page Backward Group command key (command key 5)

•

Press the Page Forward Group command key (command key 6)

•

Specify a review record number on the WSU menu

•

Hold the Shift key down and press the Resume Review command key (command
key 15) to display the last record you reviewed

You can select alternative displays (if any) by pressing-the Bypass Display command
key (command key 2) or by entering a two-character ID on the WSU menu. The
WSU Command Function Keys and Function Control Keys section later in this
chapter describes the WSU command keys that you can use in review mode.
To go from review mode to enter mode, press the Resume Entry command key
(command key 3).
5-8

REVIEW/DELETE MODE

Review/delete mode lets you logically delete a record or group of records in the
transaction file, if the program you are using allows you to review records.

How to Delete a Record
You may be able to delete the last record you reviewed. First hold the Shift key
down and press the Delete command key (command key 14) to enter review/delete
mode. Then press the Enter/Rec Adv key or a user-defined command key to
delete the record.
If the deleted record was a header record, all detail records in the group-are
deleted also.
To avoid deleting a selected record, press one of the WSU function or WSU
command keys other than the Bypass Display key (command key 2), or press
command key 1 to display the WSU menu and make an entry other than a
display 10 on the menu.
You can press command key 13 to prevent a record from being deleted without
requesting an additional function at the same time.

INSERT MODE

Insert mode is the operating mode that lets you logically insert a record between
records in the transaction file, if your program allows it.

How to Insert a Record
To insert a record you must first review the record that is to precede the inserted
record (refer to the explanation of review mode for ways to do this) and then press
the Insert Mode command function key (command key 4). WSU selects a display
that you can use to insert a record. You can select alternative displays (if any) via
the Bypass Display command function key (command key 2) or via a two-character
lOon the WSU menu.
Refer to WSU Command Function Keys and Function Control Keys later in this
chapter for a description of the keys you can use in insert mode.

HOW TO SELECT A DIFFERENT WORK SESSION

When you enter the name of a WSU program on the command display, the work
session 10 assigned to you is the same as the 10 of your work station. WSU does
not allow you to enter or access records for any session other than the one you
are using.
Your programmer has the option of allowing you to switch to a work session
other than the one assigned to you. Switching sessions allows you to update or
correct records that another operator has entered, or to access your own records
from a work station other than the one you used to enter the records.

How to Operate WSU

5-9

To enter, review, delete, or insert records for a different session, enter a session
selection identifier on the WSU menu display. (Refer to WSU Menu later in this
chapter.) The session you are in ends normally, except that your work station is
not released. The WSU menu reappears to show you the session you have selected.
If you want to restart that session, press the Enter fRec Adv key. After you have
started or restarted a session in this way, you may process records for the session
you selected in any of the normal WSU modes.
Your programmer may limit the number of operators who can switch WSU sessions, or may assign this capability to a particular work station. If so, your programmer will tell you whether you or your work station is authorized to switch
sessions.
When you have finished a work session, you can return to the WSU menu by
pressing command key 1. From the menu, you can switch WSU sessions or restart
the current session by entering a session selection identifier, or you can end the
work session.

HOW TO END A WOR K SESSION

End a work session by pressing the WSU Menu command function key (command
key 1) and specifying EW on the menu or by following a special programmer
directed action (for example, pressing a specific user command function key).

HOW TO RESTART A WSU PROGRAM

You can restart an execution program to do further entry, review, deletion, or
insertion of records in the transaction file:
•

After you have successfully ended your work session .

•

After a Systemf34 error occurred that did not allow you to successfully end your
work session, and all other work sessions have ended.

Restart by entering the name of the WSU program on the Command display.

5-10

WSU MENU
The WSU menu appears when you press the WSU Menu command function key
(command key 1). You can select this menu anytime a display is waiting for input
from you.
The WSU menu allows you to select a display by its ID, end your work session,
restart a session, or review a record. You can also ieave the WSU menu without
making a selection. The following shows and explains the WSU menu:

**~******

WORK ST;\Tlm~ UTILITY ttENU DISPLAY ****~*¥**

ENTER DISPLAY SELECTION IDEtJTIFIER ---------------------------------------- EtHER EW TO EtlD WORK SESSIotl _______
n _ n n ____ n

_____ n n _ n n _ n n _ - - - n -

"
G

~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~-:: :::: ~=r-e.

::::: ::::::"R:::::T::::n::E:::::::-:::-:::::::_
OR USE CQ!!t1M'D KEY 1 TO RESUtIE •••

CA Ql RV 000005

You select a display by entering its two-character 10 on the WSU menu.

You can enter EW to end your work session.

e
e

You can select the identifier of a work session you want to start or restart
by entering the work session ID efrom an authorized work station or by
entering the work session 10 eand also entering the required authorization 10 on the EW lineG.
You can review a specific record in the transaction file byenter~ng the review
record number. If you are in enter mode, WSU switches the operating mode
to review mode. WSU issues a message if the record you selected is not in the
chain for your session; you will still be in review mode.
If the record you requested from the WSU menu is not in your chain, it may
be in the chain for a session other than the one you are using. If you immediately redisplay the menu, this session 10 will be shown as the default session
selecti on/identifier.

The status line shows the display or level 10, the session 10, the mode or
processing level, the add/update relative record number, and the chain end
indicator. This information may help you remember what you were doing
just before you requested the menu display. See the WSU Reference Manual
for a more detailed explanation.
How to Operate WSU

5-11

To leave the WSU menu without making a selection, you can press any of the
review mode function keys-command function keys 3-6 and 14-15, Rollt (roll
up), and RolI-l- (roll down). You also can press the Enter fRec Adv key while the
review record number is zeros or press command key 1 to return to the previous
display. If you are not in enter mode and cannot return to a current display, you
must press a function key, enter EW, enter a session ID, or enter a val id review
record number to leave the menu.
Note: You cannot use the bypass key or user-defined command keys from the
WSU menu.

How to Use the Status Line
The status line on the WSU menu shows the 10 of the display you interrupted to go
to the WSU menu. You may want to remember this 10 so that you can use it later
to select that display from the WSU menu.
The 10 of the session you are using appears on the status line. You can use this
10 to restart this session.
The status line shows what mode you are in and the number of the record you
are about to add or update.
The chain end indicator shows three asterisks (* * *) if your paging reference
point is out of the chain. In this case, you previously received and cleared a not-inchain message (WSU-0706). Refer to the WSU Command Function Keys and WSU
Function Control Keys charts to see when WSU issues a not-in-chain message.
Whenever your paging reference point is out of the chain, you can:

5-12

•

Page forward to the first record in the chain by pressing the Rollt key with the
Shift key

•

Page backward to the last record in the chain by pressing the RolI-l- key with the
Shift key

•

Page forward to the first header record in the chain by pressing command key 6

•

Page backward to the last header record in the chain by pressing command key 5

WSU AID DISPLAY
The WSU Aid Display shows options that are valid when you are not in enter mode
and when WSU requires you to make a new request. The WSU Aid Display appears
automatically if you press the Enter fRec Adv key or a user-defined command
key when you should have keyed in a new request. It also appears automatically
if you use command key 13 when you are not in enter mode.

PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS
PRESS

********* WORK STATION UTILITY AID DISPLAY *********
00 ONE OF THE FOLLOWING TO SELECT ALTERNATE PROCESSING ••.
COMMAND KEY 1 THEN USE THE WSU MENU TO END OR RESTART THIS SESSION
COMMAND KEY 1 THEN USE THE WSU MENU TO SELECT A RECORD TO REVIEW
COMMAND KEY 3 TO RESUME ENTER MODE PROCESSING
COMMAND KEY 4 TO INSERT AFTER THE CURRENT REVIEW RECORD
ROLL DOWN KEY TO REVIEW THE PREVIOUS RECORD
ROLL UP KEY
TO REVIEW THE NEXT RECORD
COMMAND KEY 5 TO REVIEW THE PREVIOUS HEADER RECORD
COMMAND KEY 6 TO REVIEW THE NEXT HEADER RECORD
COMMAND KEY 14 TO DELETE THE MOST RECENT REVIEW RECORD OR GROUP
COMMAND KEY 15 TO REVIEW THE MOST RECENT REVIEW RECORD

00 ONE OF THE FOLLOWING TO REQUEST ADDITIONAL INFORMATION •••
PRESS COMMAND KEY 1 THEN USE THE WSU MENU TO SELECT A USER HELP SCREEN
PRESS COMMAND KEY 13 TO REDISPLAY THE MOST RECENT STATUS ALTERING MESSAGE

How to Operate WSU

5-13

WSU COMMAND KEYS AND TEMPLATE

Figure 5-1 shows the WSU command function keys and template.

:::a

(

Delete

WSU
Menu

Bypass
Display

(

GX21-766G-O

Accept
Sequence
Error

Resume

Insert
Mode

Page
Backward
Group

Page
Forward
Group

""'"

Review

Resume
Entry

,
\

Figure 5-1. WSU Command Keys and Template

WSU COMMAND FUNCTION KEYS AND FUNCTION CONTROL KEYS

Figure 5-2 describes the lowercase command function keys and how they can be
used in each operating mode. Figure 5-3 describes the uppercase command function
keys and how they can be used in each operating mode. Figure 5-4 shows and
explains the function control keys that can be used to view records in the transaction file.

5-14

=>wsu

Key

Enter Mode

WSU Menu

Causes the WSU menu to appear. Refer to
WSU Menu in this chapter for a description of the menu.

Bypass Display

Causes the next display to
appear. For a nonsequenced
display, this command key
causes the most recently
shown sequenced display to
reappear. You can use this
command key to advance
from a repeated display.

Causes the next valid review mode display to appear.

GJ'

Resume Entry

Not allowed.

Switches the operating mode to enter mode. WSU displays the most recently
shown enter mode user display, and allows you to continue interrupted data entry.

Insert Mode

Not allowed.

Switches the operating mode
to insert mode and presents
display for you to insert a
record.

Page Backward Group

Switches the operati ng mode to review mode.
Causes WSU to show the previous header record in the transaction file, or to issue a not-in-chain message.

Page Forward Group

Switches the operating mode
to review mode and causes
WSU to issue a not-in-chain
message..

User Command Key (KG)

Enters the display, sets indicator KG on, and sets all other indicators from KA through KYoff.

User Command Key (KH)

Enters the display, sets indicator KH on, and sets all other indicators from KA through KYoff.

User Command Key (KI)

Enters the display, sets indicator KI on, and sets all other indicators from KA through KYoff.

User Command Key (KJ)

Enters the display, sets indicator KJ on, and sets all other indicators from KA through KYoff.

User Command Key (KK)

Enters the display, sets indicator KK on, and sets all other indicators from KA through KY off.

User Command Key (KL)

Enters the display, sets indicator KL on, and sets all other indicators from KA through KYoff.

:e
Q
(l)

(

Display
Accum

Auto
Dup

(

Select
Format

Delete

Rec
Bksp

Print
Rec

EOJ

Display
Attrl
Spec

Insert

Entry

Update

DFU

"""""

Rec
Adv

..J

,,
,

Figure 6-1. Keyboard with DFU Template Inserted

Command function keys are used to request specific DFU functions. The following
list names and describes each command function key (Figure 6-2) that DFU allows:

Key

Command
Function
Keys

Description

When Used

Auto Dup

Reverses the status of the auto-dup
indicator (ON or OFF). When ON,
fields specified as auto-dup fields at
job setup time are displayed with the
corresponding data from the previous
record processed; you can not alter
the auto-duplication data.

Enter/
update

Display
Accum

Displays the current values of the batch
accumulators, and resets them to zero
after adding them to the total accumulators. If a printer has been used with
the job, these values are printed.

Enter/
update

Select
Format

Positions the cursor at the record type
field so that you can request a new
record type.

Enter/
update,
inquiry

If in entry mode, and the DFU format
specifies sequenced record types, this
key automatically displays the next
record type in the sequence.
Delete

Marks the current record for deletion.

Enter/
update

Rec Bksp

Backs up a step in the processing, with
the results dependent on the situation
at the time the key is pressed.
- When the current record requires
more than one display and the first
display is not shown, this key displays the first display for a record.
If the first display is currently being
processed: Entry or insert mode
causes the previous record processed
to be retrieved, and allows you to update that record.

Enter/
update,
inquiry

Update mode key prompt-retrieves the
previous record processed and allows you
to update that record.
Figure 6-2 (Part 1 of 3). DFU Command Function Keys

How to Operate DFU

6-3

Key

Command
Function
Keys
Rec Bksp
(continued)

Description

When Used

Update mode data prompt-ignores
the current record and prompts you for
a new record to update.

Note: If the previous record is being
.reviewed ,the xev-ts j-gnored.
Inquiry mode-resets to start of processing for the current record.

Print Rec

Prints the currently displayed record.

Inquiry
Job setup

Prints the DFU attributes and
specifications.

CD
GJ

EOJ

Ends your entry, update, or inquiry
job processing.

Enter/
update,
inquiry,
job setup

Display
Attr/Spec

Reverses the display of D FU attributes to pFU speCifications or DFU
specification to D FU attributes depending on which is being displayed. This
key is not used during enter/update or
inquiry execution.

Job setup

Insert

Allows you to insert a new record into
a data file. If DFU is generating record
keys for entry mode while processing
an indexed file, you must supply record
keys that are less than the next generated record key. If you are using relative
record-numbers, the record correspond"
ing to the relative record number
inserted must currently be all blanks.

Enter/
update

Figure 6-2 (Part 2 of 3). DFU Command Function Keys

6-4

Key

Command
Function
Keys

Description

When Used

Entry

Allows you to add records to a data file.
If you are using record keys, the record
key entered must not already exist in
the file. If you are using relative record
numbers, the record corresponding to
the relative record number entered
must currently be all blanks. If the
format description indicates that DFU
is to generate record keys or record
numbers, pressing this key causes
generation of the next sequential record
key or record number in the file.

Enter/
update

Update

Allows you to change existing records
in a data file. When using record keys,
the key entered must be for an existing
record. When using relative record
numbers, the record corresponding
to the relative record number entered
must not currently be blank.

Enter/
update

IT)

Rec Adv

Indicates that the current record or
prompt is complete.

Enter/
update/
inquiry,
job setup

Figure 6-2 (Part 3 of 3). DFU Command Function Keys

How to Operate DFU

6-5

Function control keys are used to specify system functions. The following list
(Figure 6·3) names and describes each function control key that DF U allows.

Key

•
•

Function
Control
Key

Description

Cmd

Pressing this key and one of the command function
keys causes that function to be performed.

Dup

Causes information to be duplicated into a field
from the previous record processed. *" is placed
in the cursor position and every position to the
right in the current field; this key then functions
as the Field Exit key. DFU replaces these characters with data from the corresponding positions
of the previously processed record. This key is
valid only during enter/update or inquiry execution.
Note: For update mode, DFU assumes the previous
record processed to be the same as the current record
being processed.

Enter/Rec
Adv

Returns control to DFU to process the data entered
on the current display.
During enter/update, this key shows the next display
of the record. If the last or only display is already
shown, proceed to the next record.
During inquiry execution, this key scrolls forward
through the displays of a record when a different
record is not requested.

•

Home

Valid only during enter/update or inquiry execution.
Its function depends on the cursor position when the
key is pressed:
1.

If the cursor is not at the initial cursor position,
the cursor is returned to that position.

If the cursor is at the initial cursor position,
the following occurs:
a. If the first or only display for a record is
being shown for update mode, the record
is reset to its values before any updates.
b. If the first or only display for a record is
being shown for entry or insert mode, or
a new entry is being prompted for in update
mode, the prompting is reset to the start
of the current mode; any data entered to this
prompt or record is lost.
c. If the first display for a record is not being
shown, the display is reset to the preceding
one for that record. Any data entered or
changed on the current display is not saved.

Figure 6-3 (Part 1 of 2). DFU Function Control Keys

6-6

,
Key

•

Function
Control
Key
Field Exit

Moves the cursor to the first position of the next
unprotected field on the display. For alphanumeric
fields, characters to the right of, and including,
the current cursor position in the exited field are
blanked. For numeric fields, the exited field is
right adjusted and leading zeros are inserted. If
DFU is in enter, update, or inquiry execution, and
the cursor is in the record type field, this key functions the same as the Enter/Rec Adv key. This key
also functions as the Enter/Rec Adv key when the
last data field on the display is entered .

Field -

Causes a negative sign to be placed after the rightmost
character in the current numeric field; it then functions
as the Field Exit key.

Field

Description

Roll t
(Roll Up)

Indicates a positive numeric field by placing a blank
after the rightmost position of the current numeric
field; it then functions as the Field Exit key.
When processing by record key in inquiry mode, scrolls
to the next record in key sequence in the file. When
processing by record number in inquiry or update mode,
scrolls to the next nonblank record in the file.

Note: For a discussion of record key or number retrieval, see the section Retrieving Records by Scrolling
in this chapter.
•

Roll {.
(Roll Down)

When processing by record key in inquiry mode, scrolls
to the preceding record in key sequence in the file.
When processing by record number in inquiry or update
mode, scrolls to the preceding nonblank record in the
file.

Note: For a discussion of record key or number retrieval, see the section Retrieving Records by Scrolling
in this chapter.

Figure 6-3 (Part 2 of 2). DFU Function Control Keys

A Field Exit, Field -, or Field + function control key must be pressed to complete
a field; DFU provides no automatic skipping from field to field when you are entering data or are responding to DFU job setup prompts.

How to Operate DFU

6-7

COMMAND PARAMETERS
You can use the HELP procedure to display the DFU procedures. Enter HELP
DFU to be prompted for the DFU procedures. The following display appears:

,.
DATA FILE UTILITY PROCEDURES

o - Exit From DFU Processing
1 - ENTER Procedure, Creates a Data File
2 - INQUIRY Procedure, Displays a Data File
3 - LIST Procedure, Sorts/Prints a Data File
4 - UPDATE Procedure, Changes a Data File

ENTER NUMBER OF OPTION REQUIRED

--->

The following parameters make iJp the DFU commands. Figure 6-4 shows each
DFU command and its associated parameters.
If you omit the first or second parameter (filename or DFU format name) when
initially keying any DFU command, DFU prompts for all the parameters associated
with that command on a single display.

6-8

Command

Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter
8
4
9
1
2
3
5
6
7

Parameter
10

DFU
ENTER

Filename

DFU
format
name

RPG II
source
name

Number
of
records

File type

DFU
DFU
source
source
processing name

User
library

Display
source
name

UPDATE

Filename

DFU
format
name

RPG II
source
name

Number
of
records

File type

DFU
DFU
source
source
processing name

User
library

Display
source
name

INQUIRY

Filename

DFU
format
name

RPG II
source
name

File type

DFU
DFU
sou rce
source
processing name

User
library

Display
source
name

LIST

Filename

DFU
format
name

RPG II
source
name

File type

DFU
DFU
source
source
processing name

SORTI
NOSORT

Master
file
name

User
library

Figure 6-4. Command Statement Parameters

filename: This is the name of the file to be processed. DFU prompts for all parameters for the function on a single display if you omit it on the initial command. DFU
prompts for the file name individually if omitted on the Command Parameters
display.
DFU format name: This is the name of the format description (job processing

information) to be used to process the data files. DFU prompts for all parameters
for the function on a single display if you omit it on the initial command.
RPG /I source name: This is the name of the source member containing RPG II
specifications that describe.the file to be processed. This parameter is required
only if the DFU format description does not exist, and job setup must be invoked.
It is prompted for in this situation.
number of records: When used with the ENTER command, this parameter speci-

fies the maximum number of records you wish to enter in the file. DFU prompts
for this parameter if you omit it on the initial ENTER command, or on the DFU
Enter Command Parameters display. When used with the UPDATE command,
this parameter specifies the number of records by which to extend a file when it is
full. Values of zero or blank indicate no file extension. If your system is. not configured with the Extended Disk Data Management (EDM), or if you are processing a
sequential file, this parameter will be ignored for the UPDATE command.
SORT/NOSORT: This parameter indicates whether the file is to be sorted prior
to listing. The default for this parameter is NOSORT.
file type: This indicates the type of file that DFU processes. It must be blank or

D to indicate a data file.

How to Operate DFU

6-9

DFU source processing: This two-character parameter is applicable if the format
description does not exist and the job setup must be executed. It indicates
whether the D FU source specifications for this job are saved already, or are to
be saved when the job setup is completed.
DFU source name: This is the name of the source member that contains, or
will contain, saved DFU specifications. This parameter is required only for job
setup.
master file name: This is the name of the indexed file containing the master file
information for the file to be listed (if needed). If required for the job, it must be
entered on the initial List command or on the Command Parameters display. DFU
will not prompt for the master file name individually.
user library: This is the name of an optional user library. All library members
associated with the DFU job are looked for or stored in this library. If this
parameter is not specified, DFU uses the system library.
display source name: This parameter is only valid when you are doing a job
setup of enter, update, or inquiry. It indicates the name under which the
display format source specifications that DFU generates are to be stored. If
omitted on the initial command and on the Parameter Prompt display, DFU generates a name, and then removes the source member after the corresponding display
load member has been created.

ENTER MODE AND UPDATE MODE
The ENTER and UPDATE commands are described together since the same
functions are performed for both commands:
•

Add new records to a fi Ie

•

Change existing records in a file

•

Delete existing records in a file

The only difference is that you sign on with the ENTE R command when the
file does not exist, and you sign on with the UPDATE command when the file
exists.

Enter Mode

To create a new data file, key the word ENTER and press the Enter/Rec Adv key.
DFU prompts for all the ENTER parameters as shown in Figure 6-5.

6-10

SETUP ONLY-(S)

DATA FILE UTILITY ENTER PROCEDURE

Create data files.
~

Name Of Fi 1e To Be Created ••..•••.••..•••••.•••..•••••••••••••

~Name

Of DFU Format (If Saved, Or To Be Saved) •••••••••••••••••

~_Number

~. Name

~Name

Record~

To Be In File ••••••.••••••.•.•••••••••••••••

Of User Loj brary •••.••••.•••.••....•••••••.••••••••••••••• #LI6RARY

Of RPG II Source ..•.••....••.••••••••••.•...•••••••••••••

(5)

OFU Source Process;ng Parameter (hWNY/YN/YY/GOI .............. NN

(5)

Name Of DFU Source (If Saved, Or To Be Saved) ••..••••••••••••.

(5)

Of Display Screen Source (If To Be Saved) ..••••••••••.•••

(5)

~Name

Figure 6·5. DFU ENTER Command Parameters

You should key responses to promptsethroughe These are required for
ENTER execution. Respond to prompts GthroughOonly if the job was not
previously defined and saved. Press the Enter/Rec Adv key after all necessary
prompts are complete.

Specify the name of the file to be created. The filename can be up to eight
characters long and must start with an alphabetic character. The filename
must not duplicate an existing file.
Specify the name of the format description that is used to enter the file. A
null response indicates DFU is to create a default format, which is to be
removed from the library at the end of the job; in this case, DFU enters the
job setup prompting routine.

•

Specify the total number of records that you expect to eventually be in the
file, not just the number you expect to enter this session.

Specify the name of the library that contains the DFU format member for
the job. Note that DFU assumes your format is in the system library
(#LlBRARY) if you do not enter a user library or if you enter blanks.

You can skip the preceding prompting sequence by initially keying in the
complete command:
ENTER filename,DFU format name" number of records"",user library

Note: The user library parameter is required if the DFU format description is
in a library other than the system library. If so, you must enter the command
with the user library specified if you do not use DFU prompt screens; DFU does
not prompt for this parameter if it is omitted.

How to Operate DFU

6·11

A sample command for the enter function (if not using the display that prompts
for all parameters) is:
ENTER SALESORD,ORDERFMT,,50

Update Mode
To update a data file, key the word UPDATE and press the Enter/Rec Adv key.
DFU prompts as shown in Figure 6-6 for all the UPDATE parameters.

:;: I

. l N a.. e Of Fil e To Be

Ma~:~:~: : ~~ ~ ~:~. ~ ~:~: ~ : :~ '~

SETUP ONly-(s)l

.....

Name Of OFU Format (If Saved, Or To Be Saved) ...••..•..•...
Number Of Records To Extend File When Full (0-8000000) ••.•• 0

~Name Of User Library •••.••••••...••.•...•.•••••••••••..•••• ~LIBRARY

~Name Of RPG II Source ...•.••••••••••••.•..•••.•••••••...•••

(S)

~OFU Source Processing Parameter (NN,NY,YN,YY,GO) •••••••••.• ~

(S)

Name Of DFU Source (If Saved, Or To Be Saved) •••.•••••.•••.

(S)

~Name Of Display Screen Source (If To Be Saved> •••.••.••••••

(S)

Figure 6-6. DFU UPDATE Command Parameters

C!) .

You should key responses to prompts
through
These are required for
UPDATE execution. Respond to promptsG through
only if the job was not
previously defined and saved. Press the Ent~r!Rec: Adv key after all necessary
responses are entered.

e
•

6-12

Specify the name of the data file being updated. The file name must already
exist.
Specify the name of the format description that is used to update the file. A
null response indicates DFU is to create a default format, which is to be
removed from the library at the end of the job; in this case, DFU enters the
job setup prompting routine.
Specify the number of records to extend the file when it is full. Values of
zero or blank indicate no file extension. If your system is not configured
with Extended Disk Data Management (EDM), or if you are processing a
sequential file, this parameter will be ignored.
Specify the name of the library that contains the DFU format member for
the job. Note that DFU assumes your format is in the system library
(#LlBRARY) if you do not enter a user library or if you enter blanks.

You can skip the preceding prompting sequence by initially keying in the
complete command:
UPDATE filename,DFU format name""""user library

Note: When you key in the complete command, you must enter the user library
parameter if the DFU format description is not in the system library. If you do
not specify a library, DFU will not prompt you for this parameter.
A sample command for the update function (if not using the display that prompts
for all parameters) is:
UPDATE SALESORD,ORDERFMT
After you have entered this information, a display similar to either Figure 6-7 or
6-8 appears. If you key in the ENTE R command, a display similar to Figure 6-7
appears, allowing you to add records. If you key in the UPDATE command, a
display similar to Figure 6-8 appears, allowing you to request existing records that
you want to modify.
Figure 6-7 is an example of the ENTER command where DFU generates the record
keys. If DFU is not generating record keys, periods will appear next to *KEY,
and the cursor will be positioned at the first period.
Figure 6-8 is an example of the initial display for the UPDATE command. You can
request a PART number to be updated, or press the ENTRY or INSERT command
keys to add new records.

·~Y-"-----"',

FILENAME: SALESORD
MOOE: ENT . .
LAST RECORD TYPE:
AUTO-DUP: OFF
CUSTOMER NO.
OUR ORDER NO.
CUST ORO. NO.
DATE
SHIPPED TO
SHIP VIA

.:.

....

~------------------------------------------------------------------'"----Figure 6-7. Initial ENTER Command Sample Display (DFU-Generated Keys)

How to Operate DFU

6-13

UPDATE INVENTRY
RECORD TYPE: 01
PART NUHBER.~ ••••••

FILENAME: INVENTRY
MODE: UPDATE
LAST RECORD TYP~:
AuTO-DUP: OFF

Figure 6-8. Initial UPDATE Command Sample Display

Enter/Update Display Format
The display format is similar within the enter/update functions. An explanation
of the DFU display screen follows.

Status Information

Lines 1 and 2 of the display (Figure 6-7) contain the status information for the
current enter/update DFU job. You cannot enter over this information except
to change the current record type .
•

o
e
e

o
6-14

Title: The job title, which appears on any printout for this job.
FILENAME: The name of the file being processed.
MODE: ENTRY -A new record is being entered into a file.
UPDATE-An existing record is being altered.
INSERT -A record is being added between existing records in the file.
RECORD TYPE: What record type is being processed. You can change this
value by entering a new value after positioning the cursor at this field. (Pressing ttie Select Format commandJunction key positions the cursor here when
automatic record sequencing is not being used.) This information is not displayed when a new record is being prompted for in update mode.
LAST RECORD TYPE: The type of the last record processed. If updating a
record, this corresponds to the record type of the current record being updated.
It is blank for the first record processed. It is also blank if a record is retrieved
while in update mode, and-DFU-isunableto determrne the record type.

AUTO-DUP: This indicator is either ON or OFF to indicate whether autoduplication is in effect or not. You can reverse the status of this field by pressing the Auto Dup command function key. When ON, fields specified as autoduplication fields at job setup time are automatically inserted with the
corresponding data from the previous record processed.
Record Key or Record Number and Headings: This area contains the prompts
and response areas for the record key or record number of the record to be
processed. Each record to be processed is identified by a unique record key or
record number. The record key consists of one to five fields. Beginning on line
3, the heading and data for each field that makes up the record key can be
supplied to the data file. When using record numbers, the heading and data for
the entire record number field are displayed on line 3. There aie two ways in
which record keys or record numbers can be supplied to the data file. You
can supply them or DFU supplies them for you. This choice is made during
job setup. In enter mode, if a value for the record key or record number is
displayed, DFU is generating record keys or record numbers for you. If no
value is shown for the record key or record number, you must specify the
record key or record number.

Operator Specified Record Keys or Record Numbers: When you specify record
keys or record numbers, the initial display prompts for (1) the key or number
of the record to be processed, and (2) all of the fields for that record type that
fit on the first display you enter. The record key or record number appears on
any succeeding displays along with remaining field prompts required to complete
the record; however, the record key or record number cannot be modified after
the first display is entered.
DFU Generated Record Keys: When DFU generates the record keys, the initial
display contains the first record key and prompts for the first set of fields for the
record type indicated. DFU starts with a key value of 00010 when a file is
created. When an existing file is being updated, DFU locates the highest record
key and starts generating record keys at the next multiple of 10.

You can specify a new record key that is less than the next record key to be
generated by pressing the Insert command function key to switch DFU to the
insert mode. You can update existing records by pressing the Update command
function key. To return to DFU generated record keys when in insert or update
modes, you must press the Entry command function key.
Note: DFU suspends automatic record key generation if one of the following
occurs:

•

The record key to be generated is greater than 99990 (DFU's maximum
generated number).

•

A duplicate record key is encountered when DFU attempts to write a record
for which it had generated the record key. In this case it is assumed that
another operator is already having DFU generate record keys for this file.

In these cases, you can still process in entry, update or insert modes, but keys are
no longer generated for you in entry mode.

How to Operate DFU

6-15

DFU Generated Record Numbers: When DFU is generating the record numbers,
the initial display contains the first record number and prompts for the first set of
fields for the record type indicated. DFU starts with the record number of the
first blank record in the file, and increments the record numbers by one for each
successive record.

You can specify your own record number by pressing the Insert command function
key to switch to insert mode. You can update existing records by pressing the
Update command function key. To return to DFU generated record numbers when
in insert or update modes, you must press the Entry command function key.
Note: DF,-!suspends record number generation if one of the following occurs:

•

The record number to be generated is higher than the last record which can be
in the file.

•

The record 'number to be generated is too large for the record number field.

•

The record number to be generated corresponds to a record that is not
currently blank .

.In these cases, you can still process in entry, insert, or update modes, but record
numbers are no longer generated for you in entry mode.

Data Fields and Headings: This area contains the prompts and response
areas for the data in the current record. The data fields for a record follow
the record key on the display. If a record requi res more data than fits on
the first display, additional displays appear to allow completion of the
record. If space allows, a blank line is inserted by DFU to separate the
data fields from the record key or record number on the display. New data to
be entered is identified by periods on the display. If existing data is to be
changed, the actual data appears on the display.
When a new display appears, the cursor is at the first field where you
can enter data.
Numeric fields have one more position than the actual field size. This is the
rightmost position in the field which contains the sign (blank or -). When
processing alphanumeric data fields keyed by the operator, DFU replaces
all trailing periods with blanks. For numeric fields, all periods are replaced
with zeros. A Field Exit ft:lnctioncontrol key is required to right-adjust
and to zero-fill a numeric field.

6-16

Errors. The last line of the display shows error messages. This line is blank until
an error is detected; at which time the field, field heading, and error message are
displayed and highlighted. The MIC (message identification code) is also displayed so you can easily look up the error in the Displayed Messages Guide.

Selecting a Record Type for Processing

When you are creating or changing records, and the current record type (RECORD
TYPE) is not correct, you can request a new record type for processing in one of
the following ways:
1.

Field Backspace (~) to the RECORD TYPE status field, key in the record
identifying indicator for the record type desired, and press the Field Exit
key.

Press the Select Format command function key. This causes one of the
following:
•

If in entry mode, and sequenced record types were defined at job setup,
DFU automatically displays the record format of the next record type in
the sequence; if there are no more record types in the sequence, the first
sequenced record type is selected.

•

If in update or insert mode, or if sequenced record types are not
defined for entry mode, the cursor is positioned at the RECORD
TYPE field. Key the record identifying indicator for the record
type desired, and press the Field Exit key.

Note: If in entry mode with sequenced record types, and you wish a

nonsequenced record type or a record type out of sequence, you must
use step 1 to select the record type. After completing a record, the
record type is reset to the last sequenced record type displayed.

How to Operate DFU

6-17

Duplicating Data from a Previous Record

To eliminate the need for keying data that is repeated from the previous record,
you can use one of the following methods for duplicating data:
1.

Auto·duplication of data-fields that were specified as auto-duplication
fields in the format description are duplicated from the previous record
processed whenever the Auto-Dup indicator is ON; in this situation, the
duplicated data is displayed and you can not key over it. Reverse the
status of the Auto-Dup indicator (ON or OFF) by pressing the Auto Dup
command function key. If all the fields on a screen are defined as autoduplication fields and the Auto-Dup indicator is ON, the fields will be
processed but the screen will not be displayed.

Duplication with the Dup function control key-you can indicate data is
to be duplicated into a field from the previous record by pressing the Dup
function control key; the characters7are placed in the positions to be
duplicated for that field. This key is valid when:
•

The field being duplicated is a record key or a record number field.

• The previous record is the same record type as the current record.
• The previous record is a different record type than the current
record, but the field to be duplicated is defined as an autoduplication field and the Auto-Dup indicator is OFF.
Note: For update mode, DFU does not duplicate data from the
preceding statement. Instead, the DUP key ignores your update to
that field and restores the field to its original state.

6.18

Displaying Batch Accumulators
After a record is complete, DFU updates the batch accumulator for any accumulator fields the record may contain. This update is as follows:
Entry or insert mode: Accumulators are added to the appropriate batch totals.
Update mode:
•

If a record is deleted, accumulators are subtracted from the batch totals.

•

If a deleted record is changed to nondeleted status (by changing the
delete code), the accumulators are added to the batch totals.

•

If a record is changed, changes to the accumulator fields are reflected
in the batch totals.

Note: If you change the format (record type) of a record and update the resulting
record, only the accumulators for that record type will be updated.
When the batch accumulators are updated, it is possible for the values to overflow
their respective hold areas. The accumulator value before overflow is displayed
and printed if a printer has been used for this job. The current values in these
accumulators can be displayed at any time by pressing the Display Accum
command function key; the values are printed if a printer has already been used
for this job. The values in the batch~ccumulators are then added to the total
accumulators (end of job total) and the batch accumulators reset to zero.

How to Operate DFU

6·19

Entering a New Record
To enter data:

6-20

Check line 1 of the display to ensure you are in entry mode. If not, press
the Entry command function key. When DFU returns to entry mode from
any other mode, the record type is reset to the last record type processed
in entry mode.

Check that the record type on the second line of the display is the same as
the record type to be entered. If not, select the correct record type for
processing (described earlier in this chapter).

ehe-ck thestattls-of the Auto-9up indicator-.-Use-the-AutO-Oupcommand
function key to set the Auto-Dup indicator ON or OFF.

The heading on each line names the field to be keyed. Key the data for each
field, including the record key or record number if DFU is not generating
keys or record numbers. As each field is keyed, press one of the Field Exit
function control keys to advance the cursor to the next field. When a Field
Exit function control key is pressed after the last field on the display, the
data is returned to DFU to be placed in the record. If you do not key data
into the last data field in the display (or you cannot because of auto-duplication), press the Enter/Rec Adv key to return the data to DFU for processing.

If a record requires more displays, the next display now appears. Key data
as in step 4, except you cannot alter the record key or record number. Repeat
step 5 until all displays for the record type are keyed. If you wish to bypass
remaining displays for the record, indicate the record is complete by pressing
the Rec Adv command function key. In this case, auto-duplication of data will
occur as applicable and packed numeric fields will be initialized to packed
zero values in any succeeding displays for the record.

When the record is complete, it is written in the file and printed (if the
print option was specified in the format description). Return to step 2 to
enter the next record.

Updating an Existing Record
To change data in an existing data file proceed as follows:
1.

If the mode displayed on line 1 of the display is not update, press the
Update command function key.

Check the status of the Auto-Dup indicator. If you need to change data
that is in an Auto-Dup field, the Auto-Dup indicator must be off. Use the
Auto Dup command function key to set the Auto-Dup indicator ON or
OFF.

Key the field or fields that make up the record key or record number of the
record you want to alter. As each field is keyed, press one of the Field Exit
function control keys to advance the cursor to the next field. When a Field
Exit function control key is pressed after the last field on a display, the data
is returned to DFU to retrieve the record. If you do not key data into
the last data field on the display, press the Enter/Rec Adv key to
return the data to DFU for processing.

DFU displays the data fields and associated headings. You can modify
all fields except:
•

The record key or record number.

•

Auto-duplication fields, if the Auto-Dup indicator is ON. Turning the
Auto-Dup indicator OFF allows you to modify these fields.

To update a field in the record, press the
(Field Advance) key until the
cursor is positioned at the field to be updated. The data in each field bypassed

with the Field Advance
key remains unchanged. Update the field and
press a Field Exit function control key to advance the cursor to the next field
on the display. When a Field Exit function control key is pressed after the last
displayed data field, the data is returned to DFU to be placed in.the record.
If yo u do not key data into the Iast data field on the display, press the Enter /
Rec Adv key to return the data to DFU for updating the record. Repeat step 4
if the record requires more than one display. To bypass succeeding displays for
the record, press the Rec Adv command function key. In this case, data in
succeeding displays for the record will not be altered.
5.

When the record is complete, it is written in the~tile---and printed (if the
print option was specified in the format description). Return to step 2 to
enter the next record.

How to Operate DF U

6-21

Deleting an Existing Record
The following instructions assume that you have entered a DFU ENTER or
UPDATE command and are operating in entry, update, or insert mode. To
delete a record in an existing data file proceed as follows:
1.

If the mode displayed on line 1 of the display is not update, press the
Update command function key.

Check the status of the Auto-Dup indicator. Use the Auto Dup
command function key to set the Auto-Dup indicator ON or OFF.

Key the field or fields that make up the record key or record number of the
record you want to delete. As each field is keyed, press one of the Field Exit
function control keys to advance the cursor to the next field. When a Field
Exit function control key is pressed after the last field on a display, the data
is ret\Jrned to DFU to retrieve the record to be deleted. If you do not key
data into the last data field on the display, press the Enter/Rec Adv key to
pass the record key or record number to D F U.

To delete the record displayed, press the Delete command function key.
The record is marked for deletion and a RECORD DELETED message
is printed along with the record if printing is specified. Return to
step 2 to delete another record.

Note: Deleted records are not physically removed until the ORGANIZE
procedure is run against the file.
A message appears on the next display:
PREVIOUS RECORD PROCESSED WAS DELETED

6~22

Inserting a Record Between Existing Records
The following instructions assume that you have entered a DFU Enter/Update
command and are operating in entry, update, or insert modes. To insert records
in an existing data file proceed as follows:
1.

Check line 1 of the display to ensure you are in insert mode. If not, press the
Insert command function key. The record type will be set to that of the last
valid record type to be displayed.

Check that the record type on the second line of the display is the same
as the record type to be entered. If not, select the correct record type for
processing (described earlier in this chapter).

Check the status of the Auto-Dup indicator. Use the Auto Dup command
function key to set the Auto-Dup indicator ON or OFF.

The heading on each line names the field to be keyed. Key the data for each
field, including the record key or record number. As each field is keyed, press
one of the Field Exit function control keys to advance the cursor to the next
field. When a Field Exit key is pressed after the last field on the display, the
data is returned to DFU to be placed in the record. If you do not key data
into the last data field in the display, press the Enter/Rec Adv key to return
the data to DFU for processing.

If a record requires more displays, the next display now appears. Key data
as in step 4, except you cannot alter the record key or record number. Repeat
step 5 until all displays for the record type are keyed. If you wish to bypass
remaining displays for the record, indicate the record is complete by pressing
the Rec Adv command function key. In this case, auto-duplication of data
will occur as applicable and packed numeric fields will be initialized to
packed zero values in any succeeding displays for the record.

After the record is complete it is written in the file and printed (if the print
option was specified in the format description). Return to step 2 to insert
the next record.

How to Operate DFU

6-23

Retrieving the Previous Record Processed
If you are starting a new record in entry, update, or insert mode, you can retrieve
the previous record proce,ssed as follows:
1.

Press the Rec Bksp command function key. This causes the mode to switch
to update, and displays the last record proc~ssed.

Update or delete the record as specified in the Updating an ExistingRecord or
Deleting an Existing Record section of this chapter. After completing the
record, the mode returns to that exited when you pressed the Rec Bksp command function key.

Retrieving Records by Scrolling
If you are processing a file by record number in update mode, you can retrieve
records for update or deletion with a scrolling technique.
1.

Press the Roll t (Roll Up) key to retrieve the next nonblank record in the
file, or the Roll t (Roll Down) key to retrieve the preceding nonblank record
in the file. The scroll is from the last record processed, whether it was
created, updated, or simply displayed for update.

Update or delete the record as specified under Updating an Existing Record
or Deleting an Existing Record. After completing the record, you will be
prompted for the record number of the next record to be processed.

Note: The scrolling capability is not available when you are currently reviewing
the last record processed; that is, if you retrieved the record for update by pressing
the Rec Bksp key.

The scrolling capability is available any other time you are in update mode; that is,
during the prompt for the record number of the next record to be updated or
during the display of the record (when the data fields and associated headings are
displayed). Because the scroll involves reading records sequentially until a nonblank record is retrieved, the time requi red before the next record is displayed
depends on the number of intervening blank records.

6-24

Terminating an Enter/Update Job
To end a job after you have completed processing (added, deleted, or updated
records) :
1.

Press the EOJ command function key.

Retain the default (Y) supplied by the end-of-job display (Figure 6-9) and
press the Enter/Rec Adv key.

If accumulators were specified for processing, the next display shown will be
the batch accumulator display (Figure 6-10). After viewing this display, press
the Enter/Rec Adv key.

The next display shown will be the total accumulator display (Figure 6-11).
After viewing this display, press the Enter/Rec Adv key.

Note: The batch and total accumulators are printed if printing has occurred
during job processing.
5.

The job processing is now completed.

END OF JOB REQUEST

END OF JOB?

(Y,N) •••••••••• Y

NUMBER OF RECORDS PROCESSED
CREATED
XXX
UPDATED
XXX
DELETED
XXX

~------------------------------------------------------------~~~~
Figure 6-9. Enter/Update End of Job Display

How to Operate DFU

6-25

BATCH ACCUMULATORS

QUANTITY

(PRESS ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE)

Figure 6-10. Enter/Update Batch Accumulator Display

~-------------------------------------------------------~--~.--------------~~
TOTAL ACCUMULATORS

QUANTITY

~_(_P_R_E_S

C_O HT~.I_N 'U_E )

__E_N_T_ER__K_E_Y_T_O__

Figure 6-11. Enter/Update Total Accumulator Display

6-26

~ ~

____________________________ ________

INQUIRY

To display records from a data file, key the word INQUIRY and press the Enter/Rec
Adv key. DFU prompts as shown in Figure 6-12 for all the Inquiry parameters.

~Name

DATA FILE UTILITY INCUIRY

Selectively displays anolor prints records in a data file.

Of File To Be Displayed •.••..••••••••.•.••••••••.•••..

:I 5
: I :::e5::r:: p::c::~::: ~~~~~~~:~.; ~t~:~:: :~::: ::~; .::::::: ::
I

SETUP ONLY-( S)

PROCEDV~E

Name Of DFU Format (If Saved, Or To 8e Saved) ............ ..

Name Of User Li brary ....................................... #LIORARY

I
,-"
~

(S)

Name Of DFU Source (If Saved, Or To Be Saved) ...•....••...•

(5)

Name Of Display Screen Source (If To Be Saved)

(S)

••....••.•.•

Figure 6-12. DFU Inquiry Command Parameters

0,0,

You should key responses to prompts
and
These are required for
Inquiry execution. Respond to promptsG)thrOUgheOnlY if the job was not
previously defined and saved. Press the Enter/Rec Adv key after all necessary
responses are entered.

e
e
e

Specify the name of the file to be displayed. The file name must already
exist.
Specify the name of the format description that is used to display the file.
A null response indicates DFU is to create a default format, which is to be
removed from the library at the end of the job; in this case, DFU enters the
job setup prompting routine.
Specify the name of the library that contains the DFU format member for
the job. Note that DFU assumes your format is in the system library
(#LlBRARY) if you do not enter a user library or if you enter blanks.

How to Operate DFU

6-27

You can skip the preceding prompting sequence by initially keying the complete
command:
INQUI RY filename,DFU format name""",user library

Notes:
1. The user library parameter is required if the DFU format description is in a
library other than the system library. If so YOU must enter the command
with the user library specified if you do not use the DFU Inquiry Command
Parameters display because DFU does not prompt for this parameter if it is
omitted.
2-. ~ Command--Earametersearlie.rJn this chapter for parameter descri ptions.
A sample command (if not using the display that prompts for all parameters) for
the inquiry function is:
INQUIRY SALESORD,ORDERFMT
After you key the INQUtRYcommand, the first record in the file is displayed on
the screen (Figure 6-13).

~I··~uu~I~D-E-R-S-------F-I-LE-N-A-M-E-:-s-l~---~~D-E-:-IN-Q-U-I-R-y---l

•

I
_

RECORD TYPE: 01
*KEY 00010 .....•

CUSTOMER NO.
OUR ORDER NO.
CUST. ORO. NO.
DATE
SHIPPED TO

21884
XC4313
13019
08/15/719

SHIP VIA

AIR FREIGHT

Figure 6-13. Inquiry Sample Display

6-28

Inquiry Display Format

The display format for inquiry is explained in the following paragraphs.

Status Information

Lines 1 and 2 of the display (Figure 6-13) contains the status information for the
current DFU inquiry job. You cannot key over this information except to change
the current record type.

Title: This is tne job title which appears on any printout for this job.

G FILENAME:
•

e
o

This is the name of the file being processed .

MODE: INQUIRY-Displaying and printing operator selected records.
RECORD TYPE: This shows what record type is being processed. You can
change this value by keying a new value after positioning the cursor at this
field. (Pressing the Select Format command function key positions the
cursor here).
Record Key or Record Number and Headings: When processing by record key,
this area identifies the key of the current record being displayed, and prompts
for the key of the next record to be displayed. The record key consists of one
to five fields. Beginning on line 3, the headings and data for each field that
makes up the record key (one field per line) are displayed. Each line of the
record key contains:
•

Key field heading to identify the field displayed.

•

Current record key field to show the key of the record currently on
display.

•

Next record key field to prompt for the key of the next record to be
displayed.

When processing by record number, line 3 contains the record number heading,
the record number of the current record on display, and a space (next record
number field) where you can enter the record number of the next record
desired. The cursor is positioned at this record number request area.

o
•

Data Field and Headings: This area displays the data for the current
record. If a record requires more data than fits on the first display,
additional displays appear to allow completion of the record. If space
allows, a blank line is inserted by DFU to separate the data fields from the
record key or record number on the display .
Errors: The last line of the display shows error messages. This line is blank
until an error is detected; at which time the field, field heading, and error
message is displayed and highlighted. The MIC (message identification code) is
also displayed so you can easily look up the error in the Displayed Messages
Guide.

How to Operate OF U

6-29

Selecting Records to be Displayed
There are three ways in which you can display a record while in Inquiry:
1.

Key over the periods in the next record key or the record number area to request
the next record you want displayed. As each field is keyed, press a Field Exit
function control key to advance the cursor to the next field. When a Field
Exit function control key is pressed after the last field, the data is returned to
DFU to retrieve the record. If you do not key data into the last field on the
display, press the Enter/Rec Adv key to pass the data to DFU.
Note: When processing by record key, if a key field in the next record to be

displayed is the same as the key field currently displayed, press the Dup function control key to duplicate that data. The characters will appear when the
key is pressed, and DFU replaces these characters with the corresponding
data when the record is retrieved.

Press the Rollt (roll up) key to display succeeding records. For indexed
files, if a record key has been entered in the record key response area, DFU
displays the next record key value with a key value equal to or greater than
the record key value entered; if this key is higher than the last key in the file,
the last record is displayed. For direct or sequential files, DFU displays the
next non-blank record with a record number equal to or greater than the
record number entered; if this record number is beyond the last non-blank
record in the file or beyond the end of the file, the last non-blank record is
displayed. When scrolling from a specified record number in direct or
sequential files, you should specify a record number as close to a non-blank
record as possible for performance reasons. If no record key or number is
entered in the response area, DFU displays the next record relative to the
currently displayed record.

Press the RolI"- (roll down) key to display preceding records. When processing
by record key, the preceding record in key sequence is displayed. When processing by record number, the preceding nonblank record is displayed.

When a record is retrieved that has more data than fits on a single display, you can
view the subsequent displays of the record by pressing the Enter/Rec Adv key without keying any data.
Note: If a field of the record key or the record number field is numeric, you need

enter only the rightmost digits and press a Field Exit function control key. The
field is automatically right-justified and leading zeros are inserted before the record
is displayed.

Printing Records from Display
To print a record when it is displayed on the screen, press the Print Rec command
function key and the record will be printed for you.

Terminating an Inquiry Job

To end a job after you have inquired into a file:
1.

Press the EOJ command function key.

Retain the default (Y) supplied by the end-of-job display (Figure 6-14), and
press the Enter/Rec Adv key.

The job processing is now completed.

END OF JOB REQUEST

END OF JOB? (Y,N) ••••••••.• Y

,----""

Figure 6-14. Inquiry End of Job Display

LIST
To list records from a data file, key the word LIST and press the Enter/Rec Adv
key. 0 F U prompts as shown in Figure 6-15 for all the LIST parameters.

How to Operate DFU

6-31

DATA FILE UTILITY LIST PROCEDURE

i-+! I
:

SETUP ONLY-(S)

Sorts and prints data files in various report-type formats.
Name Of FiT e To Be Li sted •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Name Of DFU Forrr.at (If Saved) Or To Be Saved) ...•••.••.••••
SORT/NOSORT Ind;cat;on .................................... . NOSORT

~Name Of Master. Fi 1e (If

Any) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

~Name Of User L,brary ••.••••..•••••••••..••.•.•.•....•••••..
~Name Of RPG II Source •.••••.••.•••••••.•.•..••.•..•.•••••••

(S)

~DFU

(S)

~Narne

Source processing Parameter (NN/NY/YN/YY/GO) .•••••..••• NN

of DFU Source (If Saved) Or To Be Saved) •..••••.••••..

Figure 6·15. DFU LIST Command Parameters

You should key responses to prompts" through
These are required for list
and. only if the job was not pre·
execution. Respond to prompts
viously defined and saved. Press the Enter/Rec Adv key after all necessary prompts
are completed.

0, CD,

Specify the name of the file to be listed. The file named must already exist.

G Specify the name of the format description that is used to display the file.

A
null response indicates DFU is to create a default format,. which is to be
removed from the library at the end of the job. In this case, DFU enters the
job setup prompting routine .

•

Specify whether or not the data file is to be sorted prior to listing. Note that
DFU assumes the file will not be sorted (NOSORT) if you do not change the
displayed default to SORT.

CD Specify the name of the related master file associated with this list.

Leave this

entry blank if there is no master file.

G Specify the name of the library that contains the DFU format member for the
job. Note that DFU assumes your format is in the system library (#LlBRARY)
if you do not enter a user library or if you enter blanks.

6·32

(S)

You can skip the preceding prompting sequence by initially keying the complete
command:
LIST filename,DFU format name"SORT""master file,user library
Notes:
1. The user library parameter is required if the DFU format description is in a
library other than the system library. If so, you must enter the command
with the user library specified if not using the DFU Prompt display because
DF U does not prompt for this parameter if it is omitted.
2. The master file parameter is required if the DFU format description specifies
that a master file be used by DFU during job execution. If so, you must
enter the command with the master file specified if not using the DFU
Prompt display because DFU does not prompt for this parameter if it is
omitted.
After you have entered the LIST command, the message:
YOUR DATA FILE IS NOW BEING SORTED
appears momentarily on the screen if you have requested that your data file be
sorted. The message:
YOUR DATA FILE IS NOW BEING LISTED
will then appear on the screen until the job is complete.
Note: See Command Parameters earlier in this chapter for parameter
descri pt ions.
A sample command for the list function (if not using the display that prompts for
all parameters) is:
LIST SALESORD,ORDERFMT"SORT

How to Operate DFU

6-33

6-34

Chapter 7. How to Operate SEU

The source entry utility (SEU) allows you to enter and maintain source and procedure members in the system or user library. With the ideographic version of the
SSP, SEU allows ideographic characters to be entered in source statements of those
languages and utilities that provide ideographic support. There are six modes of
SEU operation:
•

Enter/Update allows new statements to be entered or existing ones to be modified.

•

Delete allows selected statements to be deleted from an existing member.

• Move/Copy allows statements to be moved or copied to a new location in a

member. The move mode copies statements to the new location while deleting
them from their original location. The copy mode allows statements to be
copied to a new location while leaving the statement in the original location.
•

Include copies to the member any statements that exist in a library.

• Scan searches a member for a statement that contains a given sequence of
characters. Once you are in the sean mode, Scan to Update allows you to
update the statement by displaying it in the enter/update mode. A Scan and
. Replace option allows you to replace a string of characters within a record.
•

Message Translate Aid allows you to create a message source member that

contains two languages for each message.

HOW TO SIGN ON

You sign on SEU by entering the SEU command. You can use the HELP procedure
to enter the SEU command. Enter HELP SEU to be prompted for the SEU
command parameters. The format of the SEU command is:
A

R
S
SEU member name,

F
W

#SE@XTRA
, [ format member name

rstatement length'l
~

P
T

library name]
[ #LlBRARY

member name: The name of the member you are going to create or change. If you

do not enter this parameter, the SEU Command Prompts display appears. If the
name identifies an existing member in the specified library (library name parameter),
SEU assumes that the member is to be changed. If the name does not identify an
existing member, SEU assumes that the member is to be created.

How to Operate SEU

7-1

member type: The type of contents of the member to be created or changed. If
this parameter is not entered, the SEU Command Prompts display appears.

Type

Contents of Member

Auto report specifications (syntax checking available)

RPG II specifications (syntax checking available)

Source statements such as RPG II or auto report specifications, sort
sequence specifications, work station utility specifications, display
screen format specifications, or statements for a message source
member (syntax checking not avaiTable)

SFG R formats selected by SEU to match the statement being
processed

WSU (work station utility) formats selected by SEU to match the
statement being processed

Procedure

Message translate function to process a message source member

format member name: The name of a load member containing display screen
formats that this job uses in addition to the formats in #SE@FORM. #SE@FORM
contains many of the display screen formats supplied with SEU. For a Iist of the
display screen formats supplied with SEU, see SEU Display Screen Formats later in
this chapter. The SEU supplied display screen formats that are in the member
#SE@XTRA are used by default if this parameter is not entered. (#SE@FORM
or #SE@FMT must not be entered as the format member name.)

If a user member name is entered, the formats in #SE@XTRA will not be available
for that session. However, the formats in #SE@FORM will be available for that
session.
If you enter a format member name, the system searches the active user library for
the member if an active user library exists. If the member is not found in the active
u_seJ Jib~ary, or if an31ctive user library does not exist, the system c;earches the system library (#LlBRARY). If the member is not found in the acti-"e user library or
in the system library, SEU displays an error message.
Load members required for execution that have names beginning with #SE must
all reside in either the active user library or in #LlBRARY. Load members that
contain formats (#SE@FORM, #SE@XTRA, or a user format member) required
by an SEU job can reside either in the active user library or in the system library
or in both. If format members reside in both, then SEU will use the member
residing in the active user library. In order to use the member in #LlBRARY, a
user library should not be specified when signing on to the display station.

7-2

statement length: The length of the statements to be entered or changed. If you
do not enter a length or if you enter an invalid length, SEU supplies a default length.

Member
Type

Valid
Statement
Length

Default
Length

80-96 1

40-120 1

120

40-120

11f the actual statement length of a member is 80 characters, but a statement length of 96 is
specified in the SEU command, SEU automatically changes the statement length of the
member from 80 to 96. If the actual statement length of a member is greater than specified
in the SEU command, SEU displays an error message. When signing on to an existing
member, SE U will default to the existing statement length if no length is specified.

library name: The name of the library that contains the member you are going to
change, or the name of the library that will contain the member you are going to
create. If the library is not found, SEU displays an error message. If you do not
enter a name, SEU assumes the name to be #LlBRARY, the name of the system
library.
If you do not enter both the member name and the member type, the SEU Command Prompts display appears. Any parameters that were keyed on the initial
command appear to the right of the corresponding prompts on this display. The
default value of #LlBRARY appears if no library name is entered. If you enter
blanks for the library, #LI BRARY is assumed. Any parameters displayed can be
changed before the information is entered into the system.

How to Operate SEU

7-3

A sample SEU Command Prompts display is shown below:

SEU PROCEDURE

OPTIOt~AL-(

An interactive utility program that helps the user create, change,
delete and locate state~ents in source and procedure members.
Hem!ler Hame
Member Type

(A/RIS/F/~/P/T)

Format Member

Na~e

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

..••••••.••..••..••.•.•••.••.•.••••••.•.•••••

ISE~XTRA

CO}

Stat€::nent Length •••••••••••.••.•••.•••.•••••.•.••••••.•.•.•••••

NaMe of Library Containing the Member ••••••..••••..••..••••••••

~LI6RARY

Following is an example of a command statement. Assume that (1) you want to
create a procedure member named PROCM, (2) the display screen formats created
especially for this kind of job reside in the member named M RTFORM, (3) the statement length for the procedure member is 96, and (4) the new procedure member will
reside in the library named USERLlB2. The SEU command you would enter to
begin an SEU job to create PROCM is:
SEU PROCM, P, MRTFORM, 96, USERLlB2

7-4

COMMAND FUNCTION KEYS AND TEMPLATE
SEU assigns 17 command function keys, including one command function key that
displays the position and purpose of all of the SEU command function keys. A keyboard template, GX21-7660, is also available to identify the name and position of
each SEU command function key.

(

)

CMD
Key
Display

Scan
To
Update

Change
Roll
Factor

Auto
Skip

Scan/
Replace

\..

Alter
Lines
Per Stmt
4

Select
Format

)

SEU

Translate

Delete

Enter/
Update

Alter
Print

EOJ

Alter
Syntax

Search
End of
Source

Move/
Copy

Accept
With
Error

Include

,
\

'" '"

Throughout this chapter you will find the terms key and enter. Key means only to
press one of the keyboard data keys-those keys that are like the keys on a typewriter-to display data on the display screen, whether the data is for a statement or
is a response to a prompt. Enter means to press the Enter/Rec Adv key to cause
SEU to store data displayed on the display screen, to accept one or more of the
responses you have keyed, or to proceed to the next step in the current mode of
operation.
Figures 7-1 through 7-14 summarize the SEU command function keys and the function control keys for each SEU mode.

How to Operate SEU

7-5

Key

Command
Function
Key

Auto Skip

Scan/Replace

When Prompted with ENTER/UPDATE
STATEMENT NUMBER

When Statement Is Being Entered or Updated

Reverses status of auto skip option and auto skin indicator.
--

---

Changes mode to scan mode.

Ignores data keyed for displayed statement
and changes mode to scan mode.
The Scan key is invalid if no_statements exist
in the member.

Select Format

Allows you to select a different display screen format.

Delete

Changes mode to delete mode.

Ignores data keyed for displayed statement
and changes mode to delete mode.
The Delete key is invalid if no statements
exist in the member.

Enter/Update

Repeats prompt E NTE R/UPDA TE
STATEMENT NUMBER.

Alter Print

Reverses status of print option and print indicator.

EOJ

Displays end-of-job options.

Alter Syntax

Reverses status of syntax checking option and syntax checking indicator.

Search End
Of Source

Displays last statement in member.

Ignores data keyed for displayed statement
and repeats prompt ENTE R/UPDATE
STATEMENT NUMBER.

Ignores data keyed for displayed statement
and displays last statement in member.
The Search End Of Source key is inval id if no
statements exist in the member.

Move/Copy

Changes mode to move/copy mode.

Ignores data keyed for displayed statement
and changes mode to move/copy mode.
The Move/Copy key is inval id if no statements exist in the member.

0
Q

Include

Changes mode to include mode.

Ignores data keyed for displayed statement
and changes mode to include mode.

Accept With
Error

Not allowed.

Allowed only if syntax checking option is on
and error exists in an RPG " or auto report
statement. Places statement with error into
member.

Cmd Key
Display

Displays keyboard keys used as SEU command function keys and displays a brief description of each key.

Figure 7-1 (Part 1 of 2). Command Function Key Summary for Enter/Update Mode

7-6

Key

Command
Function
Key

When Prompted with ENTE R/UPDATE
STATEMENT NUMBER

Scan To
Update

Scans for a statement and displays it in the enter/update mode. Changes mode to scan if
no statement is found or an error occurs.

When Statement Is Being Entered or Updated

Invalid if no statements exist in the member.

LJ
~

Change Roll
Factor

Allows you to change the roll factor.

Not allowed.

Alter Lines
Per Stmt

Changes the number of Iines reserved
for the display of each statement.

Not allowed.

Translate

Changes mode to translate mode when
T is entered as the member type. Allows
you to enter the translation of a new
or existing message.

Ignores data keyed for displayed statement
and changes mode to translate mode. The
translate key is invalid if no statements
exist in the member. Changes mode to
translate mode when T is entered as the
member type.

Figure 7-1 (Part 2 of 2). Command Function Key Summary for Enter/Update Mode

How to Operate SEU

7-7

Key

•
•
•

Function
Control
Key

When Prompted with ENTE R/UPDATE
STATEMENT NUMBER

When Statement Is Being Entered or Updated

Enter/Rec
Adv

Indicates that you have finished keying
a response. Causes SEU to display the
selected statement.

Causes the displayed statement to be placed
in the member.

Home

Cursor is moved to the first cursor
position as defined by the current
display screen format.

When cursor is in first position for a statement, displays preceding statement. Cursor
is positioned at first position where operator
can enter data .

Dup

Not allowed.

Fills a field or part of a field with data copied
from corresponding positions in another
statement. If a new statement is being entered,
the data is copied from the preceding statement; if an existing statement is being updated,
data is copied from the original statement.

Rollt

Displays next statements as determined
by the roll factor and redisplays the
enter/update prompt.

Ignores data keyed for the displayed statement, displays next statements as determined
by the roll factor, and redisplays the enter/
update prompt.
The Rollt key is invalid if no statements
exist in the member .

Rollt

Displays preceding statements as
determined by the roll factor and
redisplays the enter/update prompt.

Ignores data keyed for the displayed statement, displays preceding statements as determined by the roll factor, and redisplays the
enter/update prompt.
The Rollt key is invalid if no statements
exist in the member.

Figure 7-2 (Part 1 of 2). Function Control Key Summary for Enter/Update Mode

7-8

Field Exit Function Control Keys

Filled

Alphameric Field
Not Right Adjust

Alphameric Right Adjust Field
or Numeric Field

Cursor automatically advances
to next field

Press:
-- (Cursor Right),
-I (Field Advance),
Field Exit, or Field +

Partially
Filled

To right-adjust, press:

Press:
-

(Cursor Right),

-t (Field Advance),

Field Exit or
Field +

Field Exit 1 , or Field +1
No right-adjust2 , press:
-- (Cursor Right) or
-I (Field Advance)

The Field Exit and Field + keys are destructive exit keys for alphameric fields that are not right-adjust fields.
That is, the field positions skipped by the cursor when the Field Exit or Field + key is pressed are set to
blanks if the field is not defined as a right-adjust field.
2 A partially filled numeric field is not right-adjusted and padded to the left with blanks. The unchanged
positions of the field retain the values they had before the operator keyed new data into part of the field.
I

Figure 7-2 (Part 2 of 2). Function Control Key Summary for Enter/Update Mode

How to Operate SEU

7-9

Command
Function
Key

When Prompted with DELETING
STATEMENT NUMBER and ENDING
STATEMENT NUMBER

Auto Skip

Not allowed.

Scan/Replace

Changes mode to scan mode. No statements are deleted.

Select Format

Not allowed.

Delete

Repeats prompts DELETING STATEMENT NUMBER and ENDING STATEMENT
NUMBER. No statements are deleted.

Enter/Update

Changes mode to enter/update mode. No statements are deleted.

Alter Print

Reverses status of print option and print indicator.

EOJ

Displays end-of-job options.

Alter Syntax

Not allowed.

Search End
Of Source

Displays last statement in member.

Move/Copy

Changes mode to move/copy mode. No statements are deleted.

Include

Changes mode to include mode. No statements are deleted.

Accept With
Error

Not allowed.

Cmd Key
Display

Displays keyboard keys used as SEU command function keys and displays a brief
description of each key.

Scan To
Update

Not allowed.

Change Roll
Factor

Allows you to change the roll factor.

Alter Lines
Per Stmt

Changes me number of lines reserved for the display of each statement.

Translate

Changes mode to translate mode when T is entered as the member type. No statements
are deleted.

Key

W
GJ
GJ
W

When A Statement(s) Is Ready to Be Deleted

_..

GJ
GJ
GJ
GJ
GJ
GJ
0
GJ
CJ

Figure 7-3. Command Function Key Summary for Delete Mode

7-10

Displays last statement in member and repeats
prompt ENDING STATEMENT NUMBER.
No statements are deleted.

Key

••
•

Function
Control
Key

When Prompted with DELETING
STATEMENT NUMBER and ENDING
STATEMENT NUMBER

Enter/Rec
Adv

Indicates that you have finished keying
one or both of the responses.

Home

Not allowed.

Dup

Not allowed.

Rollt

Displays next statements as determined
by the roll factor. Redisplays the
delete prompts and the responses keyed.

Displays next statements as determined by
the roll factor, redisplays the delete prompts,
displays the first response if it was entered,
and blanks the response to ENDING
STATEMENT NUMBER if it was entered.

Rolli

Displays preceding statements as
determined by the roll factor.
Redisplays the delete prompts and the
responses keyed.

Displays the preceding statements as determined by the roll factor, redisplays the delete
prompts, displays the first response if it was
entered, and blanks the response to ENDING
STATEMENT NUMBER if it was entered.

When A Statement(s) Is Ready to Be Deleted
Causes the selected statement(s) to be deleted.

Figure 7 -4. Function Control Key Summary for Delete Mode

How to Operate SEU

7-11

Key

Command
Function
Key

When Prompted with REPLACE CHARACTERS, NUMBER OF
REPLACE CHARACTERS, SINGLE COLUMN SCAN, END OF
REPLACE AREA, and LAST STATEMENT NUMBER

GJ
GJ
GJ

Auto Skip

Not allowed.

Scan/Replace

Repeats scan prompts.

Select Format

Not allowed.

Delete

Changes mode to delete mode.

Enter/Update

Changes mode to enter/update mode.

Alter Print

Reverses status of print option and print indicator.

EOJ

Displays end-of-job options.

Alter Syntax

Not allowed.

Search End
Of Source

Displays last statement in member and redisplays the replace prompts and
responses.

Move/Copy

Changes mode to move/copy mode.

Include

Changes mode to include mode.

Accept With
Error

Not allowed.

Cmd Key
Display

Displays keYboard keys used as SEU command function keys and displays a brief
description of each key.

Scan To
Update

Not allowed.

Change Roll
Factor

Allows you to change the roll factor.

Alter lines
Per Stmt

Changes the number of lines reserved for the display of each statement.

Translate

Changes mode to translate mode if member type is T.

GJ
0
Q

Figure 1-5. Command Function Key Summary for Replace Mode

1-12

Key

••
•

Function
Control
Key

When Prompted with REPLACE CHARACTERS, NUMBER OF
REPLACE CHARACTERS, SINGLE COLUMN SCAN, END OF
REPLACE AREA, and LAST STATEMENT NUMBER

Enter/Rec
Adv

Indicates that you have keyed at least a response to the REPLACE CHARACTERS or
the NUMBER OF REPLACE CHARACTERS prompt and that you want the scan and
replace to begin.

Home

Not allowed.

Dup

Not allowed.

Rollt

Displays next statements as determined by the roll factor, redisplays the scan prompts,
and displays any responses that were entered.

Rollt

Displays the preceding statements as determined by the roll factor, redisplays the
replace prompts, ~nd displays any responses that were entered.

Figure 7-6. Function Control Key Summary for Replace Mode

How to Operate SEU

7-13

Key

Command
Function
Key

When Prompted with MOVE/COPY
TO STATEMENT NUMBER, MOVE/
COpy FROM STATEMENT NUMBER, and ENDING STATEMENT
NUMBER

When A Statement(s)
Is Ready to Be Moved

Auto Skip

Not allowed.

Scan/Replace

Changes mode to scan mode. No statements are moved/copied.

Select Format

Not allowed.

Delete

Changes mode to delete mode. No statements are moved/copied.

Enter/Update

Changes mode to enter/update mode. No statements are moved/copied.

Alter Print

Reverses status of print option and print indicator.

EOJ

Displays end-of-job options.

Alter Syntax

Not allowed.

Search End
Of Source

Displays last statement in member.

GJ
0
GJ

Move/Copy

Repeats prompt MOVE/COPY TO STATEMENT NUMBER. No statements are moved.

Include'

Changes mode to include mode. No statements are moved/copied.

Accept With
Error

Not allowed.

Cmd Key
Display

Displays keyboard keys used as SEU command function keys and displays a brief
description of each key.

Scan To
Update

Not allowed.

Change Roll
Factor

Allows you to change the roll factor.

Alter Lines
Per Stmt

Changes the number of lines reserved for the display of each statement.

Translate

Changes mode to translate mode when T is entered as the member type. No statements
are moved/copied.

GJ
GJ

CJ
CJ

LJ
CJ

Figure 7-7. Command Function Key Summary for Move/Copy Mode

7-14

Displays last statement in member and repeats
last prompt. No statements are moved.

Key

•

Function
Control
Key

When Prompted with MOVE/COPY TO
STATEMENT NUMBER, MOVE/COPY
FROM STATEMENT NUMBER, and
ENDING STATEMENT NUMBER

Enter/Rec
Adv

Indicates that you have finished keying
one or more of the responses.

Home

Not allowed .

Dup

Not allowed.

Rollt

Displays next statements as determined
by the roll factor. Redisplays the move/
copy prompts and the responses keyed.

Displays next statements as determined by the
roll factor, redisplays the move/copy prompts,
displays any responses that were entered, and
blanks the response to ENDING STATEMENT
NUMBER if it was entered .

Rollt

Displays preceding statements as
determined by the roll factor. Redisplays the move/copy prompts and the
responses keyed.

Displays preceding statements as determined
by the roll factor, redisplays the move/copy
prompts, displays any responses that were
entered, and blanks the response to ENDING
STATEMENT NUMBER if it was entered.

When A Statement(s)
Is Ready to Be Moved/Copied
Causes the selected statement(s) to be moved
and the original statement number(s) to be
deleted, or the selected statements to be
copied and the original statements remain.

Figure 7-8. Function Control Key Summary for Move/Copy Mode

How to Operate SEU

7-15

Command
Function
Key

When Prompted with
INCLUDE LIBRARY
NAME, INCLUDE
MEMBER NAME,
or INCLUDING AT
STATEMENT NUMBER

Auto Skip

Not allowed.

Scan/Replace

Changes mode to scan mode. No statements are included. The Scan key is inval id if no
statements exist in the member.

Select Format

Not allowed.

Delete

Changes mode to delete mode. No statements are included. The Delete key is invalid if
no statements exist in the member.

Enter/Update

Changes mode to enter/update mode. No statements are included.

Alter Print

Reverses status or print option and print indicator.

EOJ

Displays end-of-job options.

Alter Syntax

Not allowed.

Search End
Of Source

Displays last statement in
signed-on member.

Key

W'
,Q

GJ
GJ
GJ
GJ
[J

When Prompted with
INCLUDING FROM
STATEMENT
NUMBER and ENDING
STATEMENT NUMBER

When A Statement(s) Is
Ready to Be Included

Displays last statement in
include member.

Displays last statement in
include member and
repeats last prompt. No
statements are included.

The Search End of Source key
is invalid if no statements exist
in the member.

Move/Copy

Changes mode to move/copy mode. No statements are included. The Move/Copy key
is invalid if no statements exist in the member.

Include

Repeats prompt INCLUDE
LIBRARY NAME.

Accept
With Error

Not allowed.

Figure 7-9 (Part 1 of 2). Command Function Key Summary for Include Mode

7-16

Repeats prompt INCLUDING AT STATEMENT
NUMBER. No statements are included.

Key

Command
Function
Key

When Prompted with
INCLUDE LIBRARY
NAME, INCLUDE
MEMBER NAME,
or INCLUDING AT
STATEMENT NUMBER

C2J

Cmd Key
Display

Displays keyboard keys used as SEU command function keys and displays a brief
description of each key.

Scan To
Update

Not allowed.

Change Roll
Factor

Allows you to change the roll factor.

LJ
CJ

Alter lines
Per Stmt

Changes the number of lines reserved for the display of each statement.

Translate

Changes mode to translate mode when T is entered as the member type. No statements
are included. The Translate key is invalid if no statements exist in the member.

When Prompted with
INCLUDING FROM
STATEMENT
NUMBER and ENDING
STATEMENT NUMBER

When A Statement(s) Is
Ready to Be Included

Figure 7-9 (Part 2 of 2). Command Function Key Summary for Include Mode

How to Operate SEU

7-17

Key

••

•

Function
Control
Key

When Prompted with INCLUDE
LIBRARY NAME, INCLUDE
MEMBER NAME, INCLUDING
AT STATEMENT NUMBER,
INCLUDING FROM STATEMENT
NUMBER, and ENDING
STATEMENT NUMBER

When A Statement(s) Is Ready to Be Included

Enter/Rec
Adv

Indicates that you have finished
keying one or more responses.

Causes the selected statement(s) to be
included in the signed-on member.

Home

Not allowed.

Dup

Not allowed.

Rollt

Displays the next statements as
determined by the roll factor.
Redisplays the include prompts
and the responses keyed.

The Roll t key is invalid if no
statements exist in the member.
RolI-l-

If statements from the include
member are not being displayed,
displays preceding statements as
determined by the roll factor, and
redisplays the include prompts and
the responses entered. If the include
member is being displayed, the
Roll I key is invalid.
The Roll. key is invalid if no
statements exist in the member.

Figure 7-10. Function Control Key Summary for Include Mode

7-18

Displays the next statements as determined by
the roll factor, redisplays the include prompts,
displays any responses that were entered, but
blanks the response to ENDING
STATEMENT NUMBER if it was entered.

Not allowed.

Key

Command
Function
Key

When Prompted with SCAN CHARACTERS, STARTING
POSITION, and NUMBER OF SCAN CHARACTERS

Auto Skip

Not allowed.

Scan/Replace

Repeats scan prompts. No scan is performed.

Select Format

Not allowed.

Delete

Changes mode to delete mode. No scan is performed.

Enter/Update

Changes mode to enter/update mode. No scan is performed.

Alter Print

Reverses the status of print option and print indicator.

EOJ

Displays end-of-job options.

GJ
GJ
[J

GJ
GJ
GJ
GJ

Alter Syntax

Not allowed.

Search End
Of Source

Displays last statement in member and redisplays the scan prompts and responses.

Move/Copy

Changes mode to move/copy mode. No scan is performed.

0
GJ

Include

Changes mode to include mode. No scan is performed.

Accept With
Error

Not allowed.

Cmd Key
Display

Displays keyboard keys used as SEU command function keys and displays a brief
description of each key.

Scan To
Update

Alternative to the Enter/Rec Adv key. Changes to enter/update mode so that you can
update the statement located by scan.

Change Roll
Factor

Allows you to change the roll factor.

c:J

Alter Lines
Per Stmt

Changes the number of lines reserved for the display of each statement.

Translate

Changes mode to translate mode when T is entered as the member type. No scan is
performed.

Figure 7-11. Command Function Key Summary for Scan Mode

How to Operate SEU

7 -19

Key

••
•

Function
Control
Key

When Prompted with SCAN CHARACTERS, STARTING
POSITION, and NUMBER OF SCAN CHARACTERS

Enter/Rec Adv

Indicates you have keyed at least a response to SCAN CHARACTERS or NUMBER OF
SCAN CHARACTE RS and you want the scan to begin.

Home

Not allowed.

Dup

.. Not allowed.

Rollt

Displays next statements as determined by the roll factor, redisplays the scan prompts,
and displays any responses that were entered.

RolI.!-

Displays the preceding statements as determined by the roll factor, redisplays the scan
prompts, and displays any responses that were entered.

Figure 7-12. Function Control Key Summary for Scan Mode

7-20

Command
Function
Key

When Prompted with ENTER MESSAGE NUMBER

Auto Skip

Not allowed.

Scan/Replace

Changes mode to scan mode. Keyed data is ignored.

Select Format

Not allowed.

Delete

Changes mode to delete mode. Keyed data is ignored.

Enter/Update

Changes mode to enter/update mode. Keyed data is ignored.

Alter Print

Reverses the status of print option and print indicator.

EOJ

Displays end-of-job options.

Alter Syntax

Not allowed.

Search End
Of Source

Displays last statement in member and redisplays the translate prompt.

Move/Copy

Changes mode to move/copy mode. Keyed data is ignored.

Key

GJ
GJ
GJ
[J
[J

GJ
GJ
GJ

0
GJ

Include

Changes mode to include mode. Keyed data is ignored.

Accept With
Error

Not allowed.

Cmd Key
Display

Displays keyboard keys used as SEU command function keys and displays a brief
description of each key.

Sc~n

To
Update

Not allowed.

Change Roll
Factor

Not allowed.

0
CJ

Alter Lines
Per Stmt

Not allowed.

Translate

Changes mode to translate mode.

f)igure 7-13. Command Function Key Summary for Translate Mode

How to Operate SEU

7-21

-•
Key

••
•

Function
Control
Key

When Prompted with ENTER MESSAGE NUMBER

Enter/Rec Adv

Indicates you have keyed a response to ENTER MESSAGE NUMBER, or you have
keyed all the translated information and want it entered.

Home

Not allowed.

Dup

Not allowed.

Rollf

Displays next statements. Up to eight statements are displayed. The translate
prompt is displayed .

Roll-/..

Not allowed.

Figure 7-14. Function Control Key Summary for Translate Mode

7-22

SEU DISPLAYS

SEU uses the display screen to display status information, statements in a member,
and display screen formats as well as prompts, responses, messages, and data that
you key.
On a 960-character display screen (12 lines), use the Rollt (roll up), RoII-l(roll down), or Enter/Rec Adv keys to display any additi-onal lines of data
(lines 13-24).
SEU highlights the following information on the displays:
•

Status line

•

Each new statement being entered and its statement number

•

E~ch

•

Data keyed in response to the SEU prompts

•

Messages

statement being changed and its statement number

Status Line
Line 1 of the display screen is the status line, which is highlighted.

How to Operate SEU

7-23

Figure 7-13 gives an example of an SEU statl-lS line.
Roll Factor
Total Length of
Input Fields

Statement
Length

Auto Skip On
Syntax
Check On

One Display
Screen Line

Name of SE U

per Statement.

Display Screen

Status Li ne--";"--16

096

0005.00

Member
Name

,t on'

Entering a

____________

~_----~--~~~~-St-a-te-m--en~t--------

096

0005 FKEYIH

ASP

F 128 128

ENTER

MEMBER

KEYBORD

5 5
4 5
3 (~
2 23 3 3 3 3
2
1
1 1 1 1 1 2
12345 6 78901234 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 ~ 145671 8 90 1 2 341R1§J 9 0123456 78901.1 3 456789
F
9
8 8
666 7 7 7 7
6
10123{+516 1 §J Q 12 34 567890 1234567890123456

0005.10

-ENTER/UPDATE STATEMENT NUMBER

Figure 7-15. Sample SEU Status Line

7-24

•

Positions 2 and 3: roll factor, 1 through 99

•

Positions 10 through 12: total length of input fields for selected display screen
format

•

Positions 16 through 23: name of selected display screen format

•

Positions 30 through 32: statement length

•

Position 39: status of auto-skip option; A if on, blank if off

•

Position 42: status of syntax checking option; S if on, blank if off

•

Position 45: status of print option; P if on, blank if off

•

Position 48: one display screen line per statement

•

Positions 55 through 62: ENTE R if entering and UPDATEif updating statements

•

Positions 65 through 72: name of the member that was signed on

•

Positions 76 through 79: number of consecutive statements being deleted, moved,
or included

Chapter 8. How to Operate Sort

The sort program allows you to rearrange records in a file, change the format of
records in a file, and drop records from a file.

RUNNING THE SORT PROGRAM

To run the sort program, you can enter either the SORT command and its
associated parameters, or enter only the word SORT or the phrase HELP SORT
and use the HELP procedure to enter the SORT command.
If you enter the SORT command, you can use the following format:
SORT input file label,source member ,output file label,number of records.,
ruser library name] [Y]
L#LlBRARY
'~
input file label: Label of the existing data file on disk to be sorted.
source member: Name of the source member that contains the sort sequence

specificati ons.
output file label: Label of the file that will contain the sorted data. This label

must not be an existing file label.
number of records: Number of records that the new output file will contain.
user library name: Name of the user library that contains the source member. If

the user library name is omitted, the sort program searches the system library
(#LIBRARY) for the source member.
y
N: Place the sort job on the input job queue. Y specifies that the sort job should

be placed on the input job queue. N (default) specifies that the sort job
should not be placed on the input job queue. If this parameter is used to place a
sort job on the input job queue, the sort program must be contained in the system
library (#LlBRARY).

How to Operate Sort

8-1

If you enter only the word SORT or HELP SORT, the following display appears,
which prompts for all the parameters:

SORT PROCEDURE
Rearrange, drop and reformat records in a file.
Label Of File To E·e Sorted ••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••••••••• _

Label Of The Output Flle ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••
Number Of Records To Be Placed In The Output File
Name Of User Library Containing The Source Member

#LIBRARY

Place Job On Input Job Queue (Y/N) ••••••••.•••••••.••••••.•••••• N

Use of only the word SORT or the phrase HELP SORT to run a sort job places
limitations on the input and output files, and requires that the sort sequence
specifications be stored as a source member in a library.
You can also run the sort program by executing your own sort procedure stored
on disk, or by entering your own sort procedure through a display station keyboard.
For further information about the sort program and the Oel required for usersupplied sort procedures, see the Sort Reference Manual.

8-2

Chapter 9. How to Operate Screen Design Aid (SDA)

The screen design aid utility (SDA) helps you create and maintain display screen
formats and menus.
If you have the ideographic version of the SSP, SDA allows ideographic characters
to be entered as constant data when you define screen formats or menus. Also,
when you create or update screen formats, fields may be defined as input or output, allowing either alphanumeric or ideographic characters.

How to Operate Screen Design Aid (SDA)

9-1

HOW TO SIGN ON

You can use the HELP procedure to enter the SOA command. Enter HELP SOA
to be prompted for the SOA command parameters. The format of the SOA
command is:
SOA [source name] , [inlib] , [sfgrload] ,[sfgrprint] , [outlib] , [sfgrlib]
The parameters you enter depend on the SOA functions being requested.
source name;· The name of the source member to be processed. If you are

processing formats, the default is SCRNSPEC. If you are building a menu
(SO A menu option 7), the maximum length of the name is 6 characters and
the default is SCRNSP.
inlib: The name of the library where SOA will find the member to process or

display. The default is the system library (#LlBRARY). If you enter a name
in this parameter, it will be the default for parameter 5 (outlib) and parameter
6 (sfgrlib).
sfgr/oad: The name you want assigned to the load member created by $SFGR.

If you do not enter a name, $SFGR will not be run when you finish running SOA,
and the load member formats will not be generated.
sfgrprint: This parameter controls printing by $SFG R on the system list device.

(SOA printing is controlled by command function key 6.) Use YES, NO, or
PARTIAL. The default is YES.
• YES causes printing of information including the S- and O-specifications, input
and output buffer descriptions, warning or termination errors, and a list of
indicators used.
•

NO causes only termination errors to be printed along with the statement
causing the error.

• PARTIAL causes the printing of input and output library names, and the
screen format member names, and all messages together with their related
statements.
outlib: The name of the library where SOA writes the created or updated source

member or the menu members. The default is the system library (#LI BRARY)
or the library name you entered in parameter 2 (inlib).
sfgrlib: The name of the library in which $SFGR writes the object format

member. The default is the system library (#LlBRARY) or the library name
you entered in parameter 2 (in lib).
After you enter the SOA command, the SOA menu is displayed.

9-2

Entering SDAH presents an explanation of the utility.

If you do not enter a source member name, or if you enter HELP SDA,
SDA displays the Screen Design Aid screen, which shows the required parameters.

OPTIONAL-(O)

SCREEN DESIGN AID
SOA is a utility program that aids the user interactively
to create and M

Blank
Screen

S
Spec

\..

\
\

(

Upper/
Lower
Case

Alter
Print

EOJ

Which
Screen
Active

Screen
Advance
S, Blank,
Attr, Menu

Clear
Display

See Appendix A for the ideographic keyboard and command keys.

9-4

)

SDA

"'"

Command Function Key

Definition

Return to the S specification display and
begin the cycle again (valid only for create
or add).
Display the Blank screen (valid only for
create or add).

GJ
GJ
[J

Not used by SDA.
Not used by SDA.
Lowercase letters allowed. Valid on blank
display and skeleton menu display. Lowercase prints on the 5256, 5224, and 5225
Printers, and on the 3262 and 5211 Printers
when the correct print belt and translation
table are used. This key performs the
Enter/Rec Adv function during update.
The Attribute display allows lowercase letters
without using this key during update.
Reverse print status. If SDA information is
being printed, command function key 6 will
suppress printing and vice versa. Command
function key 6 is valid only on S, blank, and
attribute displays.

GJ
GJ

End of job. Command key 7 during a menu
option terminates the option; during the
SDA menu display, it terminates SDA.
For create, add, or update, indicates that
you are in Blank or Attribute display. The
halt message indicates which display is
active. Take a 0 option to return to the
current operation.
Use to exit S, Blank, Attribute, and menu
build displays.
Use when displaying formats to blank the
screen before the next format is displayed.

Notes:
1. The command function keys are processed the same as the Enter/Rec Adv key
on the system Input-Output display.
2. Keys 1, 2, and 6 are valid only on S, Blank, and Attribute displays.
3. Key 5 is valid only on Blank and Attribute displays.

How to Operate SGr~en Design -Aid (SOA)

9-5

Help Displays
If you enter HE LP SDA, SDA displays the SDA Procedure display that accepts
the required parameters.
SDA also provides you with an SDA Help Menu display. This display allows you to
select other displays that explain many of the basic functions of the SDA program.
To display the menu, either:
1.

At sign on, enter SDAH on the Command display, or

At any other time:
a. Press the Attn key.
b. When the Inquiry display appears, take the 1 option.
c. Enter SDAH.
d. Select the needed help option from the Help menu.
e. End SDAH by pressing command function key 7.
f. Resume the interrupted task with command function key 1.

The SDA Help Menu appears as follows:

SDA HELP MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

PROCEDURE PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
COMMAND KEY DESCRIPTIONS
CREATE/ADO/UPDATE SCREEN SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION
CREATE/ADD/UPDATE FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS
SDA MENU OPTION DESCRIPTIONS
SDA SOURCE MANIPULATION VIA SEU
TABLE OF FIELD ATTRIBUTES AND UPDATE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERS
BUILD A MENU INTERACTIVELY
BUILD RPG II OR WSU SOURCE PROGRAM SPECIFICATIONS

ENTER OPTION DESIRED_

For more information about SDA Help displays, see the Screen Design Aid Programmer's Guide and Reference Manual.

9-6

Chapter 10. How to Process RPG II Programs

RPG II is a programming language used to write application programs. This
chapter explains how you compile RPG II source programs that the programmer
has written; how you execute an RPG II object program, which is the result of
the compilation; and how you can interactively enter data for an RPG II program
that contains a CONSOLE file, a KEYBORD file, or a WORKSTN file.
If you have the ideographic version of the SSP, ideographic characters can be
present in RPG II programs in literals, constants, fields, tables, and arrays. Ideographic characters can also be present in RPG comments. If a display station is
in ideographic mode, RPG displayed messages are displayed as ideographic.
RPG II provides two subroutines to support ideographic data. One moves the data
into a field and deletes the shift-out and shift-in control characters. The other
moves the data into a field and adds the shift-out and shift-in control characters.

COMPILING RPG II SOURCE PROGRAMS
Four command statements are provided for RPG II:
• The RPG command statement compiles an RPG II source program.
• The RPGR command statement executes the RPG II format generator after
the source program has been compiled.
• The RPGX command statement executes the RPG II cross-reference program
for a successfully compiled RPG II source program.
• The AUTO command statement compiles an RPG II source program that
includes auto report specifications.
For more information about the command parameters that are summarized in this
chapter, see the RPG II Reference Manual.

How to Process RPG II Programs

10-1

RPG Command Statement
To compile an RPG II source program enter the RPG command. You can use the
HELP procedure to enter the RPG command. Enter RPG or HELP RPG to be
prompted for the RPG command parameters. The format of the RPG command is:

.
[NOSTOP
file size] [work file size]
REPLACE
RPG program name, [source
20
' 20
' NOHAl T '

HALT

source program library name] [object program library name] [mrtmax value]
[ #L1BRARY
, #L1BRARY
, Q.

NOGENJ
..
GEN960 , [ special optlonSl
[ GEN

Jm..

program name: The name of the source program to be compiled. If this parameter
is not specified and no other parameters are specified, the system displays a menu
requesting the name of the source program and listing the default values for all
of the parameters (see Figure 10-1). The default values can be overridden at this
time. If this parameter is not specified but other parameters are specified, the
system displays a menu requesting the program name and listing the userspecified parameter values and the defaults for all unspecified parameters. These
values can be overridden at this time. If the RPG procedure is placed on the input
job queue, the program name must be specified. See the description of the special
options parameter for an explanation of how to direct the RPG procedure to place
the job on the input job queue after you enter values into the menu.
source file size: The number of blocks (each block is 2,560 bytes) for the
$SOU RCE file. If this parameter is not specified, the default is 20 blocks.
work file size: The number of blocks for the $WORK file. If this parameter is
not specified, the default is 20 blocks.
NOSTOP: Specifies that neither duplicate member halts nor terminal error halts

occur. REPLACE specifies that dl:ij:>TIcate member halts do not occur. NOHAl T
specifies that the system does not halt for terminal diagnostics. HALT specifies
that the system halts for terminal diagnostics and duplicate members. The
default is HALT.
source program library name: The name of the library that contains the source
program . .If this parameter is not specified, the system library, #L1B RARY, is
assumed.
object program library name: The name of the library that will contain the compiled object program. If this parameter is not specified, the system library,
#LlBRARY, is assumed.

10-2

[YES]
NO
'

mrtmax value: Specifies the maximum number of display stations that can attach
themselves to the program. The mrtmax value can be a decimal number from 0
through 99. If the mrtmax value is 0 or if it is not specified, the object program
is not an MRT program. If the value soecified here is equal to or greater than one,
the value can be overridden by an ATTR statement when the object program is
executed.
YES: Specifies the object program as an NEP (never-ending-program). If the
parameter is not used, it defaults to NO (the program is not executed as an NEP).
The NEP attribute can be overridden by an ATTR statement when the object
program is executed.
NOGEN/GEN960: NOGEN specifies that the RPG II format generator will not
execute unless you enter an RPG R command. If NOGEN is omitted and a
CONSOLE file i's specified in the program, the RPG II format generator executes
automatically to generate source input to the $SFGR utility program, which provides display screen formats for the CONSOLE file. The source specifications
for the $SFGR utility are not saved when the RPG II format generator is
e."ecuted by the RPG procedure. GEN960 specifies that the format generator
generate source input to the $SFGR utility program to provide display screen
formats for the 960-character display screen. To save the source specifications,
specify NOGEN and then use the RPGR command statement.

special options: Two-number code that specifies which special options are chosen.
If the first number is 0, the job is not placed on the input job queue. If the first
number is 1, the job is placed on the input job queue. If the second number is
0, a cross-reference listing of symbols is not provided. If the second number is 1,
a cross-reference listing of symbols is provided. The default is 00.

How to Process RPG II Programs

10-3

RPG II PROCEDURE
Name Of Source Program To Be

Co~piled

Blocks For

$SOURCE

Number Of

610cks For

$WORK Fil

~uRlber

Informational

File
e

.•.•••••••.•.•••••••••••

(1-999) •••••••••••••••••••• 20

(1-999) •••••••••••••••••••••• 20

Messages HlALT/NCHALT/REPlACE/NOSTOP) •••••••••• ~:ALT

Input Li brar,}' Name For Soul'ce Mer.lber •.•.••••••.•.•••.••••••.•

~LICRARY

Output library Name For RPG II Load Member .••••••••••.••••••• *lIGRARY
MRTMAX Value (0-99) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 0
NEP

(YES/NO) ••.•••••••.....•..••.......•...•.•.•.•••.••.•••••

Generate Console Screen Formats (GEN/NOGEN/GEN960) ••••••.•••• GEN
Special Options
JOBQ 0
XREF 0

YES-l / NO-O

Figure 10-1. Menu Displayed When Only the Command Name RPG is Entered

Note: If parameters are entered with the command statement, the parameters over-

ride the corresponding entries on the menu.

RPGX Command Statement
The special compile options parameter on the RPG command statement
allows you to specify that a cross-reference listing of symbols be provided for
the program being compiled. The RPGX command statement allows you to
request this cross-reference listing for a program that has already been successfully compiled. You can use the HELP procedure to enter the RPGX command.
Enter RPGX or HELP RPGX to be prompted for the RPGX command parameters.
The RPGX command statement is:
source and symbol file siZe] [source program library name]
RPGX program name, [ 20
' #LlBRARY
program name: The name of the RPG source program. This parameter is

required. If it is not specified, a prompt requests the name of the source
program.

10-4

source and symbol file size: The number of blocks (each block is 2,560 bytes)
for the files used by the cross-reference programs. If this parameter is not
specified, the default is 20. You should specify the same value for this parameter
that you specified when the program was being compiled.
source program library name: The name of the library containing the RPG II
source program. If a source program library name is not specified, the system
library, #LlBRARY, is assumed.

RPGX PROCEDURE
Requests cross reference for RPG II source program.
Program Name
Number Of Blocks For Source Fn e (1-999) ••••.••••••••••••••• 20
Input Library Name •.••.•••.•••••.••..•.•.•••.••.•••.••••••••

~LIBRARY

Figure 10-2. Menu Displayed When Only the Command Name RPGX is Entered

RPGR Command Statement
You must compile the RPG II source program thatincludes a CONSOLE file by
using the RPG command before you use the RPGR command statement. If the
NOGEN parameter is specified in the RPG command statement and the program
contains a CONSOLE file, enter the following command to execute the RPG II
format generator:

source and format file
RPGR program name, 20
[

source program library namel
[ #LlBRARY

siz~

J' [NOSAVE]
SAV E
'

[load module library namel
#LlBRARY

GEN960]
LGEN
'

REPLACE]
[ null
You can use the HELP procedure to enter the RPGR command statement. Enter
RPGR or HELP RPGR to be prompted for the RPGR command statement parameters.
How to Process RPG "Programs

10-5

program name: The name of the RPG II source program. This parameter is
required. If program name is not specified, a prompt requests the name of the
source program.
source and format file size: The number of blocks (each block is 2,560 bytes)
for the source file and SFGR file. If a source and format file size is omitted, the
default is 20 blocks.
NOSA VE: The source statements for the $SFGR utility program are not to be
saved. If NOSAVE is omitted, the source statements are saved in the library
specified as the source program library name, and are catalogued under the program
name plus FM.
source program library name: The name of the library that contains the RPG II
source program. If source program library name is not specified, the system
library, #LlBRARY, is assumed.
load module library name: The name of the library that will contain the load
module created by the $SFGR utility program. If load module library name is
not specified, the system library, #LlBRARY, is assumed.
GEN960: The source statements generated will be in the format for the 960character display screen.
REPLACE: Duplicate member halts will not occur. If REPLACE is not specified,
the procedure will halt if it encounters a program with the same name.

RPGR PROCEDURE

OPTIONAL-(O)

Executes The RPG II Format Generator.
Program Name
Number Of Blocks For Source File (1-999) ••...••••••.•••..••. 20
$SFGR Source (SAVE/NOSAVE) •.•••.••...•••..••.•.••..••••.•••• SAVE

Input library ••••••.••.••.••..•.••..•••..•.••.••..••••..•••. #lIBRARY
Output Library •.••••..•...••.•.•••..•.....•..•.•...•..•..••• #LIBRARY
Screen Format Size (GEN/GEN960) ••.•••••.•.•..•.••.••.••..••• GEN
To Replace An Existin9 Member, Enter REPLACE .••••••••••.•...

Figure 10·3. Menu Displayed When Only the Command Name RPGR is Entered

10-6

(0)

"lI

AUTO Command Statement
To compile an RPG II source program that includes auto report specifications,
enter the AUTO command. You can use the HELP procedure to enter the AUTO
command statement. Enter AUTO or HELP AUTO to be prompted for the AUTO
command statement parameters. The format of the AUTO command is:

,
AUTO
program name,

[source file sizel
20

J '

[work file size,
20

J '

[NOSTOP~
REPLACE
NOHAlT

HALT
source program library namel
[ =L1BRARY

mrtmax ValUe]

[

o
-

[Object program library name]
#L1BRARY
.
,

NOGENJ [Special •option
[YES]
NO
'
GEN960 ,
000
[ GEN
-

program name: The name of the source program to be compiled. If this parameter is not specified and no other parameters are specified, the system displays a menu requesting the name of the source program and listing the default
values for all of the parameters (see Figure 10-1). The default values can be
overridden at this time. If this parameter is not specified but other parameters
are specified, the system displays a menu requesting the program name and listing
the user-specified parameters. These val ues can be overridden at this time. If
the AUTO procedure is placed on the input job queue, the program name must
be specified. See the description of the special options parameter for an explanation
of how to direct the AUTO procedure to place the job'on the input job queue
after you enter values into the menu.
source file size: The number of blocks (each block is 2,560 bytes) for the $WOR K2
or the $SOURCE file. If this parameter is not specified, the default is 20 blocks.
work file size: The number of blocks (each block is 2,560 bytes) for the $WORK file.
If this parameter is not specified, the default is 20 blocks.

NOS TOP: Specifies that neither duplicate member halts nor terminal error halts
occur. REPLACE specifies that duplicate member halts do not occur. NOHAl T
specifies that the system does not halt for terminal diagnostics. HALT specifies
that the system halts for terminal diagnostics and duplicate members. The
default is HALT.
source program library name: The name of the library that contains the
source program. If this parameter is not specified, the system library,
#L1BRARY, is assumed.
object program library name: The name of the library that will contain the
compiled object program. If this parameter is not specified, the system
library, #L1BRARY, is assumed.

How to Process RPG II Programs

10-7

(

mrtmax value: The maximum number of display stations that can attach
themselves to the program. The mrtmax value can be a decimal number from
a through 99. If the mrtmax value is a or if it is not specified, the object
program is not an MRT program. If the value specified here is equal to or
greater than one, it can be overridden by an ATTR statement when the object
program is specified.

YES: Specifies the object program as an NEP (never-ending-program). If the
parameter is not used, it defaults to NO (the program is not executed as an NEP).
The NEP attribute can be overridden by an ATTR statement when the object
program is executed.
NOGEN/GEN960: NOGEN specifies that the RPG II format generator will not
execute unless you enter an RPGR command. If NOGEN is omitted, and the
CONSOLE file is specified in the program, the RPG II format generator executes
automatically to generate source input to the $SFGR utility program, which provides display screen formats for the CONSOLE file. GEN960 specifies that the
format generator generate source input to the $SFG R utility program to provide
display screen formats for the 960-character display screen. When NOGEN is
specified, the RPG R command should be used to save the source specifications.

special options: Three-number code that specifies which special options are chosen.
If the first number is 0, the job is not placed on the input job queue. If the first
number is 1, the job is placed on the job input queue. If the second number is
0, a cross-reference listing of fields and indicators is not provided. If the second
number is 1, a cross-reference listing of fields and indicators is provided. If the
third number is 0, the RPG II compiler is run after Auto Report generation.
If the third number is 1, the RPG II compiler is not run after Auto Report generation. The default is 000.

10-8

AUTO REPORT PROCEDURE
Name Of Source Program To Be Compiled ••...••••.•••••••••.••• _
Number Of Blocks For $SOURCE Flle (1-999) •.••••••••••••.•••• 20
Number Of Blocks For

$~ORK

File (1-999) ••••••••••••••.•.•••• 20

Informational Messages (HALT/NOHALT/REPLACE/NOSTOP) •.••.•••• HALT
Input Library Name For Source Member ..•••••..•••••••••.•••.• #LlaRARY
Output Llbrary Name For RPG II load Member •...•••••••••••••. #LIBRARY
MRTMAX Va 1ue (0-99) ..•..•.•.•••..•••••.•••.••...•••••••••••• 0
NEP (YES/NO) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Generate Console Screen Formats (GEN/NOGEN/GEN960) ••••••••.• GEN
Speclal Options
JOBQ 0
XREF 0

YES-1 / NO-O
AUTO ONLY 0

Figure 10-4. Menu Displayed When Only AUTO is Entered

Note: If parameters are entered with the command statement, the parameters over·
ride the corresponding entries on the menu.

EXECUTING AN RPG II OBJECT PROGRAM

You can execute an RPG II object program by entering certain OCl statements,
by entering the name of a user-written procedure, or by selecting the procedure
from a menu. For more information on executing a program, see How to Restart
Job Execution in Chapter 4.
The person responsible for choosing the tasks you run should provide you with a
run book or an equivalent set of instructions. These instructions usually include
how you begin executing a program, when and in what order you execute programs, what data you enter, and other actions required to perform the tasks.

DATA ENTRY FOR A CONSOLE FILE

The following procedure for data entry for a CONSOLE file is valid only if the
generated display formats for the CONSOLE file have not been altered.
When CONSOLE file is used in an RPG II program, you can enter input data
for the program while it is executing. Figure 10-4 shows a sample initial display
screen that appears when you start to enter data.

Note: From one to four columns appear on the display screen, depending on the
number and length of the fields defined for the CONSOLE file. However, line 1
of the display is in the format shown in Figure 10-4, regardless of the number of
columns displayed.

How to Process RPG II Programs

10-9

Command Function Keys for a,CONSOLE File
For a CONSOLE file, command function keys 1 through 9 and 0 correspond to
the record identifying indicators assigned to the record types in the CONSOLE
file. Use the appropriate command function key to select the record type for
which data is to be entered. (The record types that can be selected are shown
in line 1 of the display. SeeE) and
in Figure 10-5.)

~l
.0
.1

e CD

t-~H'2-'3'4'---5~"\-t7'8~~"

ACCTNO A

•

PMnNO A
5QTY
N 4.0

UCOST

N 4.2

N6 2
•

_________----"""'J
Figure 10-5. Sample Initial Display for a CONSOLE File

Legend:

o
o
e

CD
•

o
e
10-10

Record identification code for the record being displayed.
Record identifying indicator for the record being displayed.
The cursor is positioned to accept, your entry for the first field in the record.
Record identifying indicators for other record types that can be selected
before you enter data for this display.
Record identifying indicators for other record types that can be selected
after you enter data for this display.
Name of field to be entered.
Field type (A for alphameric or N for numeric).

Field length (in the form xx or xx.y where xx indicates the number of
positions in the field and y indicates the number of decimal positions in
a numeric field).

Figure 10-6 shows the command function keys and their corresponding record
identifying indicators
and
in Figure 10-5) for a CONSOLE file. You
can use these keys before or after you enter data for the current display. To use
a command function key, you must first press the Cmd key and then press the
appropriate digit key.

(CD

Function Control Keys for a CONSOLE File
The following function control keys can be used when you are entering data for
a CONSOLE file: Field Advance, Field Backspace, Field Exit, Field+, Field-,
Enter/Rec Adv, and Error Reset.
Command
Function
Key
(Lowercase
Position)

GJ
GJ

Function
Record identifying indicator 1
Record identifying indicator 2
Record identifying indicator 3

GJ
GJ
GJ

Record identifying indicator 5

Record identifying indicator 7

GJ
GJ
GJ

Record identifying indicator 4

Record identifying indicator 6

Record identifying indicator 8
Record identifying indicator 9
Record identifying indicator 10
End of file (end of input) for the CONSOLE file

Figure 10-6. Command Function Keys for a CONSOLE File

How to Process RPG II Programs

10-11

Steps in Entering Data
When the initial display appears, follow these steps to enter data for the program:
1.

Check that the record identifying indicator on line 1 of the display is correct
for the record you wi" enter (see
in Figure 10-5). If not, press the
in
appropriate command key to select the correct record type (see
Figure 10-5).

The leftmost heading on line 2 of the display names the first field to enter.
The field name is followed by a designation of the field type and the field
length (see Figure 10-5). The cursor ind icates the first position in which to
enter data.
2.

Key the data into the field. Then press the Field+, Field-, or Field Exit key
for a numeric field, or press the Field Exit key for an alphameric field.
A negative number field is indicated by a minus sign adjacent to the rightmost digit of the field (for example, 21546-).

Note: If you enter an alphameric character in a numeric field, or if you enter
too many characters in a field, a four-digit error code flashes in the lowerleft corner of the screen, indicating your error. Press the Error Reset key
and reenter the field.
After you have entered the last field for the record, you can enter the record
and select a new format by pressing the appropriate command key for the
next record to be entered (see
in Figure 10-5). or enter the record only
and retain the same format by pressing the Enter/Rec Adv key. You are
prompted for the first field in the next record. If you have more records to
enter, return to Step 1. If no more records are to be entered, go to Step 3.

k~y,

then press the (
Press the Cmd
to end input for the CONSOLE file.

key (command function key 12)

DATA ENTRY FOR A KEYBORD FILE

When a KEYBORD file is used in an RPG " program, you can enter input data for
the program while it is executing. To allow you to enter data into the program,
the programmer codes a KEY operation, a SET operation, or a combination of
SET/KEY. Your response to the displayed prompt depends on the operation
coded by the programmer.

10-12

KEY Operation
When the KEY operation is used, the prompt appears on the screen in one of two
formats:
•

The display can consist of six lines, with 40 characters per line, centered both
vertically and horizontally on the screen (see Figure 10-7). The prompt appears
on line 14 for a 1920-character display screen or line 8 for a 960-character
display screen and you enter data on the next line (see Figure 10-7).

•

The display can consist of 24 lines for a 1920-character display screen or 12 lines
for a 960-character display screen with 79 characters per line. The prompt appears
on line 23 for a 1920-character display screen or line 11 for a 960-character
display screen and you enter data on the next line (see Figure 10-7).

In response to the prompt for a KEY operation, you can:
•

Enter the data on line 5 or line 24 for a 1920-character display screen or line 9 for
a 960-character display screen. Then press the Field Exit, Field+, or Field- key
if the field is numeric; or press the Field Exit, Field+, or Enter/Rec Adv key if the
field is alphameric. If not all positions of a field are filled, numeric fields are rightadjusted and filled to the left with zeros; alphameric fields are filled to the right
with blanks.

•

Enter no data, but press the Field Exit, Field+, Fielc;l-, or Enter/Rec Adv
key, which causes any data in the field to be changed to zeros or blanks.

•

Enter no data, but press the Dup key. Then press the Field Exit, Field+,
Field-, or Enter/Rec Adv key, which does not change the data in the field.

,..

LINE 14
LINE 15

LINE 23
LINE 24

PROMPT
DATA ENTRY

Figure 10-7. Displays

PROMPT
DATA ENTRY

G~nerated

for a KEY Optu'ation

How to Process RPG II Programs

10-13

SET Operation
The SET operation allows the programmer to specify what command keys you can
press at a specific point in the RPG II program. For the SET operation on a 1920character display screen the prompt, which tells you which command key to press,
appears on line 15 (if the six-line display is generated) or on line 24 (if a 24-line
display is generated). For the SET operation on a 960-character display screen,
the prompt which tells you which command key to press, appears on line 9 (if the
six-line display is generated) or on line 12 (if a 12-line display is generated). You
enter your response on the same line as the prompt. Figure 10-8 shows the command keys that can be specifwd for a S_ET oper~tiorl.

Responding to a SET Operation

To respond to a SET prompt, you must:
•

Press the Cmd key.

•

Press the appropriate command key.

•

Then press the Field Exit, Field+, Field-, or Enter/Rec Adv key.
Note: If you are to press more than one command key, you must press the
Field Exit, Field+, Field-, or Enter/Ree Adv key only after you have pressed
the last command key.

Lowercase Position
Command Key 1
Command Key 2
Command Key 3
Command Key 4
Command Key 5
Command Key 6
Command Key 7
Command Key 8
Command Key 9

Uppercase Position

CJ
GJ
GJ
W
[J
[J

GJ
[J
[J

Command Key 13

Command Key 14

Command Key 15

Command Key 16
Command Key 17

~
~

Command Key 18

Command Key 19

Command Key 20
Command Key 21

Command Key 10

Command Key 22

Command Key 11

Command Key 23

Command Key 12

Command Key 24

0
CJ
CJ
B
[:]

Figure 10-8. Command Function Keys for SET Operation and WORKSTN File

10-14

Correcting a Keying Error

If you have erroneously pressed a command key specified on the SET operation
and have not pressed the Field Exit, Field+, Field-, or Enter/Rec Adv key, you
can reset the command keys in the following manner:
•

Press the Cmd key.

•

Press the Character Backspace (Clear) key while holding down the Shift key.

You can then press the correct command keys.

If you have incorrectly pressed a command key that was not specified on the SET
operation, you must respond to the RPG II error message, which is displayed on line 24
on a 1920-character display screen or line 12 on a 960-character display screen in the
following manner:
•

Press the Error Reset key.

•

Press the correct command key(s).

SET/KEY Combination
When the programmer uses a SET/KEY combination in an RPG II program, you
can press a command function key, enter a field, and then press the Field Exit,
Field+, Field-, or Enter/Rec Adv key only once. If the SET/KEY combination
is not used, you must press a field exit key or the Enter/Rec Adv key each time
you end the SET or KEY operation.
If you use the Field Exit, Field+, or Field- key in response to a SET/KEY operation, you must enter your response in the following order:
•

Press the command key.

•

Enter the field.

•

Press the Field EXit, Field+, or Field- key.

Note: Field Exit, Field+, or Field- must be used for a numeric field.

However, if you use the Enter/Rec Adv key to enter an alphameric field, you can
also enter the data first, then press the command key, and then press the Enter/
Rec Adv key.

How to Process RPG II Programs

10-15

DATA ENTRY FOR A WORKSTN FILE
When a WOR KSTN file is used in an RPG II program, you,can enter input data
to the program while it is executing. The format of each screen you see and use
while entering data for an RPG II program with a WORKSTN file has been
designed by the programmer. The programmer should provide you with instructions on how to complete the job.

Command Function Keys for a WORKSTN File
For a WORKSTN file, command function keys 1 through 24 (see Figure 10-8) may
cause a specific action to occur. This' action is defined by the programmer in the
RPG II program. You should have instructions from the programmer that explain
what command keys you can use and what action to expect after you press a
command key. When you press a command key, the contents of the display are
returned to the program.

Function Control Keys for a WORKSTN File
You can use the following function control keys when entering data for a
WORKSTN file: Field Advance, Field Backspace, Field Exit, Field+, Field-,
Enter/Rec Adv, and Error Reset.

RPG II MESSAGES
While you are running an RPG II program, messages may appear on the display
screen. For information about these messages, see the Displayed Messages Guide.

10-16

Chapter 11. How to Operate Basic Assembler and Macro Processor Program Product

This chapter shows the command statements you can use with the Basic Assembler
and Macro Processor. If you require additional information about this product,
refer to the Basic Assembler and Macro Processor Reference Manual.

BASIC ASSEMBLER AND MACRO PROCESSOR COMMAND STATEMENTS
This product includes two procedures, which you can invoke through command
statements to perform common functions. You can use the HELP procedure
to enter the ASM and OLINK command statements. Enter HELP ASM or HELP
OLiNK to be prompted for the command parameters. The format of the
assembler command is:
[Source libraryl
ASM source, L#LlBRARY

[

$ASMINPT
45

block~

J '

[Obj-mOdule library]
rMAC ]
rsource blocksl
source library
'LNOMAC' L30

J '

[$WORK blocksl
10

J '

[$WORK2
36

block~

source: The source program name.
source library: The library where the source is found (defaults to #LlBRARYL
obj-module library: The library where the object module should be placed (defaults
to the source library).
MAC/NOMAC: Indicates whether or not the macro processor is to be invoked
(default is MAC, invoke the macro processor).
source blocks: The file size in blocks for $SOURCE (default is 30 blocks).
$ASMINPT blocks: The file size in blocks for $ASMINPT (default is 45 blocks).
$WORK blocks: The file size in blocks for $WORK (default is 10 blocks).
$WORK2 blocks: The file size in blocks for $WORK2 (default is 36 blocks)'

How to Operate Basic Assembler and Macro Processor Program Product

11-1

If the source parameter is omitted, the Asm Command Prompts display appears.
The following example shows how the display appears:

ASM PROCEDURE

Invokes The Assembler And Optionally
Calls The Macro Processor.
Source Program Name ••••••••••.•••••••••.•••.••••.•••••••••.••••.
Input Library Name ••.•••.•••••••••••••.•.••.••.••••••••••...•••. #LIBRARY

au t pu t

L 1 [)

r a r Y N ame. • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • .. tt-lI-BRAR.y

Macro Expansion Required (MAC/NOMAC) ••••.•..•••••••..••....••••. MAC

Number Of Blocks For $SOURCE FILE
Number Of Blocks For $ASMINPT File
Number Of Blocks For

$Io:ORK

Number Of Blocks For

$vmRK2

File

Flle

....................................... 30

(1-999 )
(1-999 )

(1-999 )
(1-999)

............................................ 45

..................................................

................................................ 36

Place On Input Job Queue (YES/NO) .............................................................. NO

The format of the DLiNK command is:
DLiNK

d I
[object library] ['oad module name]
mo u e name, #LlBRARY
, module name
'
lOad module library]
[ #LlBRARY

[attrl]
[attr2] [mrtmax] [SUblibl,SUblib2]
null'
null
'Q
'#LlBRARY

module name: Name of object module to be link-edited.
object library: Library containing object module (default is #LlBRARY).
load module name: Name appearing in load module directory (default is
parameter 1 name).

load module library: Library where load module is to be placed (default is
#LlBRARY).

attr1,attr2: Attributes of the module being link-edited.

11-2

Possible attributes are:
COM - Program common supported
OED
Dedicated module
NEP
Never ending program
NEX
Not executable
NIO
Noninquirable module
NSW
Nonswappable module
LSC
Load only from system console
SIS
Scientific mode
SRO
Source required
UCS
Reads utility control statements
mrtmax: Maximum number of active requesting display stations that can be

allocated to the program.
sub lib 1, sublib2: Libraries containing user subroutines to be link-edited (default

is #LlBRARY).
If the module name parameter is omitted, the Olink Command Prompts display
appears. The following example shows how the display appears:

(
OLINK ?20CEDURE

OPTIONAL-( 0)

Invokes the overlay linkage editor to create a load module.
Name Of The Module To Be Link-Edited ..•.•. _.•..••..•...••...•••.•...
Input Library Name

tLI8RARY
r 0)

Load Modu 1e Name .•...••••••...•••..•••.••....••••.•••••••••••••••..

Output Library Name ••••••.•.•••.•••..•.••...••••••.••.•.•..•••....• #LIBRARY
Attributel

(COM/DED/NEP/NEX/NIQ/NS~/LSC/SIS/SRQ/UCS)

Attribute2 (COM/OEO/NEP/NEX/NIQ/NSW/lSC/SIS/SRQ/UCS)
tlrtmax Va 1 ue (0-255) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 0

User Subroutine Libraryl

#LIBRARY

User Subroutine library2
Place On Input Job Queue (YES/NO) •••.•....•.........•.....••.•...•• NO

BASIC ASSEMBLER AND MACRO PROCESSOR MESSAGES

While you are running the assembler, a message may appear on the display screen.
For information about an assembler program message, refer to the Displayed
Messages Guide. For information about printed messages, refer to the Assembler
Reference Manual.

How to Operate Basic Assembler and Macro Processor Program Product

11-3

11-4

Chapter 12. How to Operate FORTRAN IV

This chapter describes the command statements you can use with the FORTRAN
IV language. If you require additional information about this program product,
refer to the FORTRAN IV Reference Manual.
IBM supplies several library procedures for use with System/34 FORTRAN. When
you enter an appropriate command statement, the IBM-supplied library procedure
is either executed or placed on the input job queue.
Library procedures provide for FORTRAN compile and link-editing, execution of
FORTRAN programs, output of a FORTRAN debug file, movement of a diagnosed source file to a library, and screen prompts by using the following command
statements:

Command
Statement

Function

FORTP

Provides screen prompts for compiling and executing
FORTRAN programs.

FORTC

Compiles a FORTRAN program.

FORTG

Executes a FORTRAN program.

FORTGO

Executes a FORTRAN program with user-provided procedures
for additional OCl statements.

FORTCG

Compiles and executes a FORTRAN program.

FORTPRNT

Prints a FORTRAN debug file.

FORTMOVE

Moves a FORTRAN diagnosed source file to a library.

How to Operate FORTRAN IV

12-1

FORTP Command Statement
If you enter FORTP or HELP FORTP, the following display screen appears:

FORTP PROCEDURE

Exit from FORTRAN IV Processing

1 - FORTC

Compiles a FORTRAN IV Program

2 - FORTGO

Executes a Previously Compiled FORTRAN IV Program

3.- FOIUCG

Compii es and Executes a FORTRAN IV Program

4 - FORTMOVE

Hoves a Diagnosed Source File To a Library

5 - FORTPRNT

Prints a FORTRAN IV Debug File

ENTER NUN8ER OF OPTION REQUIRED -->

From this display you can get the help display for the FORTC, FORTGO, FORTCG,
FORTMOVE, and FORTPRNT command statements. Refer to the appropriate
command statement for an illustration of the display that is presented. After you
have selected an option from the menu and it has executed, the FORTP display is
displayed again. You can then execute another FORTRAN command statement.
If no further execution is necessary, a response of 0 terminates the FORTP
procedure.

FORTC Command Statement
The FORTC command statement compiles a FORTRAN source program so that
the compiler is loaded into main storage. The FORTC command statement format
is~

[dsflabel]

,[~]

program name: The name of the source program to be compiled. If this parameter

is not specified, the source statements must follow the FORTC command statement
within the system input stream.

12·2

# of blocks:

The number of blocks allocated for the work files used by the compiler. The default is 20 blocks. Generally, one additional block is required for
each group of 10 program source statements over 200.

inlib: The name of the library that contains the source program. If this parameter
is not specified, the system library (#LI BRARY) is assumed.
outlib: The name of the library that will contain the object and load member. If
this parameter is not specified here or on the *PROCESS source statement, the
system library (#LlBRARY) is assumed.
dsflabel: The file label of the diagnosed source file. If this parameter is not specified, a diagnosed source file will not be created.

YIN: Specifies whether the FORTC procedure is to be put on the input job queue
or entered from a work station. If Y is specified, the procedure is submitted to the
input job queue for execution. If N or blank is specified, the job is executed from
the work station. The default is N.
You can enter the FORTC command statement by one of

fo~r

•

Enter FORTC with the appropriate parameters following it.

•

Enter the FORTP procedure and select option 1.

•

Enter HELP FORTC.

•

Enter FORTPC.

ways:

If you enter the FORTP command and select option 1, enter HELP FORTC, or
enter FORTPC, the following display will appear:

FORTC

Co~pl1es

OPTIONAl-CO)

PROCEDU~E

a FORTRAN IV Program.

Name Of Source Program To Be Compil cd •.••...•••• __ ..•......•.•..
Input Library Name •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• frLIBRt,RY
-

Output library Name •...•••••...••.......•••••••.•••.•.•••...•••. #LIBRARY

File label For Diagnosed Source File ...•••••••••••••••••••.•.•••
Number Of Blocks For

$~ORK

(0)

And $SQURCE Files (1-999) •...•••..••• 020

Place On Input Job Queue (YIN) •••••.••..••••.••••••••••••••••••• N

How to Operate FORTRAN IV

12-3

Refer to the FORTC parameter descriptions under FORTC Command Statement
for a description of the prompts on this disp!ay.

FORTG Command Statement
The FORTG,command statement executes a load member. The command statement format is:

FORTG

[;;:;~ name]

, [debug lile lahel] ,

[;001 debug lile blOCkS]

, [Ioadlibname]

program name: The name of the load member to be executed. If a program name
is not specified, the FORTRAN default load member name ##MAI N is used.
debug file label: The file label for the FORTRAN debug file, FTDEBUG. If this
parameter is not specified, the FilE statement for the debug file is not generated.
# of debug file blocks: The number of blocks allocated for the FORTRAN debug
file. If this parameter is not specified and a debug file label was specified, the
default value is 20 blocks.
loadlibname: The name of the library that contains the load member to be executed. If this parameter is not specified, the system searches for the load member
in the active user library and then in the system library.

FORTGO Command Statement
The FORTGO command statement executes a load member and allows you to enter
specialized OCl statements. The command statement format is:
]
program name] ~proc
FORTGO [ ##MAIN
' L
name

, [loadilDname] ,

'Ldebug file label

]

[ti

of debug file blOCkS]
20

program name: The name of the load member to be executed. If a program name
is not specified, the FORTRAN default load member name ##MAIN is used.
proc name: The name of the procedure containing FilE statements that is to be
used during the execution of the load member.
debug file label: The file label for the FORTRAN debug file, FTDEBUG. If this
parameter is not specified, the FilE statement for the debug file is not generated.
#of debug file blocks: The number of blocks allocated for the FORTRAN debug
file. If this parameter is not specified and a debug file label was specified, the default
value is 20 blocks.

12-4

loadlibname: The name of the library that contains the load member to be exe-

cuted. If this parameter is not specified, the system searches for the load member
in the active user library and then in the system library.

YIN: Specifies whether the load member is to be put on the input job queue or
entered from a work station. If Y is specified, the load member is submitted to
the input job queue for execution. If N or blank is specified, the job is executed
from a work station. The default is N.
You can enter the FORTGO command statement by one of four ways:
•

Enter FORTGO with the appropriate parameters following it.

•

Enter the FORTP procedure and select option 2.

•

Enter HELP FORTGO.

•

Enter FORTPGO.

If you enter the FORTP command and select option 2, enter HELP FORTGO,
or enter FORTPGO, the following display will appear:

FORTGO PROCEDURE

Executes a FORTRAN IV Program.
load Module To Be Executed .••••..•••.••.•.•..••••••..•..••.••.••

~~MAIN

Procedure Containing File Statements ••••.•••••••.•••••••••••••.•
Debug

File label ••.•..•••••••••.•••.••.•.•.•.•••.••.••..•.•.••••

Input Library ••.••••.••••••••••.••..••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••
Slocks For

Debug

~lI8RARY

File (1-9999) ••••••.••••••••.•.••••.•••••••••.• 20

Place On Input Job Queue (YIN) .•••..••.•..•...•.••.•.•.•••..••.• N

Refer to the FORTGO parameter descriptions under FORTGO Command Statement for a description of the prompts on this display.

How to Operate FORTRAN IV

12-5

FORTCG Command Statement
The FORTCG command statement compiles a FORTRAN source program, linkedits the source program, and executes the load member. The command statement
format is:

[debug file label] ,

of debug file blOCkS]

]

,L'oadllbname

[N]
y

program name: The name of the source program to be compiled. This parameter
is required.

# of blocks: The number of blocks for the work files used by the compiler. If
this parameter is not specified, the default value is 20 blocks. Generally, one additional block is required for each group of 10 program source statements over 200.
inlib: The name of the library that will contain the source program. If this parameter is not specified, the system library (#L1BRARY) is assumed.
outlib: The name of the library that will contain the object and load members. If
the library is not specified on the *PROCESS statement or by using this parameter,
the default is the system library.
dsflabel: The file label for the diagnosed source file. If this parameter is not specified, a diagnosed file will not be created.
debug file label: The file label for the FORTRAN debug file, FTDEBUG. If this
parameter is not specified, the FILE 'statement for the debug file is not generated.

# of debug file blocks: The number of blocks for the FO RTRAN debug file. If
this parameter is not specified and a debug file label was specified, the default value
is 20 blocks.
loadlibname: The name of the library that contains the load member to be executed. If this parameter is not specified, the system searches for the load member
in the active user library and then in the system library.

YIN: Specifies whether the load member is to be pufon the input job queue crt
entered from a work station. If Y is specified, the load member is submitted to the
input job queue for execution. If N or blank is specified, the job is executed
from a work station. The default is N.
You can enter the FORTCG command statement by one of four ways:
•

Enter FORTCG with the appropriate parameters following it.

•

Enter the FORTP procedure and select option 3.

•

Enter HELP FORTCG.

•

Enter FORTPCG.

Note: If a compilation has terminal errors, the FORTCG command detects the
errors and skips the execution step.
12-6

If you enter the FORTP command and select option 3, enter HELP FORTCG, or
enter FORTPCG, the following display will appear:

r
FORTCG
Co~pl1es

P~OCEDU~E

OPTIONAL-( 0)

and Executes a FORTRAN IV Program.

Sou rce Program To Be Compi 1ed ..•••••••••..••••••..•••••.••••••••

l
J

Source Input Library ...•.•.••••••••..•.••••.••••.•••••••.•••••••

#LIBRARY

Outrut Li brary ...•.•••.•.••...•..••.••••...•..•••••..••••.••••••

#LIBRARY

Diagnosed Source File Name ••...•..........•.••.•.•.•.•..••••••.•

(0 )

'Blocks For Co:-:wiler Work Files (1-9999) ••.••.•••..•••••••..••••• 020
Debug File

Load

Module

Label •.••••.•.•.••.•.•..••.••..•.....•.••.•••••••••••
Library ••••.••..••..•..•..•..••..••.•.••••••••.•••••

Blocks For Debug File (1-9999)
Place

On Input Job

Q~eue

(YIN)

(0)
#LIBRARY-------

020
• • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• N

______________________________________________________________________-'r'

Refer to the FORTCG parameter descriptions under FORTCG Command Statement for a description of the prompts on this display.

FORTPRNT Command Statement
The FORTPRNT command statement prints a FORTRAN debug file. The command statement format is:

FORTPRNT debug tole label [

debug file label: The file label for the FORTRAN debttg-file,FTDEBUG. This
parameter is required.
S/T/P: Specifies the retention value for the debug file. Valid values are S, T, and
P. S causes the system to scratch the file when the program completes execution.
Values T and P cause the file to maintain its previous status.

You can enter the FORTPRNT command statement by one of three ways:
•

Enter FORTPRNT with the appropriate parameters following it.

•

Enter the FORTP procedure and select option 5.

•

Enter HELP FORTPRNT.

How to Operate FORTRAN IV

12-7

If you enter the FORTP command and select option 5 or enter HELP FORTPRNT,
the following display appears:

FORTPRNT PROCEDURE

Prints a FORTRAN IV Oebus File.
Label For The FORTRAN IV Debug File ••••••..••••••••.•••••.••••.•
File Type CS/T/P) •••••••.•.•••.•.••••••.•••••••••.••••••••••.••• s

,r,
i
I

I
ii
!~

,I
!

I
.i

l~________________________________~J
Refer to the FORTPRNT parameter descriptions under FOR TPRNT Command
Statement for a description of the prompts on this display.

FORTMOVE Command Statement
The FORTMOVE command statement moves a diagnosed source file to a library.
The command statement format is:
FORTMOVE dsflabel, [ dSflib
#LlBRARY]

, [R]
E

' rLDELETE]

dsflabel: The file label of the diagnosed source file. This parameter, which is
required, will become the source member name.
dsflib: The name of the library that is to receive the source member. If this parameter is not specified, the default is the system library (#LlBRARY).
RIP: The retention parameter of the source member in the library. Valid values
are P and R. P means a permanent new member and R means replace. If this
parameter is not specified, the default is P.

DELETE: Specifies whether the diagnosed source file should be deleted. If this
parameter is not specified, the diagnosed source file wi" not be deleted.

12-8

You can enter the FORTMOVE command statement by one 'of three ways:
•

Enter FORTMOVE with the appropriate parameters following it.

•

Enter the FORTP procedure and select option 4.

•

Enter HELP FORTMOVE.

If you enter the FORTMOVE command and select option 4 or enter HELP
FORTMOVE, the following display appears:

FORHmVE PROCEDURE

Hoves a Diagnosed source file to a library.
Label For The Diagnosed Source File •••.••.•.•.•••••••.••••.•.•••
Output Library Name ••.•••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••. #LIBRARY
File Permanent, or Replace Existing Member (RIP) ••••••••.••••••. P
Remove Source File (DELETE) •••••••••.•.•.•••••.•••••••••••••••.•

Refer to the FORTMOVE parameter descriptions under FORTMOVE Command
Statement for a description of the prompts on this display.

FORTRAN Data Switch Procedure
Sixteen data switches are provided for use by the programmer to permit operatorto-program communication similar to the switch facilities of the IBM 1130 System
and IBM System/32.
Switch settings 0 through 7 can be initialized by using the SWITCH OCl statement.
Switch settings 8 through 15 are initialized to O.

How to Operate FORTRAN IV

12-9

If the program uses the DATSW subroutine, the following procedure can be used
to change the switch settings from a work station:
1.

To change the switch settings during execution, the user must press the Attn
key to interrupt the program and display an Inquiry Options menu. The
operator selects option 4, which sets an indicator informing the DATSW
subroutine that the user wants to display the current switch settings.

INQUIRY OPTIONS

INTERRUPTED JOn: R2113308

O. RESUME INTERRUPTED JOB.

2. CANCEL JOB AND CLOSE FILES. NEW DATA IS PRESERVED.
3. CANCEL JOB AND DO NOT CLOSE FILES. NEW DATA IS LOST.
4. SET INQUIRY COHDITION FOR PROGRAM.
5. DISPLAY SESSION STATUS.

ENTER

N~~18ER

TO SELECT OPTION OR niTER MSG CONTROL

CO~:MAND

When the DATSW subroutine is entered, a message is issued that displays the
current switch values in hexadecimal notation.

INPUT-OUTPUT

FORT-4362 OPTIONS (01 )
4A70 IS Tl-IE OLD DATA SWITCH SETTING

12·10

The hexadecimal value may be represented in binary notation to show the
status of the switch settings.
The valid responses to this message are:

leave the switch settings as displayed, and resume program execution.
Modify the switch settings with new values, and resume program
execution.

Switch Number
Entry Position
Binary Switch Setting
for Each Entry Position

0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111

Hexadecimal Character

1
2
3
4
5

6
7

8
9
A
B
C
D
E

Note: The values that can be specified for the SWITCH DCl statement
are 1 through 8. Values 1 through 4 relate to data switch values 0 through
3, and values 5 through 8 relate to data switch values 4 through 7.

Data Switch
Hexadecimal setting of
data switches
Binary setting of the
corresponding data
switches

11 1111
0123 4567 8901 2345
4

oroo

1010 0111 0000

How to Operate FORTRAN IV

12-11

When option 1 is selected, the user is allowed to enter new switch values in
hexadecima: notation in four entry positions. The vCliid input characters

are 0 through 9 and A through F. In the following example, switches 1,4,
6,9,10, and 11 are set off and switch 0 is set on.

l
I

I
J

I
~

I
I

ENTER NEW DATA SWITCH SETTING
8000

_______________________________________

The switch values can be altered again by repeating steps 1 through 3.

FORTRAN Messages

While you are running a FORTRAN program, messages may appear on the display
screen. For information about these messages, see the Displayed Messages Guide.

12-12

Chapter 13. How to Operate COBOL

This chapter describes the command statements you can use with the COBOL
language. If you require additional information about this program product, refer
to the COBOL Reference Manual.
If you have the ideographic version of the SSP, ideographic characters can be
present in COBOL programs in literals and comments. If a display station is in
ideographic mode, COBOL displayed messages are displayed as ideographic.
COBOL provides two subroutines to support ideographic data. One moves the data
into a field and deletes the shift-out and shift-in control characters. The other
moves the data into a field and adds the shift-out and shift-in control characters.
IBM supplies several library procedures for use with System/34 COBOL. When
an appropriate command statement is entered, the IBM-supplied library procedure
is either executed or placed on the input job queue.
Library procedures provide for COBOL compilation and link-editing, execution of
COBOL programs, movement of a diagnosed source file to a library, and screen
prompts, by using the following command statements:

Command
Statement

Function

COBOLP

Provides screen prompts for entering, compiling, executing,
and correcting COBOL programs.

COBOL

Compiles a COBOL program.

COBOLCG

Compiles and executes a COBOL program.

COBOLG

Executes a COBOL program with user-provided procedures for
additional OCL statements.

COBSYSIN

Compiles and link-edits a COBOL program entered from the
current system input device.

COBMOVE

Moves a COBOL-diagnosed source file to a library.

How to Operate COBOL

13-1

COBOLP Command Statement
If you enter COBOLP or HELP COBOLP, the following display screen appears:

COBOlP PROCEDURE

Exits From COSOl Processing

1 - COBOL

Compiles a COaOL Program

2 - CCBOLG

Executes a COBOL Program

4 - SEU

Creates Or Updates a coaOl Module

5 - COSt:OVE

Moves Diagnosed Source File To library

E~~ER

NUMBER OF OPTION REQUIRED -->

From this display you can get the Help display for the COBOL, COBOLCG,
COBOLG, COBOL SEU (not a command statement), and COBMOVE command
statements. Refer to the appropriate command statement for an illustration of
the display that is presented. After you have selected an option from the menu and
it has executed, the COBOLP display is displayed again. You can then execute
another COBOL command statement. There are some entries that can appear in
more than one display. For user convenience, some entered values are carried forward onto following displays until COBOLP processing is terminated. If no further
execution is necessary, a response of 0 terminates the COBOLP procedure.

COBOL Command Statement
The COBOL command statement-eompiles and link~dits a COBOL source program
so that the compiler is loaded into main storage. The COBOL command statement
format is:
COBOL

rblocksizel
pgname, l24

,[~~sJ '

pnlib

]

J' L#LlBRARY

[Olltlib
rmrtmaxl
, HLiBRARYJ ' lQ

[diagnosed source file]

pgname: The name of the source program to be compiled (maximum length is

eight characters).

blocksize: The number of blocks allocated for the work files used by the compiler

13-2

(each block is 2,560 bytes). If this parameter is not specified, the default value is
24 blocks. Generally, one additional block is required for each group of 10 program source statements over 2OQ.

inlib: The name of the library that contains the source program. If this parameter
is not specified, the system library (#LIBRARY) is assumed.
outlib: The name of the library that will contain the object and load member. If
this parameter is not specified and the library was not specified on the PROCESS
statement, the default is the system library (#LIBRARY).

mrtmax: Identifies the program being co~piled as an MRT program and specifies
the maximum number of active requesting display stations that can be attached
to the program. If this parameter is not specified, the default is 0, and the program
is not an MRT program.
YES/NO: Indicates whether the program to be compiled is a never-ending program.
Valid values are YES and NO; the default value is NO.
diagnosed source file: Specifies the file label for the diagnosed source file. If this
parameter is not specified, a diagnosed source file will not be created.

You can enter the COBOL command statement by one of three ways:
•

Enter COBOL with the appropriate parameters following it.

•

Enter the COBOLP procedure and select option 1.

•

Enter HELP COBOL.

If you enter the COBOLP command and select option 1 or enter HELP COBOL,
the following display appears:

OPTIONAl-(O)

CaSal PROCEDURE
Com?iles a COBOL Program.
Name Of Source Program To Be Compiled •••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Name Of Source Input library •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• #lIBRARY
Name Of Object Output library ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• #lIBRARY
Number Of Blocks For

Compil~r

Work Files (1-9999) ••••••••••••••• 24

Maximum Number Of Requesting Terminals (0-255) •••••••• _••••••••• 0
Never Ending Program (YES/NO) .•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• NO
Name Of File To Receive Merged Source And Diagnostics •••••••••••

(0)

Place On Input Job Queue (YES/NO) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• NO

How to Operate COBOL

13-3

Refer to the COBOL parameter descriptions under COBOL Command Statement
for a description of the prompts on this dispiay.

COBOlCG Command Statement
The COBOlCG command statement compiles, link-edits, and executes a COBOL
program. The COBOlCG command statement format is:
COBOlCG

pqname ,

p->'ocksizel

L24

]
J-' [inlib
#lIBRARY_

, [diagnosed source file]
pgname: The name of the source program to be compiled (maximum length is
eight characters).
blocksize: The number of blocks for the work files used by the compiler. If this
parameter is not specified, the default value is 24 blocks. Generally, one additional
block is required for each group of 10 program source statements over 200.
inlib: The name of the library that contains the source program. If this parameter
is not specified, the system library (#LI BRARY) is assumed.
outlib: The name of the library that will contain the object and load members. If
this parameter is not specified and the library was not specified on the PROCESS
statement, the default is the system library (#LlBRARY).
oclmmbr: The name of the procedure that contains the FilE OCl statements to
be used when executing the designated program.
userlib: The library that contains the COBOL load member to be executed and will
also be used for the oclmmbr search. If this parameter is not specified, the system
first searches the library specified by the outlib parameter, then searches the active
user library, and finally searches the system library for the load member.
mrtmax: Identifies the program being compiled as an MRT program and specifies
the maximum number of active requesting display stations that can be attached.
to the program. If this parameter is not-specified, the default is 0, and the program
is not an M RT program.
YES/NO: Indicates whether the program to be compiled is a never-ending program.
Valid values are YES and NO; the default is NO.
diagnosed source file: Specifies the file label for the diagnosed source file. If this
parameter is not specified, a diagnosed source file will not be created.

13-4

You can enter the COBOLCG command statement by one of three ways:
•

Enter COBOLCG with the appropriate parameters following it.

•

Enter the COBOLP procedure and select option 3.

•

Enter HELP COBOLCG.

If you enter the COBOLP command and select option 3 or enter HELP COBOLCG,
the following display appears:

OPTIONAL-(O)

COBOLCG PROCEDURE
Compiles and Executes a COBOL Program.
Name Of Source Program To Be Compiled ••••.••••••••••••..••••••••

Input Li brary For Source Member •.•...•.••.•••.••••••••••.•••••.• #lIBRARY

Output Library For Load Member

#LIBRARY

Number Of Blocks For Work File (1-9999) ••.•••..••••••••••.•••••• 24
Maximum Number Of Requesting Terminals (O-255) .•••••••••••.••••• 0
Never Ending Program (YES/NO) •••.••...•..•••••..•••.•••.••.••••• NO
Name Of Procedure containing OCl ..•..••••••.•...•...••••••.•••••

(0 )

Name OR File To Receive Merged Source And Diagnostics •..•••.••••

(0)

Name Of Library Containing Program To Be Executed ••.•••..••••.••

(O )

Place on Input Job Queue (YES/NO) ••..•••.•.••.••••••.••••••.•••• NO

Refer to the COBOLCG parameter descriptions under COBOLCG Command Statement for a description of the prompts on this display.

COBOLG Command Statement
The CaBO LG command statement executes a load member and allows you to enter
specialized OCL statements. The command statement format is:
COBOLG [pgnameJ ,[oclmmbrJ ,[userlibJ
pgname: The name of the COBOL load member to be executed.
oclmmbr: The name of the procedure containing the FILE OCL statements to be
used when the designated program is executed.

userlib: The library that contains the COBOL load member to be executed and will
also be used for the oclmmbr search. If this parameter is not specified, the system
first searches the active user library, and then searches the system library
(#LlBRARY) for the load member.

How to Operate COBOL

13-5

You can enter the COBOLG command statement by one of three ways:
•

Enter COBOLG with the appropriate parameters following it.

•

Enter the COBOLP procedure and select option 2.

•

Enter HELP COBOLG.

If '101Lenier the COBOLP--eommand-aAEi--sefect-optton---z orenteTttEtfTCOa-otrr,
the following display appears:

COBOlG PROCEDURE

OPTIONAL-(O)

Executes a COBOL Program.
Name Of Program To Be Executed ••.•••..•••••••••••••.••••••••••••
Name Of Procedure Containing User OCl •••.•••••••••••••••.•••••••

(0)

Name Of library Containing Program To Be Executed •••.•••••••••••

(0)

Place Job On The Input Job Queue (YES/NO) ••••••••••••••••••••••• NO

Refer to the COBOLG parameter descriptions under COBOLG Command Statement
for a description of the prompts on this display.

COBSYSIN Command Statement
The COBSYSIN command statement compiles and lin.k-edits a COBOL source program that is entered from the current system input device. The command statement format is:
COBSYSIN
If the COBSYSIN command is entered from the keyboard, the user is allowed to
enter COBOL source statements, one at a time. If the COBSYSIN command is
contained in a user-provided procedure, records are read from the procedure. If
the last source statement within the procedure does not contain a /*, reading
continues from the keyboard. The last source statement must be followed by a /*
termination record.

13-6

COBMOVE Command Statement
The COBMOVE command statement moves a diagnosed source file to a library. The
command statement format is:

•

L;OBMOVE diagnosed source file,

]

[library namel
#LlBRARY
'LREPLACE

'LDELETE

diagnosed source file: The file label for the diagnosed source file. This parameter
is required.
library name: The name of the library that is to receive the source member. If this
parameter is not specified, the default is the system library (#L1BRARY).
REPLACE: Specifies the disposition of the source member in the library. If this
parameter is not specified, and if a source member exists with the same name, a
displayed message is issued and requests replacement.
DELETE: Specifies whether the diagnosed source file should be deleted. If this
parameter is not specified, the diagnosed source file will not be deleted.

You can enter the COBMOVE command statement by one of three ways:
•

Enter COBMOVE with the appropriate parameters following it.

•

Enter the COBOLP procedure and select option 5.

•

Enter HELP COBMOVE.

If you enter the COBOLP command and select option 5 or enter HELP COBMOVE,
the following display appears:

C03MOVE PROCEDURE

OPTIONAL-(O)

Moves a Diagnosed Source File To a Library.
Label For The Diagnosed Source File •••••••••••••••••••••••••• __ • __
Output Library Name •.•...••.••••.•.••..••..•.••••••••.•••••••.•. #LIBRARY
To Replace An Existing Member, Enter REPLACE ••••.•••..•••••.••.•

(0)

To Remove Source File, Enter DELETE •.•.••••••••••••••..•••••••.•

(0)

How to Operate COBOL

13-7

Refer to the COBMOVE parameter descriptions under COBMOVE Command Statement for a description of the prompts on this display.

COBOL Messages

While you are running a COBOL program, messages may appear on the display
screen. For information about these messages, see the Displayed Messages Guide.

13-8

Chapter 14. How to Operate BASIC

This chapter describes the command statements you can use with the BASIC
language. If you require additional information about this program product, refer
to the BASIC Reference Manual.
System/34 BASIC has four procedure commands:
Procedure
Command

Function

BASIC

Allows you to enter, edit, save, and run BASIC programs
and procedures.

BASIC MRT

Allows you to execute BASIC multiple requestor terminal (MRT)
programs.

BASICP

Allows you to execute BASIC procedures.

BASICR

Allows you to execute BASIC programs.

BASICS

Allows you to convert a library source member that contains
a BASIC program into a library subroutine member.

If you have the ideographic version of the SSP, BASIC allows ideo'graphic characters
to be entered as character data.

PROGRAM EXECUTION RESTRICTION

System/34 BASIC and either FORTRAN (5726-FO 1) programs or programs using
the Scientific Instruction Set (5726-SS1) cannot be executed at the same time. The
Scientific Instruction Set is a group of macroinstructions that is compiled by the
ASM procedure command and used with either FORTRAN or basic assembler
programs.

BASIC PROCEDURE COMMAND

The BASIC procedure command allows you to enter, edit, save, and/or immediately
run BASIC programs and procedures. This command also allows you to enter, edit,
and save other data. You can use all of the BASIC commands. There is no separate
compile step between entering the program and running that program.
To start the BASIC procedure, enter the BASIC procedure command on the System/34 command display. The syntax of the BASIC procedure command is:

BASIC [

" ]
[
]
library name
] [regiOn SiZe] [
.
I"b
'24
' work area sIze , procedure
_
actIve user I rary

How to Operate BASIC

14-1

library name: The name of the library to be used as the current library. The
default is the active library. The current library is used when BASIC:
• Executes BASIC commands such as LOAD and SAVE
• Executes the CHAIN statement
•

Executes the intrinsic function MSG$

• Opens library members or the work station record file with the OPEN statement
region size: The amount of stor alJ!-1O be used by the BASIC session. J"he number
entered specifies the number of K. bytes (K = 1,024) to reserve and must be an even
decimal integer from 24 through 64. If no number is entered, 24K bytes is
assumed. An odd value can be entered, but the next greater even value is used.

work area size: A whole number from 0 through 99 specifying the work area size
in K bytes. If zero is entered or no entry is made, BASIC automatically calculates
the work area size based on the region size specified.

procedure: The name of the System/34 library procedure (PROC or P) member
that oontains OCL statements to be used with executing BASIC programs. The
procedure member must be in the specified library or in #lIBRARY.

14-2

The following keys can be used with the BASIC procedure command:
Keys

Description

Enter/Rec Adv

Enters the input field. Causes a specified command to
be executed or a line to be added to the BASIC work
space. Returns from the BASIC Help facility.

Rollt

Rolls the display up one line and blanks the input field.

RolI'!-

Rolls the display down one line and places the last line
displayed into the input field.

Command key 3

Switches between allowing only uppercase letters and
allowing both uppercase and lowercase letters. If
BASIC is being run from an ideographic keyboard,
switches between allowing only uppercase letters and
allowing uppercase and ideographic characters.

Help

Enters the BASIC Help facility.

When you enter a command or statement that is not syntactically mrrect, an error
message and message identifier are displayed on the last line of the display. The
input field remains as entered, and the cursor is placed in the position of the error.
You can press the Help key to enter the BASIC Help facility (if it is installed). A
screen will appear describing the statement or command in error.
You can terminate the BASIC procedure command and return to the System/34
command display in one of two ways:
•

Enter the OFF command.

• Press the Attn key and take option 2 or 3 unless ON ATTN GOTO or ON
ATTN IGNORE is active.
You can interrupt an executing BASIC program or procedure by pressing the Attn
key and taking option 4 if ON ATTN GOTO or ON ATTN IGNORE is not active.

How to Operate BASIC

14-3

BASIC MRT PROCEDURE COMMAND

A BASIC MRT procedure command allows you to execute a BASIC MRT program
that was saved as a library subroutine member. This command allows an MRT
program to be used by an operator who is not familiar with BASIC.
You must write a BASIC MRT procedure for each BASIC MRT program that you
want to execute; the procedure must be in the current library. The MRT program
specified in the BASIC MRT procedure is retrieved from the specified library and
executed by the System/34. To start a BASIC MRT procedure, enter its name
on the Command display. Refer to the BASIC Reference Manual for information
on how to write your BASIC MRT procedure.
You can terminate the BASIC MRT program and return to the System/34 Command
display in one of four ways:
• The program executes either a STOP or an EN D statement.
• The requesters sign off and there are no new requesters.
• The operator signs off the program.
• The operator presses the Attn key and takes option 2, 3, or 4 of the Inquiry
display. However, if an ON ATTN IGNORE statement is in effect when the
operator presses the Attn key, the request is saved until the ON ATTN IGNORE
statement is not in effect. If an ON ATTN GOTO statement is in effect
when the operator takes option 4, the program branches to the line given in
the GOTO statement.
If a program error occurs, the system displays a message and message identifier
that describe the error and allow one or more options. Refer to the Displayed
Messages Guide for a detailed description of the messages and options.

14-4

BASICR PROCEDURE COMMAND

The BASICR procedure command allows you to execute BASIC programs that have
been saved as library subroutine (SUBR or R) members. This command allows a
BASIC program to be used by an operator not familiar with BASIC. The BASIC
program specified in the BASICR procedure command is retrieved from the specified library and executed by System/34.
To start the BASICR procedure, enter the BASICR procedure command on the
System/34 command display. The syntax of the BASICR procedure command is:
library name
] [regiOn Size] [
. ]
BASICR member name, [
.
I'b
'24
' work area Size ,
active user I rary
_

[procedurJ ,

~tatus]

member name: The name of the library subroutine (SUBR or R) member that
contains the BASIC program to be run.
library name: The name of the library containing the specified member name and
the default library to be used when BASIC executes the CHAIN statement, opens
library members or the work station fi Ie with the OPEN statement, or executes the
MSG$ intrinsic function. The default is the active user library.
region size: The amount of storage to be used by the BASIC program. The number
entered specifies the number of K bytes (K = 1,024) to reserve and must be an even
decimal integer from 24 through 64. The default is 24 K bytes. An odd value can
be entered, but the next greater even value is used.
work area size: A whole number from 0 through 99 specifying the work area size
in K bytes. If zero is entered or no entry is made, BASIC automatically calculates
the work area size based on the region size specified.
procedure: The name of the System/34 library procedures (PROC or P) member
that contains OCl statements to be used with the executing BASIC program. The
procedure member must be in the specified library or in #LlBRARY.
status: Prints the information that would be displayed if you entered the
HELP STATUS command.

How to Operate BASIC

14-5

You can terminate the executing BASIC program and return to the System/34
command display by one of four ways:

14-6

•

If the program executes either a STOP or an END statement.

•

If the operator presses the Attn key and takes option 2 or 3 unless ON ATTN
IGNORE is active.

•

If the operator presses the Attn key and takes option 4 unless ON ATTN GOTO
or ON ATTN IGNORE is active.

•

If an error occurs in a running program.

If a program error occurs, a message and message identifier are displayed that
the error and allow one or more options. Refer to the Displayed Messages
Guide for a descri ption of the message -aAd options...
descr~be

BASICP PROCEDURE COMMAND

The BASICP procedure command allows you to execute BASIC procedures that
have been saved as library source (SOU RCE or S) members. This command allows
a BASIC procedure to be used by an operator not familiar with BASIC. The
procedure specified in the BASICP procedure command is retrieved from a specified
library and executed by System/34.
To start the BASICP procedure, enter the BASICP procedure command on the
System/34 command display. The syntax of the BASICP procedure command is:
BASICP member name

library
]
[regiOn Size] ~work area size~ ,
. name
.
, [ active user library , 24
'

[procedure] , Gtatus]

member name: The name of the library source (SOURCE or S) member that
contains the BASIC procedure to be executed.

library name: The name of the library to be used as the current user library.
The default is the active user library. The current user library is used when BASIC:
•

Executes BASIC commands such as LOAD and SAVE

•

Executes the CHAI N statement

•

Executes the intrinsic function MSG$

•

Opens library members or the work station record file with the OPEN statement

region size: The amount of storage to be used by the BASIC session. The number
entered specifies the number of K bytes (K = 1,024) to reserve and must be an even
decimal integer from 24 through 64. If no number is entered, 24 K bytes is
assumed. An odd value can be entered, but the next greater even value is used.

work area size: A whole number from 0 through 99 specifying the work area size
in K bytes. If zero is entered or no entry is made, BASI C automatically calculates
the work area size based on the region size specified.

procedure: The name of the System/34 library procedure (PROC or P) member
that contains DCl statements to be used with executing BASIC programs. The
procedure member must be in the specified library or in #L1BRARY.

status: Prints the information that would be displayed if you entered the
HELP STATUS command.
You can terminate the executing BASIC procedure and return to the System/34
command display by one of three ways:
•

End the outermost BASIC procedure.

•

Press the Attn key and take option 2 or 3 unless ON ATTN GOTO or ON ATTN
IGNORE is active.

•

Specify the OFF or CLEAR PROC commands in the BASIC procedure.
How to Operate BASIC

14-7

BASICS PROCEDURE COMMAND

The BAS!CS piOcsduie command allows you to convert a iibrary source (SOURCE
or S) member that contains a BASIC program into a library subroutine (SUBR or
R) member and to obtain a listing of the program and any syntax errors in it.
You can then use the BASICR procedure command to execute the BASIC program
saved as a library subroutine member, or you can use the BASIC procedure command or SEU to correct any syntax errors in the program.
To start the BASICS procedure, enter the BASICS procedure command on the
System/34 command display. The syntax of the BASICS procedure command is:
.
[subroutine library name] [
]
BASICS subroutine member name,
.
I.b
' REPLACE ,
active user I rary
[LIST]
,

[regiOn siZe] [source member name
]
24
'subroutine member name '

source library name
]
[ subroutine Ii brary name
subroutine member name: The name of the library subroutine member to be
created.
subroutine library name: The name of the library to contain the subroutine
member. The default is the active user library.
REPLACE: The program in the source member is to replace the contents of a
subroutine member. If REPLACE is not specified and the subroutine member
already exists, an error message is issued with an option 0 to replace the member or
an option 3 to halt execution.
LIST: The library source member is to be printed as it is read, along w,ith any
syntax error messages (if any errors occurred). If you do not specify L\IST and
either there are syntax errors in the library source member or the region size is
too small, you must terminate the procedure with an option 3 to halt execution.

region size: The amount of storage to be reserved for running the BASICS procedure. This entry specifies the number of K bytes to reserve, and must be an even
decimal integer from 24 through 64. The default is 24 K bytes. An odd value can
be entered, but the next greater even value is used.
source member name: The name of the library source member containing the
BASIC program. The default is the subroutine member name.
source library name: The name of the library containing the source member. The
default is the subroutine library name.

14-8

Chapter 15. How to Operate the Data Communications Adapter (BSC, SOLC)

CONSOLE DISPLAY LIGHTS AND SWITCH

The lights and switch that indicate data communications processing are on the
CE control panel.

How to Operate the Data Communications Adapter (eSC, SOLC)

15-1

~f
0 1

D
C

4 C

A
9

6
7 2

---

~f
0 1

A
9

6
7 3

q1))

PROC RUNl

4 C

A
9

L----DlSPlAY·DATA--~

PWR FAULT DPLY CHECK
PREY
SEARCH RUN

FORCE
CLOCK MSIPL
ON
I1)IISIs"NL;T~~~S

A
V

DPLYPCR
INSN SH:P

MODE SE LECTOR

CE START

COMM
DPL Y
ON

PWR FAULT DPLY CHECK
PREV
SEARCH RUN

FORCE
CLOCK
ON

MSIPL

CSIPL

DIS~ll II

I)lSK[ TTl

STOR SEL ADD COMP
CTL
STOP

a56eeOaaO
DIS~

OFF

CLOCK

STOP

OFF

C 0-0-

DISK

ROC INTERRPPT
4
2
1

MAIN

RUN

LAOMOP
TEST
' ( -,

Figure 16-1. CE Panel

If no display lights in the lower rowe are on (disregard the PO, proc interrupt 4,'
2, and 1, and the P1 lights), refer to No CE Display Lights On in this chapter.
If any display light in the lower row is on, refer to CE Display Lights On in this
chapter.

Problem Determination

16-5

No CE Display Lights On

If no display lights on the CE panel come on, the error is probably a programming
error. Be sure the COMM DPL Y switch is off. The system cannot display the
message. To find out what the message is:

Set the Mode Selector switch on the CE panel to the Insn Step/Dply LSR
in Figure 16-1).
position

Set the Display/Data switches
shown in the table below.

in Figure 16-1) to the first MAR value

MAR Value
OC
OE
28
2C
2E
08
Check the display lights on the bottom of the CE panel (

If the display lights do not look like the following diagram, set the Display/
Data switches to the next MAR value in the table (see step 2) and check the
display lights again. Repeat step 4 until the display lights on your CE panel
look like the lights shown here. (0 indicates light is off; • indicates light is
on).

When the display lights on your CE panel look like the display lights shown
in the diagram in step 4, set the Display/Data switches ( " in Figure 16-1)
to the Error LSR number that corresponds to the MAR value on your
Display/Data switches.
MAR Value
OC
OE
28
2C
2E
08

16-6

CD in Figure 16-1).

Error LSR
12
1A
22
32
3A
02

Record the condition of each of the display lights (whether on or off). Keep
this record. These values will be needed by your service representative if you
continue to have difficulty with the system.

Return the Mode Selector switch on the CE panel to the Proc Run position.

Set the Display /Data switches back to 00.

Perform IPL from disk.

10.

Enter the APA R command statement to save the recorded information on a
diskette.

11.

Retry the failing operation. If you cannot continue, call your service
representative.

CE Display Lights On

If a processor check occurs and the display lights are on, record their status (press
the Lamp Test switch on the CE panel to check that all the lights are working).
Return the Mode Selector switch to the Proc Run position. Perform IPL again.
This causes the hardware error to be automatically recorded in the error recording
tables on the disk, provided you have not pressed the Reset and CE Start switches.
If you suspect that the hardware error is being caused by the program (for
example, if you rerun the program and the same hardware error occurs),
press the Reset and CE Start switches on the CE panel to take a dump. This
dump is taken unless a protected dump exists in the dump area on disk. The
information required to analyze the problem is recorded in the dump file of
the disk. Perform IPL again. Enter the APAR command statement to save the
recorded information on a diskette.
If you are not able to resume processing, call your service representative and give
him or her the information that you have recorded.

Taking a Dump when the Dump Area on Disk is Protected

if you want to take a dump but the dump file on disk is protected, you can use
the following procedure to take a dump. Be aware, however, that when you use
this procedure, the protected dump is overlaid by the dump being taken.
1.

Set the Address switches on the CE panel (switches 1 and 2) to DD.

Press the Reset and CE Start switches on the CE panel to take a dump.

Set the Address switches (switches 1 and 2) back to 00.

Perform IPL from disk.

Use the DUMP or APAR procedure to save the dump.

Problem Determination

16-7

Console Check Light On
If the Console Check light comes on, check the following:
• System console is powered on.
•

System console Address switches (if any) are set at 000 and the Terminator
switch is set to the 2 position (if another work station is attached). Otherwise, the
Terminator switch should be set to the 1 position.

•

System console Status switch is at the Normal position.

•

System console is correctly cabled to port 0 of the 5340 System Unit.

Otherwise, the system console may have an unrecoverable hardware error.
To recover, either:
•

Correct the error and try IPL again, or

• Sign on the alternative console by entering the CONSOLE control command.
If you cannot sign on the alternative system console, call your service representative.

Cannot IPL

16-8

•

The Brightness control on the display station may be set so low that the
System Available light on the display screen is not visible. Check the
adjustment.

•

Check that the system console is powered on.

•

The MSIPL and CSIPL switches on the CE panel may be incorrectly set.
They should both be set to the Disk position unless you are reloading from
diskettes. The switches to the left and right of the MSIPL and CSIPL
switches should be in the down position (set to the STOP, OF F, MAl N, and
RUN positions). Check these switches, set them correctly, and press the
Load switch on the operator panel again.

•

The Mode Selector switch on the CE panel should be set to the Proc Run
position.

•

Each Address/Data switch on the CE panel should be set to O.

•

If message SYS-0019 is shown on the display screen, one or more errors have
been detected during the IPL. See the Displayed Messages Guide for more
information about this message. Record the entries exactly as they appear
and then retry the IPL. If the error occurs again, call your service representative and give him the information you have recorded.

• The SSP or control storage program may have been accidentally modified.
If you are doing an IPL from disk, reload the system support program
product and other programs by doing a reload from diskettes (see IPL from
Diskette In Chapter 4).
If this does not work, the control storage program may have been
accidentally modified. If so, it must be reloaded from diskette by your
service representative.
•

If you cannot correct the problem after checking the above possible
causes, call your service representative.

No Visible System Action
•

If the System In Use light on the operator panel is lit, your program is running.
Do not take any action unless you are sure that some expected system action
is overdue. Some programs require significant amounts of processing time with
no visible changes occurring in the system.

•

If the Stop light on the CE subpanel below the CE panel is lit, check the system
for any possible problem that may have caused someone to press the Stop
switch. Press the Start switch on the CE subpanel to continue.

• The Enter/Rec Adv key may not have been pressed. Check the display screen.
If the cursor is still displayed following the last keyed entry and the Input
Inhibited light is off, press the Enter/Rec Adv key to continue.
•

The program may be looping. This means that a program failure on another
error is causing the program to execute the same series of instructions
repeatedly.

•

The program may be waiting for resources that are being used by another pro·
gram. To determine if this is the case, use the Sys Req/Attn key to interrupt
processing and select option 5 to display the session status. The Status Active
column for the job will contain INIT-WAIT if the program is waiting for
resources.

Problem Determination

16-9

If you want to have the programmer check the program for a possible error you
can take a dump in one of the following ways:

Set Display/Data switches 3 and 4 (
in Figure 16-1) on the CE panel to
CEo If a protected dump exists, set Address/Data switches 1 and 2 to DO
to override the protected dump. Press the Stop key. A dump will be
taken and a message sent to the system console informing the operator of
the dump. This dump does not require an IPL and gives the programmer
the opportunity to investigate the problem further. The programmer
could cancel the program by inquiring and selecting option ,2 or 3.

Press the Reset and CE Start switches on the CE panel. An IPL is required
to continue processing the next job.

The information required to analyze the possible program failure is recorded on
the disk dump file.
Enter the DUMP or APAR command statement for information on how to
save the dump.
If you want to cancel the looping program so that you can retry this job or
another job, press the Attn key and select the cancel option (option 3) to
terminate the job. The job should be retried after checking that:
1.

Correct input data was entered.

Correct sequence of jobs was executed.

Correct diskettes were provided.

Data on the disk will not be incorrectly modified if you retry this job.
Check your application running instructions if you are running an
application.
Note: Remember that you may have to execute the backup and
restore procedures for the job (refer to the job run book) in order
to retry the job.

H the same failure occurs again,use--tRe--GANCEL command to cance-l the-iobwith
a dump. Consult the programmer responsible for the program.

I ncorrect Output for the Job

16-10

•

If you receive incorrect output for a job, you should first check your application operating instructions. When running your application, you should follow
the procedures for checking output and making corrections or rerunning the
job.

•

The output may indicate an error in the input that was provided. Check the
input, correct it if it is not correct, then rerun the job.

•

Check that you have run the jobs in the correct sequence. You may have
omitted a job that processes the data in error. Rerun the sequence of jobs
involved.

•

Check that the print image matches the print belt on the printer. If the printed
output contains incorrect or meaningless characters, the wrong print image may
be defined or the wrong belt may be on the printer. Check the proper setup
instructions and, if necessary, the restart procedures from the operating instructions for this job. Either put the proper print belt on the printer or use the SET
command statement to correct the print belt image in main storage.

•

Ensure that device-dependent output, such as ideographic characters or output
at 15 characters per inch, has been sent to the appropriate printer.

•

If you cannot correct th~ problem, call the person responsible for the program
for further assistance.

3262/5211 Printer Indicator Lights On
If the printer indicator lights come on, check the following table for causes:
Printer Indicator Lights
Check Forms

Condition

Ready Power

0
0

0
0
0

0
0

Recovery Action

Print check or carriage
pedestal check (3262
only)
Carriage check
End of forms
Not ready, CE switch
on
Program check
Not powered on (3262
only)

3
4
5
7

Light on or blinking
Light off

3262/5211 Printer Recovery Procedures
Print Check or Carriage Pedestal Check Recovery: Clear the error that produced the check and press the printer Stop key to clear the Check light.
Press the Ready key and the operation will be retried (with possible
overprinting). If the error occurred due to an unprintable character check,
processing will resume at the command following the print line that contained the unprintable character.

Problem Determination

16-11

Carriage Check Recovery: The printer attachment controller has detected
improper carriage motion. To recover from this problem:

•

Clear the paper problems.

•

Press the Stop key to reset the check condition.

•

Press the Carriage Restore switch.

•

Manually align the forms to line 1.

•

Press the Ready key. When the Ready key is pressed, the forms will
advance to the line that was being accessed when the error occurred.

End of Forms: The printer has detected the end of the forms. The
printer may have more forms remaining below the print line. To process
these forms,press the Stop key to reset the check. Then press the Ready
key to process one more form. If you continue printing, you may lose
vertical registration on the bottom of the form, or the 5211 Printer may
print beyond the end of the forms.

To change forms, press the Stop key to reset the check, load the new forms,
and then press the Ready key to proceed.

Not Ready, CE Switch On: The printer is not ready and is unable to execute
the requested operation. Check for printer power on (5211 only) or an
interlock indication (caused by the print unit open or belt cover not in place).
This condition could be caused by a CE switch being on in the printer, in
which case it must be turned off. Press the Ready key to make the printer
ready. If the not ready condition is caused by an interlock condition (Interlock light flashing) or by the printer not powered on, correct the error condition, press the Stop key to reset the check, and then press the Ready key to
make the printer ready. If message SYS-2850 appears on the screen again,
you may need to perform an IPL to make the printer ready. If the printer
does not become ready, you may need to call the service representative.

Program Check: A programming or system error has occurred. Cancel the
job.

Temporary Error: An error was sensed but recovery was automatic.

Not Powered On: The printer is not ready because it has powered off. Set
the Unit Emergency switch (on right side of printer) to the Power Off position. Wait 5 seconds and then set switch to the Power Enable position. Press
Stop/Reset and press Ready.

For further information, see the 3262 Printer Models A 1 and 81 Component
Description and Operator's Guide or the 5211 Printer Models 1 and 2 Component
Description and Operator's Guide.

16·12

5256 Printer Indicator Lights On
If the printer indicator lights come on, check the following table for causes:

Printer Indicator Lights
Line
Check

0
0
0
0
0

Unit
Check

Forms

Ready

0
1

1
1

0
0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0
0

Condition

Recovery
Action

Graphic
Check

0
0
0
0
0
0

Print check
Carriage check
End of forms
Not ready
Program check
Twinaxial interface
check
Graphic check

1
2

3
4

5
7
1

5256 Printer Recovery Procedures

Print Check Recovery: Clear the error that produced the check and press the
printer Stop key to clear the Check light. Press the Start key and the operation will be retried (with possible overprinting).
Graphic Check Recovery: Processing will resume at the command following
the print line that contained the unprintable character. Press the printer
Stop key to clear the Check light. Press the Ready key and the operation
will be retried (with possible overprinting).

Carriage Check Recovery: The printer controller has detected improper
carriage motion. To recover from this problem:
•

Clear the paper problems.

•

Press the Stop key to reset the check condition.

•

Press the Forms Feed key.

•

Manually align the forms to line 1.

•

Press the Start key. When the Start key is pressed, the forms will
advance to the line that was being accessed when the error occurred.

End of Forms: The printer has detected the end of forms. To change
forms, press the Stop key to reset the check, load the new forms, and then
press the Start key to proceed.

Not Ready: The printer is not ready and is unable to execute the requested
operation. Press the Start key to make the printer ready.

Program Check: A programming or system error has occurred. Cancel the
job.

Problem Determination

16-13

Temporary Error: An error was sensed but recovery was automatic.

Twinaxial Interface Check: An error occurred on the twinaxial interface
to the work station. Cancel the job.

For further information, see the 5256 Printer Operator's Guide.

5224/5225 Printer Error Recovery Procedures

Print Check Recovery: An error occurred during printing. The Attention
light is on and the Ready light is off. The LED display contains one of.
the following values:
Meaning

Value
31,32
34-36
38,39
77
81
83-85
86,87
88,89
99

}

Print check
Cover /platen check
Machine check
Print check
Machine check
Ribbon jam
Graphic check

Note: To display the second digit, press the 2nd Mode key (the first digit is displayed again when you release the 2nd Mode key). The error might be indicated
by a message with no options on the display screen, indicating that operator
intervention is requi red.
Operator action:
1.

Correct the error condition for cover/platen open and ribbon jam.

Press the Stop key to reset the check condition (LED display goes off).

Press the Start key (Ready light comes on).

Printer recovery: Except for a graphic check, where the printing continues
with the next character, the operation is automatically tried again.

Note: If the printer does not respond after you press the Start key, you
may do the following. Cancel the job from the system console, set the Power
switch to 0 and then to 1, manually align the forms to line 1, and press the
Start key. If the printer still does not respond, call your service representative.

16-14

Carriage Check Recovery: Forms carriage movement was incorrect. The
Attention light is on and the Ready light is off. The LED display contains
one of the following values:

Value

Meaning

41-43 }
45,46

Forms check

48
Note: To display the second digit, press the 2nd Mode key (the first digit is
displayed again when you release the 2nd Mode key).

The error might be indicated by a message with no options on the display
screen', indicating that operator intervention is required.
Operator action:
1.

If a forms jam exists, clear the forms jam.

Press the Stop key to reset the check condition (LED display goes off).

Press the New Page key to set the current line to 1 and manually position
the forms you want printing to continue on to line 1.

Press the Start key (Attention light goes off and Ready light comes on).

Printer recovery: When the printer is ready, it skips to the line to which it
was going when the error occurred. Printing continues.
Note: If the printer does not respond after you press the Start key, you may
do the following. Cancel the job from the system console, set the Power
switch to 0 and then to 1, manually al ign the forms to line 1, and press the
Start key. If the printer still does not respond, call your service representative.

For more information about positioning the forms in the printer, see the
Operator's Guide for the printer that the error occurred on.

End of Forms Recovery: The printer is out of forms. The Attention light is
on and the Ready light is off. The LED display contains an E (end of forms).
The error might be indicated by a message with no options, indicating-that
the printer is out of forms.

Problem Determi nation

16-1 5

Operator action:
1.

Insert additional forms.

Press the New Page key to set the current line counter to 1.

Manually align the forms to line 1.

Press the Stop key to reset the check condition (LED display goes off).

Press the Start key (Attention light goes off and Ready light comes on).

Printer recovery: After you press the Start key, the printer skips to the line
where printing is to start.
Notes:

1. When the end-of-forms condition occurs on a 5225 printer, printing may have
stopped before the end of the page. You can print to the end of the page by
pressing the Stop key and then the Start key. Each time you press these keys
another line will print until the end of the page is reached or until pressing
the switches will not reset the check.
2. When the system continues processing, it expects the forms to be positioned
on line 1. For more information about positioning the forms in the printer,
see the Operator's Guide for the printer the error occurred on.

Not Ready: The printer is not ready. The Attention light is on; the Ready

light and LED displays are off. The operator might receive. a message directing the operator to press the Start key on the printer.
Operator action: Press the Start key (Attention light goes off and Ready
light comes on).
Printer recovery: The printer automatically tries the operation again.

Program Check: A programming or system error has occurred. Cancel the

job.
Printer recovery: None. The printer is ready for the next job.

Temporary Error Condition: An error was sensed but recovery was

automatic.

16-16

Coaxial/Twinaxial Interface Check: An error occurred on the coaxial/twinaxial interface to the work station. Lights and indicators at the printer are
unpredictable.

Operator action:
1.

Cancel the job.

Ensure that the printer is properly attached to the system and correctly
configured, and that the printer is online.

Turn the Power switch to 0 and then to 1, manually align the forms to
line 1, and press the Start key (Attention light goes off and Ready light
comes on).

Printer recovery: None. The printer is ready for the next job.
Note: If operator action does not correct the problem, there may be a hardware error.

Communications Network Interface Check: An error occurred on the communications network interface. Lights and indicators at the printer are
unpredictable.

Operator action:
1.

Cancel the job. (If the error continues to occur, call your service
representati ve.)

Printer recovery: None. The printer is ready for the next job.
Note: If operator action does not correct the problem, there may be a hardware error.

Hardware Check: A hardware check has occurred at the printer. Lights and
indicators at the printer are unpredictable.

Operator action:
1.

Cancel the job.

Ensure that the printer is properly attached to the system and correctly
configured, and that the printer is online.

Turn the Power switch to 0 and then to 1, manually align the forms to
line 1, and press the Start key (Attention light goes off and Ready light
comes on).

Printer recovery: None.
Note: If the error condition cannot be corrected or if it continues to occur,
call your service representative.

Problem Determi nation

16-1 7

16-18

Appendix A. Utilities for Ideographic Character Generation and Sort

HOW TO OPERATE THE CHARACTER GENERATOR UTILITY
The character generator utility allows you to maintain a file of user-defined ideographic characters not in the IBM-supplied ideographic character set. This utility
allows the work station operator to do the following:
•

Define new ideographic characters. These user-defined ideographic characters
are placed in the same disk file as the IBM-supplied extended ideographic
character set.

•

Change existing user-defined ideographic characters.

•

Delete existing user-defined ideographic characters.

•

Print existing user-defined and IBM-supplied ideographic characters excluding
Katakana, Hiragana, alphabetic, numeric, Greek and Russian characters, Roman
numerals, and special symbols.

•

Update and specify sorting information for user-defined ideographic characters.
In addition, you can update the single pronunciation for IBM-supplied extended
ideograph ic cha racters.

The character generator utility must be initiated from a 5255 Display Station. Only
one copy of the character generator utility can be executing at a time. To run the
character generator utility, enter the CGU command.
CGU [printer-id]
When you sign on using the CGU command you are automatically in ENTRY mode.
This allows you to define ideographic characters.
By pressing certain command function keys, you can perform any of the following
functions (see Function Control Keys later in this appendix).
•

ENTRY, which is used to define new ideographic characters.

•

UPDATE, which is used to change existing user-defined ideographic characters.

•

DELETE, which is used to delete existing user-defined ideographic characters.

•

LIST, which is used to print all or a subset of the user-defined ideographic
characters, IBM-supplied ideographic characters excluding Katakana, Hiragana,
alphabetic, numeric, Greek, Russian, Roman numerals, special symbols, and
associated sort information.

•

SORT, which is used to change existing information for ideographic characters.

•

EOJ, which terminates the job.

For further information on the character generator utility, refer to the Character
Generator Utility User's Guide and Reference Manual.
Utilities for Ideographic Character Generation and Sort

A-1

Command Function Keys
The character generator utility program supports 12 command function keys.
Figures A-1 and A-2 show the alphanumeric and ideographic keyboards. The 12
command function keys are located on the top row of each keyboard. The keyboard template immediately above the top row of keys identifies the function of
each key. Detailed descriptions of the function control keys (
through
follow the keyboards.

(

G)
:

(

)

GX21·7859-0

13
lAlter
Roll
Factor

2 Redisplay

Character

Write
Character

Delete

5 Restart

Character

19
Alter

20
EOJ

Sort

22
Entry

23
List

24
Update

Copy

Figure A-1. Alphanumeric Keyboard with Command Function Keys, Keyboard Template, and Function Control Keys

A-2

Character
Generator
Utility

Restart
Character

Alter
Print

o List

Update

Copy

Factor

Figure A-2. Ideographic Keyboard with Command Function Keys, Keyboard Template, and Function Control Keys

Utilities for Ideographic Character Generation and Sort

A-3

Function Control Keys
The follo\A/ing function control keys are used to specify system functions fOi the
character generator utility program (see Figures A-1 and A-2 for the location of
the keys):
Location on
Keyboard (See
Figures A-1
and A-2)

•

Ideographic
Keys

•
•
•

A-4

Alphanumeric
Keys

Description
Cmd function control key: Press this key
and a command function key to cause
a function to be performed.

•
•

Home function control key: Press this
key to return the cursor to its initial
position. If the cursor is already in its
initial position, the program reprompts
you, resetting any data already entered
by the operator to its original value.
Rolli function control key: If the
program is in update or entry mode,
press th is key to roll the work area
back.
Rollt function control key: If the
program is in update or entry mode,
press this key to roll the work area
ahead.

Location on
Keyboard (See
Figures A-'
and A-2)

Ideographic
Keys

Alphanumeric
Keys

Description
Enter Rec/Adv function control key:
Press th is key to return control to the
character generator utility program. The
program processes the data entered on
the current display.

If you are defining an ideographic
character in entry or update mode, this
key displays the next rows (nine rows
at a time) of an 18 row matrix, in an
area on the display screen called the
work area. If the current rows of the
work area displayed include row 18,
the following occurs:
•

If no new data is entered into these
rows and the Enter Reel Adv key is
pressed, the program assumes the
character is complete and prompts
you for the sort information.

•

If new data is entered into these
rows and the Enter Reel Adv key is
pressed, the program writes the new
data in another matrix called the
display area. The same rows of the
work area are displayed again.

Utilities for Ideographic Character Generation and Sort

A-5

HOW TO OPERATE IDEOGRAPHIC SORT

The ideogiaphic sort program has two functions: the sort active table build function and the sort function. The sort active table build function allows you to:
•

Select records based on ideographic and/or alphanumeric fields

•

Specify ideographic and/or alphanumeric fields as control fields

•

Sort ideographic control fields into the following sequences:
Single Pronunciation/Radical/Stroke/Tie-Breaker
Single Pronunciation/Stroke/Radical/Tie-Breaker
Radical/Stroke/Tie-Breaker
Stroke/Radical/Tie-Breaker
Character-Type

•

Sort EBCDIC kana fields into seion kana sequence.

Combinations of the preceding sequences can be used to sort ideographic fields into
your own ideographic sequences and into known Japanese sequences, for example,
Japanese Word Dictionary.
The ideographic sort program also allows you to rearrange records in a file, reformat
records in a file, and drop records from a file.

Running the Ideographic Sort Program

To run the ideographic sort program, enter the SRTX command with its associated
parameters. You can also use the HELP procedure to enter the SRTX command.
Enter HELP SRTX to be prompted for the SRTX command parameters. The
format of the SRTX command is:
SRTX input file label,source member,output file label,number of records,
user library name]
[ #LlBRARY

[Y]

input file label: Label of the existing data file on disk to be sorted.
source member: Name of the source member that contains the sort sequence
specifications.
output file label: Label of the file that will contain the sorted data. This label
must not be an existing file label.
number of records: Number of records that the new output file will contain.
user library name: Name of the user library that contains the source member. If
the user library name is omitted, the ideographic sort program searches the system
library (#LlBRARY) for the source member.

A-6

Place the ideographic sort job on the input job queue. Y specifies that the ideographic sort job should be placed on the input job queue. N (default) specifies
that the ideographic sort job should not be placed on the input job queue. If this
parameter is used to place an ideographic sort job on the input job queue, the ideographic sort program must be contained in the system library (#L1BRARY).
If you enter SRTX or HELP SRTX, the following display appears.

SRTX PROCEDURE

Rearrange, drop and reformat record in a file.
lab~l

Of File To Be Sorted ..••.•.••...••..••••••••••••••.•••.•••

Name of Source Member Containing Sort Specifications •.•••.••••••
label Of The Output File ..•............•.......••.•.•••..••••..•
Number Of Records To Be Placed To The Output File •••••••••••••••
Numb~r

of User Library Containing The Source Member •...••••..•.• #LI8RARY

Place Job On Input Job Queue (YIN) .•.....•.••.•••••••.•.••.•...• N

This method of running the ideographic sort requires the sort sequence specifications
to be stored as a source member in a library.
You can also run the ideographic sort program by executing your own sort procedure
stored on disk, or by entering your own sort procedure through a display station
keyboard.
For further information about the ideographic sort program and the Oel required
for user-supplied sort procedures, see the Ideographic Sort Reference Manual.

Running the Sort Active Table Build Function
To run the sort active table build function, enter the SRTXB lD procedure. The
format of the SRTXBlD procedure is:
SRTXBlD

Utilities for Ideographic Character Generation and Sort

A-7

A-8

Glossary

acquire: To assign a nonrequesting display station to a
program.
alphanumeric: Consisting of both letters and numbers and
often other symbols (such as punctuation marks and mathematic symbols). Contrast with ideographic_
alternative system console: A display station that can be
designated as the system console when the configured
system console is not functioning.
Assembler: Basic Assembler and Macro Processor Program
Product.
auto dup feature: A feature of the data file utility program
that allows certain types of information from predetermined
fields in a previous record to be duplicated in the current
record.

checkpoint active file: A fixed disk file that is being used
by either a task that is currently being checkpointed or a
checkpointed task that failed and has not yet been
restarted.
checkpoint active library: A library that is being used by
either a task that is currently being checkpointed or a
checkpointed task that failed and has not yet been
restarted.
checkpoint record file: A disk file containing a collection
of checkpoint records.
checkpoint restart: The process of resuming a job at a
checkpoint within the job step that caused an abnormal
termination.

auto skip feature: The SEU option that, if on, causes the
cursor to skip all auto skip fields in statements displayed
by SEU.

checkpoint/restart facility: A facility for restarting the
execution of a program at some point other than the
beginning, after the program was terminated due to a
program or system failure. The restart begins at a checkpoint and uses checkpoint records to reinitialize the job.

autocall: In data communications, the capability of a
station to initiate, without operator intervention, a call
over a switched line.

column separators: Vertical lines that precede each position
in a field. These lines do not occupy a position on the
display.

block: (1) A record or a collection of contiguous records
recorded or processed as a unit. (2) In System/34, a
10-sector unit of disk storage that contains 2560 bytes.

command display station: (1) A display station defined
during system configuration as able to request and initiate
jobs, as well as able to be acquired by an executing program. (2) A display station that can be used for data
entry or interactive processing. (See data display station.)

BSC: Binary synchronous communications.
buzzer: An audible alarm at the display station that is
intended to direct attention to the display.
CE panel: A panel that contains indicator lights and switches
used by the CE during system maintenance.
character generator utility: Part of the Ideographic
Generator/Sort Program Product that is used to create,
maintain, and display ideographic characters.
checkpoint: A reference point in a program at which
information about the contents of main storage can be
recorded so that, if necessary, the program can be restarted
at an intermediate point.

command function keys: The 12 keys on the top row of a
display station keyboard thC!t~re used with the Cmdfunction control key to request functions of program products
and user programs. By using both lowercase and uppercase
shift, 24 different key functions are available.
command mode: A display station mode. In command
mode, a display station can request jobs or initiate jobs.
(See command display station.)
command statement: A statement that requests the performance of a particular function. A command statement
always contains the name of the command, and may
include parameters or data. The two types of command
statements are control commands and procedure commands.
(See control command and procedure command.)

Glossary

G-1

control command: A command statement used by an
operator to control system or display station operation.

end of extent: End of the area on a disk or diskette
allocated for a file.

A control command does not run a procedure and cannot
be used in a procedure. (See command statement
and procedure command.)

file: An organized collection of related records treated as
a unit.

cursor: A movable character (underscore) on a display
screen, used to indicate where the next character keyed
will appear.

10: Identification.

data display station: (1) A display station that was defined
during system configuration as capable only of being
acquired by an executing program. A data display station
cannot request or initiate jobs. (2) A display station that
can be used for data entry only. (See command display

character.

ideographic character (lGC): A pictogram or graphic that
requires 2 bytes of storage. Contrast with alphanumeric

ideographic character set: A character set that contains
pictograms or graphics that can be used to represent ideas
(such as Japanese).

station.)

data mode: (1) A display station mode. In data mode, a
display station can be used only for data entry. (See
data display station.) (2) In data communications, a time
during which BSC is transmitting or receiving characters
on the communications line.
diskette: (1) A thin, flexible magnetic disk permanently
sealed in a cover that protects it. (2) A single removable
disk contained in its own envelope.
diskette 1: (1) Refers to a 33FD diskette. A diskette that
can contain data on one side only. Contrast with diskette 2D.

Ideographic Generator/Sort Program Product: The program product (program 5726-IG1) that consists of the
character generator utility and the ideographic sort
utility.
ideographic sort utility: A part of the Ideographic
Generator /Sort Program Product that is used to (1) arrange
records (or their relative record numbers) in a predetermined sequence according to data contained in one or more
specific fields within the records and (2) rebuild the tables
which contain the predetermined sequence if the user wants
to alter the predetermined sequence.
IGC: See ideographic character.

diskette 2D: Refers to a 53FD diskette. A diskette that
can contain data on both sides, with two times the number
of bytes being stored in the same physical space as diskette
1. Contrast with diskette 1.
display screen: The part of a display station on which data,
messages, or other information is displayed.
display station: An input/output device that contains a
display screen on which data is displayed and an attached
keyboard from which data is entered. It can be used to
request jobs and/or enter data. A display station can be
designated as the system console or as a command or data
display station at system configuration time.

initial program load: A sequence of events that loads the
system programs and prepares the system for execution of
jobs.
input job queue: A list of jobs waiting to be processed by
the system. The list is maintained on the disk. Each entry
in the list references a procedure stored in a library on disk.
inquiry: (1) A request (entered from a display station) for
information in storage. (2) A request for information that
puts the system into inquiry mode. (The operator initiates
an inquiry by pressing the Attn key.)
IPL: Initial program load.

OFU (data file utility): Part of the Utilities Program
Product used to create, maintain, and display or print data
files.
dump: (1) To copy the contents of all or part of storage,
usually to an output device. (2) Data that has been
dumped.

G-2

IPO switch: Immediate Power Off switch.
job name: The name assigned to a job by the system. This
name consists of the two-character I D of the work station
that requested the job and the time expressed in hours,
minutes, and seconds.

library: An area on disk that can contain load members,
procedure members, source members, and subroutine
members. (See user library and system library.)
library member: A named collection of records or statements in a library.
MAR: Microinstruction address register.

member: See library member, message member, and
procedure members.
menu: A displayed list of items (usually jobs) from which
the operator makes a selection.
message member: A library load member in which each
record contains a message.
MIC (message identification code): A 4-digit number that

identifies a record in a message member. This number can
be part of the message identifier.
modem (modulator/demodulator}: A device that connects
a communications adapter to a communications line.
MRT (multiple requestor terminal program): A program
that can process requests concurrently from more than one
requesting display station. Compare with SRT.

multiline communications adapter (MLCA): A feature on
System/34 supporting up to four cmnmunications lines. It
allows a total speed of up to 65,600 bits per second.
multinational character set (MCS): A feature on System/34
that makes an expanded set of 188 characters avai lable to
countries with supported language groups.
multivolume file: A diskette file that resides on more
than one disk.
NEP (never-ending program): A program that will own
system resources for a long period of time.
nucleus: That portion of the System/34 SSP that is resident in main storage.
O£L: Operation control language.

offline multivolume file: A multivolume file that a
system processes in segments. Each segment is processed
before the next segment is copied to or from the disk.

operator panel: A panel containing controls, switches, and
lights for use by the operator.
parameter: (1) A variable that is assigned a particular value
for a specific purpose or process. (2) A value specified in a
command statement or a control statement.
point-to-point line: A data communications facility that
connects a single remote station to a data processing
system. A point-to-point line can be either switched or
nonswitched.
print spooling: A part of the System Support Program
Product that provides temporary storage of print data on
disk.
priority: Preference in the use of system resources.
procedure command: A command statement that runs a
procedure. (See command statement and control
command.)

procedure member: A procedure that is stored in a library.
processing unit: The parts of a computer that perform the
processing and control functions for the system, perform
operations on data, and control output. These units include
main storage, main storage processor, control storage, and
control processor.
program: A sequence of instructions to a computer that
are written in a special form the computer .can interpret.
A program tells the system where to get input, how to
process it, and where to ,put the results.
record: (1) A collection of related data that is treated as
a unit. For example, one line of an invoice could constitute a record. A complete set of records could form a file.
(2) To store data on a reusable input/output medium,
such as a disk, diskette, or punched cards.
record key: A field within a record that identifies the
record in a file.
region: The amount of main storage available for a task.
SOA (screen design aid): Part of the Utilities Program
Product that is used to create, add, update, and delete
entire formats in an SFGR load member.
SOLe (synchronous data link control): A discipline

for the management of information transfer over a data
communications channel.

Glossary

G-3

SEU (source entry utility): Part of the Utilities Program
Product used by the operator to enter and update procedures
and source programs in a library.
SNA (systems network architecture): An IBM communications protocol for controlling data transfer in a data
communications network.
Sort: Part of the Utilities Program Product used to arrange
records (or their relative record numbers) in a predetermined
sequence, according to data contained in one or more specific
fields within the records.
source member: A collection of records (such as RPG II
specifications or sort sequence specifications) that is used
as input for a program. Source members are stored in a
library.
source statement: A statement written in symbols of a
programming language.
spool file: An area on disk where spooled printer output
is stored while waiting to be printed.

subsystem: An IBM supplied SSP-Interactive Communications Feature module which runs as a System/34 task and
provides specific data management, and, if applicable,
fink-level functions. All functions provided by the
SSP-ICF for the System/34 user require one of the defined
subsystems.
syntax: (1) The structure of expressions in a language.
(2) The rules governing the structure of a language.
syntax checking option: The SEU option that, if on, causes
SEU to check for syntax errors iii each RPG II and auto
reportspe.cification entered or updated under control of
the RPG II display screen formats provided with SEU.
system console: A display station designated to activate
specific sys,tem functions, and to control and monitor
system operation, in addition to functioning as a command
display station.
system library: The library containing the members that
are part of the SSP. The system library is labeled # LIBRARY
and cannot be deleted from disk. (See library and user
library.)

spool writer: A program that causes printer output, which
has been stored in the spool file, to be printed.
spooling: A part of the SSP that provides temporary
storage of print data on disk.
SRT (single requestor terminal program): A program that
can process requests from only one requesting display
station at a time. Contrast with MRT.

system log message: A message, intended for the system
console operator, that is logged into the history file.
system printer: The printer, designated at system configuration time, that is used for system and display station
printed output, unless the output is specifically directed to
another printer.

SSP: System Support Program Product.

task: A unit of work for the main storage processor;
therefore, the basic multiprogramming unit under the
control program.

SSP-ICF (system support program interactive communications feature): A feature of the SSP that includes interactive support for BSC and SNA communications as well
as communications between programs within the system.

transient area: An area of main storage or control storage
used for temporary storage of transient routines.

SSP-ICF session: A logical information route between a
System}34 application and a remote subsystem.

unprintable character: A character that cannot be printed
by the printer being used by the system.
user 10: An identification of a user.

standby mode: A method of operation in which a display
station is waiting to be acquired and used by a program
running on the system.
statement number: In SEU, a number assigned to a statement by the program for reference by the operator. Statement numbers are not permanent.
subconsole: A display station that controls a printer or
printers assigned to it.

G-4

user library: A library created by the user. A Llser library
is in addition to the system library, and may contain any
type of library member.
work station: A device that lets a person transmit information to or receive information from a computer, or
both, as needed to perform his job; for example, a display
station or printer.

work station 10: The identification assigned to a work
station at configuration time.
WSU (work station utility): A part of the Utilities
Program Product that performs an interactive data
entry and edit function.

Glossary

G-5

G-6

Index

#SE@FORM
#SE@XTRA

7-2
7-2

batch BSC (continued)
switched network backup
blank screen 3-4, 4-35
BSC 15-3, 15-6
buzzer 2-52, 4-57

Additional Information display 2-55, 4-60
additional information
messages 2-56, 4-59, 4-61
Address/Data switches 4-6,4-7, 15-2, 16-5
alternative system console 4-37
APAR
command 16-7
procedure 4-59
ASM command 11-1
assembler
command 11 -1
messages 11-3
ASSIGN command 4-56
ASSIGN NOSUB command 3-3
AUTO command 10-1, 10- 7
autocall G-1,2-26
problem determination 15- 26
autowriter 4- 75

badge security 2-7, 2-9
BASIC
ideographic characters in 14-1
keys used 14-3
procedure commands 14-1
BASIC 14-1
BASIC MRT 14-1, 14-4
BASICP 14-1, 14-7
BASICR 14-1, 14-5
BASICS 14-1, 14-8
terminating
BASIC 14-3
BASIC MRT 14-4
BASICP 14-7
BASICR 14-6
Basic Assembler
command 11 -1
messages 11 -3
bat~h accumulators, DFU
6-19
batch BSC
multipoint line 15-3
point-to-point nonswitched line
switched line 15-4

15-4

CANCEL command 2-82, 4-73
CANCEL JOBQ command 2-77,3-20,4-116
CANCEL PRT command 2-67, 3-29, 4-85
canceling executing job 4- 73
canceling jobs, input job queue 2-77,
4-116
canceling spool file
entries 2-67, 3-29, 4-85
carriage check
3262/5211
16-12
5224/5225 16-15
5256 16-13
CE display lights 16-5, 16-6, 16-7
CE panel 4-7, 15-2
CE panel cover 4-6
CE Start switch 16-10, 16-10
CE subpanel 16-9
C E switches 16-2
CGU command A-1
CHANGE COPIES command 2-71,3-33,4-89
CHANGE DEFER command 2-70, 3-34, 4-90
CHANGE FORMS command 2-72, 3-36, 4-92
CHANGE ID command 3-38, 4-94
CHANGE JOBQ command 4-116
CHANGE PRT command 3-40, 4-96
CHANGE PRTY command 3-41, 4-97
CHANGE RES commad 3-42
CHANGE RES command 4-98
CHANGE SEP command 3-43, 4-99
changing forms number 2-72, 3-36, 4-92
changing number of printed
copies 2-71,3-33,4-89
changing order of jobs, input job
queue 4-116
changing order of spool file entries 4-96
changing printer ID 3-38
changing priority of an executing
job 4-74
changing the number of separator
pages 3-43, 4-99
changing the order of spool file
entries 3-40

15-3

Index

X-1

changing the priority of a spool
writer 3-41, 4-97
changing the resident/ swappable attribute
of a spool writer 3-42, 4-98
character generator utility A-1, G-1, 1-2
command function keys A-2
function control keys A-4
check, reformatting after a program 4-18
clock 2-26
coaxial/twinaxial interface check 16-17
COBMOVE command 13-7
COBOL
command 13-2
command statements 13-1
COBLCG 13-4
COBMOVE 13-7
COBOL 13-2
COBOLG 13-5
COBOLP 13-2
COBSYSIN 13-6
ideographic characters in 13-1
messages 13-8
COBOLCG command 13-4
COBOLG command 13-5
COBOLP command 13-2
COBSYSIN command 13-6
Comm Dply switch 15-2, 15-3, 15- 26
command display 2-10
command display station 2-1
command display station Sign On
display 2-7
command display with menu 2-10
command display without menu 2-11
command function keys
CGU A-2
CONSOLE file 10-10
DFU 6-2
general description 2-61
SDA 9-4
SET operation 10-14
SEU 7-5
WORKSTN file 10-16
WSU 5-14
command mode 2-3
command parameters, DFU 6-8
command statement, WSU 5-1
commandstc:lt~J!l~!1~~__ G-1, 2-47
communications line, dropping
switched 2-82
communications network interface check
(5225 Printer) 16-1 7
communications support status 2-23, 2-25
compile, RPG II 10-4
compiling RPG II programs 10-1
Console Check light 4-5, 16-8
CONSOLE command 4-37
console display lights, data
communications 15-1

X-2

CONSOLE file
command function keys 10-10
data entry 10-9, 10-12
function control keys 10-11
console, alternative system 4-37
control command G-2, 2-47

data communications
consote display ttghts -15-2
how to operate adapter 15-3
interactive communications 15-5
MRJE/SRJE 15-7
problem determination 15-24
data display station G-2, 2-1
data display station Sign On display 2-9
data entry
CONSOLE file 10-9
KEYBORD file 10-12
WORKSTN file 10-16
data file utility (see DFU)
data mode G-2, 2-3
DATE command 2-43
date, session 2-43
defer status of a spool file entry,
changing 2- 70, 3-34, 4-90
device IDs, exchanging 4-56
devices
offline 4-55
online 4-55
status 4-38
DFU (data file utility)
batch accumulators 6-19
command function keys 6-2, 6-3
command parameters 6-8
deleting a record 6-22
displaying records 6-30
enter mode 6-10
enter / update display format 6-14
entering a new record 6-20
function control keys 6-2, 6-6
ideographic DFU 6-2
inquiry 6-27
display format 6- 29
inserting a record 6- 23
list 6-31
printing records 6-30
record key 6-15
retrieving a record 6- 24
retrieving records by scrolling 6-24
status information 6-14
template 6-2
terminating enter/update 6-25
terminating inquiry job 6-31
update mode 6-12
updating a record 6-21

disk
dump area 16-7
IPL 4-15
diskette
diskette 1 G-2, 4-8, 4-9
diskette 2D G-2, 4-8, 4-9
handling 4-8
I/O slot jam 4-14
inserting 4-8, 4-9, 4-11
IPL 4-31
RELOAD command for 4-33
magazine
handling 4-11
inserting 4-12
jam 4-13
removing 4-13
removing 4-10, 4-11, 4-12
diskette 1 4-9
diskette 2D 4-9
display
Additional Information 2-55, 4-60
ASM procedure 11-2
COBOL procedure 13-3
command 2-11
command display station Sign On 2-7
command with menu 2-10
data display station Sign On 2-9
data file utility procedures 6-8
format
DFU enter/update 6-14
DFU inquiry 6-29
ICF configuration specification 15-19
Inquiry Options 2-78
IPL 2-6
Job Queue Status 2-76, 3-18, 4-114
lights 4-7, 15-2, 16-5, 16-6
primary SDLC error retry counts 15-15
primary SDLC station test 15-16
RPG 1\ procedure 10-4
Screen Design Aid 9-3
Session Status 2-17
SEU procedure 7-4
Sign On 2-7
SORT procedure 8-2
Spool Writer Status 2-65, 3-26, 4-82
Spooled Print Status 2-63, 3-21, 4-77
SSP-ICF Session status 4-51
Standby 2-12
station test status 15-19
Status Users 4-67
Subconsole Message status 4-54
subsystem status 4-49
System 4-34, 4-35
tasks in the system 4-47
Workstation Status 2-34, 3-5, 3-6, 4-38
WSU prompt 5-4
Display / Data switches 16-5, 16-6, 16-10
display station
command 2-1
data 2-1

display station (continued)
functions 2-2
indicators 2-52
operation 1 -1, 2-1, 2-3
operator control commands
CANCEL JOBQ 2-5, 2-77
CANCEL PRT 2-5, 2-67
CHANGE COPIES 2-5, 2-71
CHANGE DEFER 2-5, 2-70
CHANGE FORMS 2-5, 2-72
CONSOLE 2-5, 4-37
HOLD PRT 2-5, 2-68
IDELETE 2-~ 2-60
JOBQ 2-5, 2-74
MENU 2-5, 2-47
MODE 2-3, 2-5
MSG 2-5, 2-58
OFF 2-5, 2-81
PRTY 2-5, 2-50, 2-77
RELEASE PRT 2-5, 2-69
STATUS COMM 2-5, 2-23, 2-25, 2-26, 2-27
STATUS JOBQ 2-5, 2-76
STATUS PRT 2-5, 2-63
STATUS REMOTES 2-5, 2-39, 2-40
STATUS SESSION 2-5, 2-17
STATUS SUBSESS 2-5, 2-31
STATUS SUBSYS 2-5, 2-28
STATUS WORKSTN 2-5, 2-34
STATUS WRT 2-5, 2-65
TIME 2-5, 2-81
sign off 2-81
sign on 2-6
displaying
input job queue 2-76, 3-18, 4-114
messages 2-58
records, DFU 6-30
time 2-81, 3-46, 4-65
displays, SEU 7-23
down time 16-1
dropping a switched communications
line 2-82
dump area 16-7
DUMP procedure 4-59, 16-7, 16-10
DUP key 2-62

end of forms
3262/5211
16-12
5224/5225 16-15
5256 16-13
enter mode
DFU 6-10
WSU 5-5
equalization, 2400 bps integrated
modem 15-8
error LSR 16-6
error retry counts, primary SDLC

15-15

Index

X-3

errors, keyboard 4-62
examples, general spooling 4-100
exchanging device IDs 4-56
executing job
canceling 4-73
changing priority 4-74
execution
restarting job 4- 72
stopping job 4- 70

failure, reformatting after a power 4-18
file
history 4-58
file rebuild, IPl 4-18
forms number, changing 3-36, 4-92
FORMS OCl statement 2-46
FORTC command 12-2
FORTCG command 12-6
FORTG command 12-4
FORTGO command 12-4
FORTMOVE command 12-8
FORTP command 12-2
FORTPRNT command 12-7
FORTRAN
command statements 12-1
FORTC 12-2
FORTCG 12-6
FORTG 12-4
FORTGO 12-4
FORTMOVE 12-8
FORTP 12-2
FORTPRNT 12-7
data switch procedure 12-9
messages 12-12
function control keys
CGU A-4
CONSOLE file 10-11
DFU 6-2
general description 2-61
SEU 7-5
WORKSTN file 10-16
WSU 5-14,5-17

handling, diskette 4-8, 4-9
hardware check (5225 Printer) 16-17
help displays, SDA 9-6
help menu, SDA 9-6
HELP procedure, how to use 2-13
history file 2-53, 4-58
HOLD PRT command 2-68, 3-30, 4-86
holding spool file entries 2-68, 3-30, 4-86

X-4

ICF configuration specification 15-19
ID
job 4-59
reply 4-58
IDElETE command 2-60, 4-64
ideographic sort A-6, G-2, 1-2
sort active table build function A-7
ideographic version of SSP 2-2,2-8,2-10
IDs, exchanging device 4-56
image, print belt 16-11
Immediate Power Off switch 4-5
incorrect output 16-10
indicators, display station 2-52
indicators, Message Waiting 4-57
informational messages 2-52
suppressing 2-60, 4-64
initiation
restarting job 4- 72
stopping job 4- 70
input job queue G-2, 2-74,4-113
canceling jobs 2-77,3-20,4-116
changing order of jobs 4-116
control 4-113
displaying 2-76, 3-18, 4-114
job status 2- 76
parameters, override 4- 24
priority 2-77
putting a job on 2-74
starting 4-115
stopping 4-115
inquiry
DFU 6-27
display format, DFU 6-29
options 2-78
Inquiry Options display 2-78
insert mode, WSU 5-9
inserting a diskette 4-9
inserting a magazine 4-12
interactive communications
multipoint line 15-5
point-to-point nonswitched line 15-5
switched line-SSC subsystems 15-6
switched line-SNA subsystems 15-6
switched network backup 15-5
interrupting a job 2-78
I Pl (initial program load)
cannot 16-8
display 2-6
file rebuild 4-18
from disk 4-16
from diskettes 4-31
from diskettes, RELOAD 4-33
overrides 4- 21
sign on 4-16
system console 4-16
IPO switch 4-5

job control 4-66
job execution
canceling 4- 73
changing priority 4-74
restarting 4- 72
stopping 4- 70
job 10 4-59
job initiation
restarting 4-72
stopping 4- 70
job name G-2, 2-47
job queue (see input job queue)
Job Queue Status display 2-76, 3-18, 4-114
job status 4-67
job, incorrect output 16-10
job, interrupting 2-78
JOBQ command 2- 74
jobs
canceling 2-77
changing order 4-116
running 2-47

KEY operation 10-13
keyboard error 2-57, 4-62
keyboard message, sample 2-57
KEYBORO file, data entry 10-12

lamp test, 4800 bps modem 15-11
lED display (5224/5225 Printer) 16-14
LIBRARY OCl statement 2-46
library security 2-8
lights
CE display 4-4, 15-2, 15-24, 16-5,
16-6, 16-7
Console Check 4-5, 16-8
console display 15-2, 15-3
load 4-5
Power 4-5
Power Check 4-5, 16-4
printer indicator 16-11
Processor Check 4-5, 16-5
Stop 16-9
System In Use 4-5, 16-9
Thermal Check 4-5, 16-4
4800 bps modem operator panel 15-11,
1 5-1 2, 15-14
lines per page 2-44
LINES procedure 2-44
list, OFU 6-31
load switch/light 4-5

local devices
putting online 4-55
taking offline 4-55
lOCAL OCl statement 2-46
loop/transmit test, 4800 bps modem
looping program 16-10
lSR, error 16-6

15-14

Macro Processor 11 -1
MAR values 16-6
MEMBER OCl statement 2-46
member type, SEU 7-2
menu 2-48
command display 2-10
sample 2-48
SOA help 9-6
WSU 5-11
MENU command 2-47
message
how to send 2-58, 3-45, 4-62
identification code 2 - 53
identifier 2-53, 4-58
options 2-54, 4-59
replying 3-44, 4-63
sample 2-53
system log 2-52
Message Waiting indicator 2-52, 4-57
messages 2-52, 4-57
additional information 2-55, 4-60
basic assembler 11-3
COBOL 13-8
guide to responding 2-56, 4-61
how to display 2-58
printer intervention required 4-64
replying 3-44, 4-63
rerouted from system console 2-59
RPG II 10-16
sample from other display stations 2-59
suppressing informational 2-60, 4-64
system log 2-52
messages at subconsole, display status
of 4-53
M lCA controller
communication line test 15-27
controller test 15-27
definition G-3
problem determination 15-27
mode
command 2-3
data 2-3
OFU
enter 6-10
inquiry 6-27
list 6-31
update 6-12
standby 2-3

Index

X-5

mode (continued)
subconsole 2-3, 3-1
system console 2-3, 4-36

WSU
enter 5-5
insert 5-9
review 5-8
review / delete 5-9
Mode Selector switch 4-6
modem 2 - 23, 15- 26
2400 bps integrated 15-8
4800 bps integrated 15-11
modes, operating 2-3
modify work session items 2-46
MRJE/SRJE 15-7
MRT G-3, 2-80
M RT program 10-3
MSG command 2-58, 3-45, 4-62
mUltipoint nonswitched network 15-10

network
multipoint nonswitched 15-10
nonswitched 15-24
point-to- point nonswitched 15-10
switched 1 5- 25
no system power 16-4
no visible system action 16-9
nonswitched network
multipoint, 2400 bps modem 15-10
point to point, 2400 bps modem 15-10
problem determination 15-24
not ready
3262/5211
16-12
5224/5225 16-17
5256 16-13
nucleus size 2-21
number of lines per page 2-44
number of printed copies 4-89

OCl G-3, 2-46
FORMS 2-46
LIBRARY 2-46
lOCAL 2-46
MEMBER 2-46
PRINTER 2-51
REGION 2-52
SWITCH 2-52
OFF command 2-81
OFF DROP command 2-82
offline, taking devices 4-55
OLINK command 11-2
online, putting devices 4-55

X-6

operating modes 2-3
operation control language 2-46
operation, display station 1-1, 2-1
operator
control commands 2-4
panel 4-4
options, messages 2-54, 4-59
order of spool file entries,
changing 3-40
order, changing spool file entry 4-96
output, incorrect 16-10
overrides
communications features 4-22
history fi~e 4-- 28
input job queue parameters 4-27
performance parameters 4-23, 4-30
spooling parameters 4-25
system parameters 4-21, 4-24

pages, changing the number of
separator 3-43
panel, CE 4-7, 15-2, 16-5
password security 2- 7, 2-9
performance parameters,
overrides 4-23, 4-30
point-to-point nonswitched network 15-10
Power Check light 4-5, 16-4
power failure, reformatting after a 4-18
Power light 4-5
Power switch 4- 5
power, system 16-4
primary SDlC
error retry counts 15-15
station test 15-16
print belt 4-66
print belt image 4-66, 16-11
print check
3262/5211
16-11
5224/5225 16-14
5256 16-13
print spooling
display station 2-62
examples 4-100
subconsole 3-23
system console 4- 75
printed copies, changing number 3-33, 4-89
printer
10, how to change 3-38, 4-94
indicator lights 16-11, 16-13
information 2-51
intervention required messages 4-64
recovery
3262/5211
16-11
5224/5225 16-14
5256 16-13
PRINTER OCl 2-51

printing
records, DFU 6-31
restarting spool file entries 3-25, 4-81
starting spool file entries 3-23, 4-79
stopping spool file entries 3-24, 4-80
printing separator pages 3-43, 3-43, 4-99
priority 2-50
changing 4-74
input job queue 2-77
priority of a spool writer,
changing 3-41, 4-97
problem determination
cannot IPl 16-8
console check light on 16-8
data communications 15-24
autocall 15- 26
M lCA controller 15- 27
nonswitched network 15-24
switched network 15-25
general 16-1, 16-3
incorrect output 16-10
no system power 16-4
no visible system action 16-9
power check light on 16-4
printer error recovery
3262/5211 printer 16-11
5224/5225 printer 16-14
5256 printer 16-13
printer indicator lights on
3262/5211 printer 16-11
5256 printer 16-13
processor check light on 16-5
thermal check light on 16-4
problem location 16-1
proceQ.ure command 2-47
DATE 2-43
LINES 2-44
procedure, APAR 4-59
procedure, DUMP 4-59
procedure, SETRETRY 15-15
Processor Check light 4-5, 16-5
program check
reformatting after a 4-18
3262/5211
16-12
5224/5225 16-17
5256 16-13
program, looping 16-10
protected dump area 16-7
PRTY command 2-50, 2-77, 4-74

record key, DFU 6-15
recovery
3262 printer 16-11
5211 printer 16-11
5224/5225 printer 16-14
5256 printer 16-13

reformatting 4-18
after a power failure 4-18
after a program check 4-18
REGION OCl 2-52
region size 2-52
RELEASE PRT command 2-69, 3-31, 4-87
releasing spool file
entries 2-69, 3-31, 4-~7
RELOAD command 4-33
RELOAD, IPl from diskettes 4-33
remote devices
putting online 4-55
taking offline 5-55
remote system devices
status 2-2,3-10
remote work stations 15-6
nonswitched lines 15- 7
switched lines 15-7
removing diskette 4-8, 4-10
REPLY command 3-44, 4-63
reply ID 4-58
replying to message 4-63
resident/ swappable attribute of a spool
writer, changing 3-42, 4-98
RESTART PRT command 3-25, 4-81
restarting system 4-65
review / delete mode, WSU 5-9
review mode, WSU 5-8
RPG command 10-2
RPG \I
command statements 10-1
AUTO 10-7
RPG 10-2
RPGR 10-5
RPGX 10-4
compiling programs 10-1
executing object program 10-9
ideographic characters in 10-1
messages 10-16
processing 10-1
RPGR command 10-5
RPGX command 10-4
running jobs 2-47
example 2-49

sample menu 2-48
sample message 2-53
screen design aid (see SDA)
SDA (screen design aid) G-3
command 9-1
command function keys 9-4
help displays 9-6
ideographic characters in 9-1
sign on 9-1
template 9-4
SDAH command 9-6

Index

X-7

SDLC error retry counts, primary 15-15
SDLC station test
general information 15-16
notes 15-23
operation 15-16
peer configuration 15-23
security
badge 2-7, 2-9
library (resource) 2-8
menu 2-7, 2-8
password 2- 7, 2-9
resource 2-8
self test, 4800 bps modem 15-11
sending a message 2-58, 3-45, 4-62
separator characters 2- 26
separator pages, changing the number
of 3-43, 4-99
session
date 2-43
printer 2-17
region 2-17
status
communications 2-23, 2-25
display 2-17
SET command 4-66
SET/KEY combination 10-15
SET operation 10-14
command function keys 10-14
SETRETRY procedure 15-15
setting print belt image 4-66
SEU (source entry utility) G-4
command 7-1
command function keys 7-5
Delete mode 7 -10
Enter/Update mode 7-6
Include mode 7-16
Move/Copy mode 7-14
Replace mode 7 -12
Scan mode 7-19
Translate mode 7-21
displays 7-23
function control keys
Delete mode 7 -11
Enter/Update mode 7-8
Include mode 7-18
Move/Copy mode 7-15
Replace mode 7 -13
Scan mode 7 - 20
Translate mode 7-22
member type 7-2
message translate aid 7-1
sign on 7~1
statement length 7-3
status line 7 - 24
template 7-5
shutting down 4-65
sign off 2-81
sign on 2-6

X-8

sign on display
command display station 2- 7
data display station 2-9
sign on, IPL 4-15
sign on, SEU 7-1
sort G-4
active table build function A- 7
ideographic A-6
running program 8-1
SORT command 8-1
source entry utility (see SEU)
spool file
entries
canceling 2-67, 3-29, 4-85
changing defer status 2- 70, 3-34, 4-90
changing order 4-96
changing the order of 3-40
displaying 2-63, 3-21, 4-76
holding 2-68, 3-30, 4-86
releasing 2-69, 3-31, 4-87
restarting printing 3-25, 4-81
starting printing 3- 23, 4- 79
stopping printing 3-24, 4-80
spool writer
changing the number of separator
pages 3-43, 4-99
changing the priority of 3-41, 4-97
changing the resident/ swappable
attribute 3-42, 4-98
displaying status 2-65, 3-26, 4-82
restarting 3- 25, 4- 81
starting 3-23, 4-79
stopping 3-24, 4-80
Spool Writer Status display 2-65, 3-26
Spooled Print Status
display 2-63, 3-21, 4-77
spooling examples, general 4-100
spooling parameters, overrides 4-25
spooling, print 2-62, 3-21, 4-75
SRT program G-4, 2-78
SRTX command A-6
SSP-ICF (see Interactive Communications)
SSP-ICF subsystems G-4
session status 2-31, 3-16, 4-51
starting 4- 71
status of 2- 28, 3-14, 4-49
stopping 4- 71
standby display 2-12
standby mode G-4, 2-3
START JOB command 4-72
START JOBQ command 4-115
START PRT command 3-23, 4-79
START SESSION command 4-71
START SYSTEM command 4-65
START WORKSTN command 4-72
starting input job queue 4-115
statement length, SEU 7-3
statements, command 2-47
station test status 15-19
STATUS COMM command 2-23, 2-25, 2-26, 2-27

status information, DFU 6-14
STATUS JOBQ command 2-76,3-18,4-114
status line, SEU 7-23
STATUS MESSAGE 4-53
status of a spool file entry, changing the
defer 2-70, 3-34, 4-90
STATUS PRT command 2-63,3-21,4-76
STATUS REMOTES 3-10
STATUS SESSION command 2-17
STATUS SUBSESS command 2-31,3-16,4-51
STATUS SUBSYS command 2-28, 3-14, 4-49
status switch, system console 16-8
STATUS SYSTASK command 4-47
STATUS USERS command 4-67
STATUS WORKSTN command 2-34, 3-5, 3-6, 4-38
STATUS WRT command 2-65
status, communication support 2-23, 2-25
status, job queue 2-76, 3-18, 4-114
status, remote system
devices 2-39, 2-40, 3-10, 4-43
status, spool writer 2-65, 3-26
status, station test 15-19
status, subsystem 4-49
status, system devices 2-34, 3-5, 3-6, 4-38
status, work session 2-17
STOP JOB command 4-70
STOPJOBQcommand 4-115
stop light 16-9
STOP PRT command 2-82, 3-24, 4-80
STOP SESSION command 4-71
STOP SYSTEM command 4-65
STOP WORKSTN command 4-70
stopping input job queue 4-115
subconsole G-4
definition G-4
installation 3-1
messages 3-45
mode 2-4, 3-1, 3-3
operation 1-1, 3-1
operator control commands 2-4
CANCEL JOBQ 3-4, 3-20
CANCEL PRT 3-4, 3-29
CHANGE COPIES 3-4, 3-33
CHANGE DEFER 3-4, 3-34
CHANGE FORMS 3-4, 3-36
CHANGE ID 3-4, 3-38
CHANGE PRT 3-4, 3-40
CHANGE PRTY 3-4, 3-41
CHANGE RES 3-4, 3-42
CHANGE SEP 3-4, 3-43
HOLD PRT 3-4, 3-30
MSG 3-4, 3-45
RELEASE PRT 3-4, 3-31
REPLY 3-4, 3-44
RESTART PRT 3-4, 3-25
START PRT 3-4, 3-23
STATUS JOBQ 3-4, 3-18
STATUS PRT 3-4, 3-21
STATUS REMOTES 3-4, 3-10, 3-11

subconsole (continued)
operator control commands (continued)
STATUS SUBSESS 3-4, 3-16
STATUS SUBSYS 3-4, 3-14
STATUS WORKSTN 3-4, 3-5, 3-6
STATUS WRT 3-4, 3-26
STOP PRT 3-4, 3-24
TIME 3-4, 3-46
security 3-1
specifying 3-1, 3-3
Subsystem Session Status display 4-51
Subsystem Status display 4-49
suppress informational messages 2-60, 4-64
switch
CE Start 16-10, 16-10
Comm Dply 15-3
Immediate Power Off 4-5
IPO 4-5
Load 4-5
Mode Selector 4-6, 16-5
Power 4-5
Terminator 16-8
SWITCH OCL 2-52
switch settings 16-2
switched line 15-4, 15-6, 15-7
dropping 2-82
switched network 15-4, 15-25
problem determination 15-25
switches
Address/Data 4-7, 15-2, 16-5
Display / Data 16-5, 16-6
SYSLIST procedure 2-45
system action, no visible 16-9
system console G-4
alternative 4-37
as a display station 4-36
input job queue control 4-113
IPL 4-15
mode 2-3, 4-36
operation 1 -1, 4-1
operator control commands 2-4, 4-2
ASSIGN 4-2, 4-56
CANCEL 4-2,4-73, 16-10
CANCEL JOBQ 4-2, 4-116
CANCEL PRT 4-2, 4-85
CHANGE COPIES 4-2,4-89
CHANGE DEFER 4-2, 4-90
CHANGE FORMS 4-2, 4-92
CHANGE ID 4-2, 4-94
CHANGE JOBQ 4-2, 4-116
CHANGE PRT 4-2, 4-96
CHANGE PRTY 4-2, 4-97
CHANGE RES 04-0023
, 4-98
CHANGE SEP 4-2, 4-99
CONSOLE 4-2, 4-37
HOLD PRT 4-2, 4-86
IDELETE 4-2, 4-64
MSG 4-2,4-62
PRTY 4-2, 4-74

Index

X-9

system console (continued)
operator control commands (continued)
RELEASE PRT 4-2, 4-87
REPLY 4-2, 4-63
RESTART PRT 4-2, 4-81
START JOB 4-2, 4-72
STARTJOBQ 4-2,4-115
START PRT 4-2, 4-79
START SESSION 4-2, 4-71
START SYSTEM 4-2,4-65
START WORKSTN 4-2,4-72
STATUS JOBQ 4-2, 4-114
STATUS MESSAGE 4-2, 4-53
STATUS PRT 4-2,4-76
STATUS REMOTES 4-2, 4-43
STATUS SUBSESS 4-2, 4-51
STATUS SUBSYS 4-3,4-49
STATUS SYSTASK 4-:3, 4-47
STATUS USERS 4-3, 4-67
STATUS WORKSTN 4-3, 4-38
STATUS WRT 4-3, 4-82
STOP JOB 4-3, 4-70
STOP JOBQ 4-3, 4-115
STOP PRT 4-3, 4-80
STOP SESSION 4-3, 4-71
STOP SYSTEM 4-3, 4-65
STOP WORKSTN 4-3, 4-70
TIME 4-3, 4-65
VARY 4-3, 4-55
status switch 16-8
system devices status 2-34, 3-5, 3-6, 4-38
system display 4-35
System In Use light 4-5
system list device 2-45
system log message 2-52
system parameters, overrides 4-21, 4-24
system power 16-4
System/34 utilities 1-2

tasks in the system 4-47
template
DFU 6-2
SDA 9-4
SEU 7-5
WSU 5-14
temporary error
3262/5211 16-12
5224/5225 16-17
5262 16-14
terminating enter/update, DFU 6-25
terminating inquiry job, DFU 6-31
Terminator switch 16-8
Thermal Check light 4-5, 16-4
TIME 2-81, 3-46, 4-65
transmit/ receive test, 4800 bps
modem 15-12

X-10

tributary address 2-24
twinaxial interface check
5224/5225 16-17
5256 16-14

update mode, DFU 6-12
user ID 2-7, 2-9
Users Status display 4-67
utilities, idoegraphic A-1

VARY command

2-82,4-55, 15-25

work session items, modify 2-46
work session status 2-17
work station utility (see WSU)
Workstation Status
display 2-34, 3-5, 3-6, 4-38, 4-39
WORKSTN file
command function keys 10-16
data entry 10-16
writer, spool (see spool writer)
WSU (work station utility) G - 5
aid display 5-13
command 5-1
command function keys 5-14, 5-15
enter mode 5-5
function control keys 5-14, 5-17
insert mode 5-9
menu 5-11
program, restart 5-10
prompt display 5-4
review / delete mode 5-9
review mode 5-8
sign on 5-5
status line 5-12
template 5-14
work session end 5-10
WSUaiddisplay 5..,13
WSU status line 5-12

X.21 line

2-27

2400 bps Integrated Modem
equalization 15-8
operator panel 15-9
3262/5211 Printer Recovery 16-11
4800 bps Integrated Modem
lamp test 15-11
loop/transmit test 15-14
manual test procedures 15-11
operator panel 15-12
self test 15-11
transmit / receive test 15-12
5211 Printer Recovery 16-11

Index

X-11

X·12

READER'S COMMENT FORM
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or request changes to publications. Technical questions about IBM systems, changes in IBM programming
support, requests for additional publications, etc, should be directed to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office nearest your location.
Error in publication (typographical, illustration, and so on). No reply.
Page Number

Error

Inaccurate or misleading information in this publication. Please tell us
about it by using this postage-paid form. We will correct or clarify the
publication, or tell you why a change is not being made, provided you
include your name and address.
Page Number

'C
CD

@ CI)
'*<
..,o CII'*
CII'

c) ...

c::

Q:.j:Io
CD

Comment

CI)

(')

Name
IBM may use and distribute any of the information you supply in any way
it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation whatever. You may,
of course, continue to use the information you supply.

Company or
Organization
Address

• No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.

SC21-5158-7

Fold and tape

Please do not staple

Fold and tape

IIIIII
BUSINESS
FIRST CLASS

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY IF
MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

MAIL

PERMIT NO. 40

ARMONK, N. Y.

POSTAGE Will BE PAID BY . . .

IBM CORPORATION
General Systems Division
Development Laboratory
Pu bl ications, Dept. 245
Rochester, Minnesota 55901

Fold and tape

--------- --- ------------_.-

Please do not staple

Fold and tape

-.--- ------

- --------. _
- ....==-=':'=(!)

a:co

SC21-5158-7

Printed in U.S.A.

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2015:08:07 19:47:45-08:00 Modify Date : 2015:08:07 19:20:22-07:00 Metadata Date : 2015:08:07 19:20:22-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:77f56279-f830-eb4d-a85e-e5dd5ab730a5 Instance ID : uuid:4be03c2c-7a58-a540-b99f-cd5be6a24199 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 462
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

SC21 5158 7_System34_Operators_Guide_Jan82 7 System34 Operators Guide Jan82

SC21-5158-7_System34_Operators_Guide_Jan82 SC21-5158-7_System34_Operators_Guide_Jan82

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation